RANGER Neo 2

RANGER Neo 3
RANGER Neo 4
TV AND SATELLITE ANALYZER

-0 MI2130 -
 SAFETY NOTES

Read the user’s manual before using the equipment, mainly "SAFETY RULES"
paragraph.

The symbol on the equipment means "SEE USER’S MANUAL". In this manual may
also appear as a Caution or Warning symbol.

WARNING AND CAUTION statements may appear in this manual to avoid injury
hazard or damage to this product or other property.

The terms HDMI, HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, HDMI Trade Dress
and the HDMI Logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing
Administrator, Inc. in the United States and other countries.

ELECTRONIC MANUAL VERSION

You can access instantly to any chapter by clicking on the title of the chapter in the table
of contents.

Click on the arrow at the top right page to return to the table of contents.

At Index, click on page number to access the subject.

Click on the link or scan the QR code inside de video boxes in order to play a
tutorial video.

USER’S MANUAL VERSION

Manual Version Web Publication Date Firmware Version

F9.2 November 2023 31.5

Please update your equipment to the latest software version available (for more details
refer to “NetUpdate Connection” on page 249). Ask PROMAX for the update file if the
server is not available.

This user's manual describes operation for models RANGER Neo 2, RANGER Neo
3 and RANGER Neo 4. Differences between them are specified by an asterisk (*)
and in certain sections explicitly.

Screen captures of current manual are from the RANGER Neo 3.

i
 WHAT’S NEW on manual F9

•Update: Specifications (channel plans)

•Update: HDMI™ trademark.
•Update: M3U compatible.
•Update: Specifications (Digicipher II).
•Update: Older versions of “What’s new on manual” are moved as an annex.

NOTE: For changes in previous versions of the user’s manual please refer
to “PREVIOUS VERSIONS OF USER’S MANUAL” on page 330

ii
 SAFETY RULES

* The safety could not be assured if the instructions for use are not closely followed.

* Use this equipment connected only to systems with their negative of measurement
connected to ground potential.

* The AL-103 external DC charger is a Class I equipment, for safety reasons plug it to
a supply line with the corresponding ground terminal.

* This equipment can be used in Overvoltage Category I installations and Pollution

Degree 2 environments.

* External DC charger can be used in Overvoltage Category II, installation and Pollution
Degree 1 environments.

* When using some of the following accessories use only the specified ones to ensure
safety:

 Rechargeable battery
 External DC charger
 Car lighter charger cable
 Power cord

* Observe all specified ratings both of supply and measurement.

* Remember that voltages higher than 70 V DC or 33 V AC rms are dangerous.

* Use this instrument under the specified environmental conditions.

* When using the power adaptor, the negative of measurement is at ground potential.

* Do not obstruct the ventilation system of the instrument.

* Use for the signal inputs/outputs, specially when working with high levels, appropriate
low radiation cables.

* Follow the cleaning instructions described in the Maintenance paragraph.

iii
 SAFETY SYMBOLS

DESCRIPTIVE EXAMPLES OF OVER-VOLTAGE CATEGORIES

* Cat I: Low voltage installations isolated from the mains.

* Cat II: Portable domestic installations.

* Cat III: Fixed domestic installations.

* Cat IV: Industrial installations.

CAUTION: The battery used can present danger of fire or chemical burn if it is
severely mistreat. Do not disassembly, cremate or heat the battery
above 100 °C under no circumstances.

iv
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................ 1
1.1. Description ............................................................................................ 1
2. SETTING UP .............................................................................................. 3
2.1. Package Content .................................................................................... 3
2.2. Power ................................................................................................... 3
2.3. Equipment Details .................................................................................. 7
2.4. Switching On/Off ...................................................................................16
2.6. Screen Icons and Dialog Boxes................................................................17
2.5. Reset...................................................................................................17
2.7. Menu Tree ............................................................................................18
2.8. Controls ...............................................................................................26
2.9. Practical examples.................................................................................40
3. SETTINGS AND PREFERENCES ................................................................. 43
3.1. Settings Menu.......................................................................................43
3.2. Video & Audio Settings...........................................................................47
3.3. Preferences Menu ..................................................................................48
4. RF SIGNAL TUNING ................................................................................. 56
4.1. Introduction .........................................................................................56
4.2. Operation.............................................................................................56
4.3. General Menu Options............................................................................57
4.4. Advanced Options .................................................................................65
4.5. Screen Description ................................................................................68
4.6. Additional Functions...............................................................................83
5. TOOLS ..................................................................................................... 88
5.1. Introduction .........................................................................................88
5.2. Constellation ........................................................................................89
5.3. LTE Ingress Test ...................................................................................92
5.4. Echoes.................................................................................................95
5.5. MER by Carrier......................................................................................97
5.6. MEROGRAM ..........................................................................................99
5.7. Spectrogram....................................................................................... 102
5.8. Attenuation Test ................................................................................. 104
5.9. Signal Monitoring ................................................................................ 107
5.10. Signal Coverage ................................................................................ 115
5.11. Datalogger ....................................................................................... 125
5.12. Screen and Data Capture (Export key) ................................................. 134
5.13. Explore Channel Plan ......................................................................... 135
5.14. Discover FM Stations.......................................................................... 138
5.15. Field Strength ................................................................................... 141
5.16. Task Planner ..................................................................................... 146
5.17. Transport Stream Analyzer ................................................................. 150
5.18. Transport Stream Recording ............................................................... 162
5.19. Network Delay Margin ........................................................................ 165
5.20. Shoulders Attenuation ........................................................................ 167
5.21. Service Recording.............................................................................. 168
5.22. Tilt .................................................................................................. 170
5.23. Scan ................................................................................................ 172
5.24. Streaming V/A .................................................................................. 174
6. WIFI MONITORING ............................................................................... 176

v
 6.1. Introduction ....................................................................................... 176
6.2. Operation........................................................................................... 176
6.3. WiFi Access Point Connect .................................................................... 177
6.4. WiFi Spectrum .................................................................................... 178
6.5. Site Survey ........................................................................................ 181
7. IPTV ..................................................................................................... 184
7.1. Introduction ....................................................................................... 184
7.2. Operation........................................................................................... 184
7.3. Screen Description .............................................................................. 186
7.4. Tools ................................................................................................. 192
7.5. Settings ............................................................................................. 195
8. OTT ...................................................................................................... 199
8.1. Introduction ....................................................................................... 199
8.2. Operation........................................................................................... 199
8.3. Screen Description .............................................................................. 200
9. INSTALLATIONS MANAGEMENT............................................................. 203
9.1. Introduction ....................................................................................... 203
9.2. Operation........................................................................................... 203
9.3. Installation Management ...................................................................... 204
9.4. New Installation .................................................................................. 207
9.5. Edition Tools....................................................................................... 207
9.6. Importing Data from USB ..................................................................... 208
10. WEBCONTROL ..................................................................................... 210
10.1. Introduction...................................................................................... 210
10.2. Settings and Remote Access ............................................................... 211
10.3. Icon Table ........................................................................................ 214
10.4. Measurements and Spectrum .............................................................. 215
10.5. TV Parameters .................................................................................. 216
10.6. Remote Console ................................................................................ 218
10.7. Signal Quality Monitoring .................................................................... 220
10.8. Historical Monitoring .......................................................................... 224
10.9. Installations Management ................................................................... 226
10.10. Task Management............................................................................ 231
10.11. Mask Monitoring .............................................................................. 234
10.12. Mask Historical Monitoring................................................................. 241
11. CONNECTING TO EXTERNAL DEVICES ................................................. 245
11.1. Introduction...................................................................................... 245
11.2. USB Port .......................................................................................... 245
11.3. Ethernet Port .................................................................................... 247
11.4. HDMI™ Interface ............................................................................... 252
11.5. Input Jack Connector ......................................................................... 252
11.6. RF Connector .................................................................................... 253
11.7. Common Interface Slot ...................................................................... 257
11.8. TS-ASI Port ...................................................................................... 259
12. SPECIFICATIONS RANGER Neo 2 / 3 / 4 ............................................. 261
12.1. General ............................................................................................ 261
12.2. Measurement Mode............................................................................ 265
12.3. Spectrum Analyzer Mode .................................................................... 269
12.4. TV Mode........................................................................................... 270
12.5. WiFi Analyzer Mode 2.4 GHz................................................................ 271
12.6. IPTV Mode ........................................................................................ 271

vi
 12.7. Tools ............................................................................................... 272
12.8. Options ............................................................................................ 274
13. MAINTENANCE .................................................................................... 277
13.1. Instructions for Returning by Mail ........................................................ 277
13.2. Considerations about the Screen.......................................................... 277
13.3. Cleaning Recommendations ................................................................ 277
i. OPTICAL OPTION ................................................................................... 279
ii. DAB/DAB+ OPTION .............................................................................. 292
iii. ADVANCED FM OPTION ........................................................................ 309
iv. HIGH FREQUENCY OPTION ................................................................... 318
v. RACK OPTION....................................................................................... 320
vi. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ................................................................ 324
vii. MULTIMEDIA CONTENT ....................................................................... 325
viii. PREVIOUS VERSIONS OF USER’S MANUAL.......................................... 330
ix. INDEX .................................................................................................. 335

vii
 TV AND SATELLITE ANALYZER
RANGER Neo 2
RANGER Neo 3
RANGER Neo 4
1 INTRODUCTION

1.1 Description

The new RANGER Neo is the seventh generation of field meters that PROMAX
launches. As each new generation, it represents an evolution from the previous,
since it integrates the latest technological innovations and develops applications
for the new demands and needs that have emerged in recent years.

The new RANGER Neo has been created with the aim to make easy the user
experience. From its ergonomic design and stylized lines to the reduction of keys
and the easy use of its interface, everything has been designed so the user has
a simple tool to use but powerful and useful.

Figure 1.
The RANGER Neo is a universal analyzer that covers several of the most
popular standards (DVB, ISDB-T), as well as formats such as MPEG-2, MPEG-4,
HEVC... and Dolby audio.

Besides the basic functions of TV meter and spectrum analyzer for terrestrial and
satellite band, it provides additional tools, such as the detection of LTE signal

November 2023 1 Chapter 1: INTRODUCTION

 interferences (some of its working frequencies are close to the TV bands), the
diagrams constellations or the echoes detection.

The RANGER Neo has an application to manage data generated at each

installation. This feature helps the user to manage information generated so he
can access it at any time or download it to a PC for further analysis.

The RANGER Neo 3 has some extra tools such as T2MI and Network Delay
than differ from the RANGER Neo 2. The RANGER Neo 4 in addition to all
RANGER Neo 3 functions includes 4K real-time video decoding. All models can
be expanded to work with Fibre Optics or WiFi 5G and LTE 2.6 GHz.

In an effort to facilitate its work to professionals, our long experience ensures

an after sales quality service, which includes software updates and upgrades for
free.

The RANGER Neo has been designed and developed entirely in the European
Union. A multidisciplinary team of highly qualified professionals has dedicated
effort and commitment to the development of a powerful, efficient and reliable
tool. During the manufacturing process, all used materials have been subjected
to a strict quality control.

Figura 2.

S
C
Introducing the RANGER NEO family
A
N

Chapter 1: INTRODUCTION 2 November 2023

2 SETTING UP

2.1 Package Content

Check that your package contains the following elements:

 RANGER Neo Analyzer.

 External DC charger.
 Mains cord for external DC charger.
 Car lighter charger.

 GPS* receiver.
 Dual WiFi Antenna.
 USB WiFi Adapter.
 Aero SMA-H/BNC-M adapter.
 “F” adapters:
•“F”/f - BNC/f adapter.
•“F”/f - DIN/f adapter.
•“F”/f - “F”/f adapter.
 Support belt and carrying bag.
 4V/RCA Jack Cable.
 USB (A) - USB (A) cable.
 Monopod.
 Transport suitcase.
 Quick Start Guide.

NOTE: Keep the original packaging, since it is specially designed to protect the
equipment. You may need it in the future to send the analyzer to be
calibrated.

2.2 Power

The RANGER Neo is powered by a 7.2 V built-in rechargeable Li-Ion battery of

high quality and long operation time.

*. only available for RANGER Neo 3 and RANGER Neo 4.

November 2023 3 Chapter 2: SETTING UP

 This equipment can operate on battery or connected to the mains using a DC
adapter. An adapter is also supplied to use with the power connector car
(cigarette lighter).

2.2.1 First Charge

The equipment comes with the battery half charged. Depending on the time
elapsed from first charge and environmental conditions may have lost some of
the charge. You should check the battery level. It is advisable a first full charge.

2.2.2 Charging the Battery

Connect the DC power adapter to the equipment through the power connector
on the side panel (see figure).

Figure 2.
Then connect the DC power adapter to the mains via the mains cord. Ensure that
your mains voltage is compatible with the adapter voltage.

For a fast charging is necessary to switch off the equipment.

If the equipment is ON, the battery charge will be slower, depending on the type
of work you are doing. When connecting the equipment to the mains the mains
connected symbol appears inside the battery icon.

The CHARGER led indicator shows the battery status:

 Yellow: Battery charging.

 Green: Battery full charge.
 Blinking: Battery not detected.
 Off: Battery is not charging.

Chapter 2: SETTING UP 4 November 2023

 When switching on the equipment, the battery voltage is checked. If the tension
is too weak to start, the LED EXT and DRAIN flashes and the equipment does not
start up. In this case please charge the battery immediately.

2.2.3 Charge / Discharge Times

Average charging time with the equipment off (fast charge):

 3 hours to achieve an 80% charge.

 5 hours to achieve a 100% charge.

With the equipment on (slow charge):

 5 hours to achieve an 80% charge.

 8 hours to achieve a 100% charge.

Average discharge time (with external supply disabled)*:

 With the battery full charge the average battery time is 5:30 hours.
 With the battery at 80% charge the average battery time is 4 h.

2.2.4 Energy Saving

These options are available in the Preferences menu, pressing the key for
1 s.

 Power Off: It allows the user to select the time to power off, which is the
time after which the equipment shuts down automatically unless pressing
any key.
 TFT Screen: User can select a time after which the TFT screen turns off,
but the equipment is still running normally. The equipment can measure
(for example, making a datalogger or channel exploration) and the battery
will last longer, about 10% more. The screen turns on by pressing any
key. Time options are: off, 1, 5, 10 or 30 minutes.

2.2.5 Smart Control Battery

The built-in battery of the equipment is of the "smart" type, which means that
reports its state of charge. This information is displayed inside the battery icon

*. For the RANGER Neo 4 the average discharge time is 3 hours under this circumstances: DVB-T2,
4k, brightness TFT 80%, TV mode decoding

November 2023 5 Chapter 2: SETTING UP

 in the form of the average time available. In this way the user can know at any
time the remaining battery level.

The remaining time charge that appears is calculated according to the work that
has been doing. If you activate the external supply of the equipment, the
average time would be reduced according to the increase in consumption that
occurs.

2.2.6 Usage Tips

The battery is losing storage capacity as you go through its life. Contact your
PROMAX distributor when necessary to replace the battery.

To extend battery life the user should follow these tips:

 In case of providing a long inactivity period of the equipment it is

advisable to make every 3 months a charge / discharge cycle and a
subsequent partial charge (40% aprox.).
 It is advisable to keep it in a cool place and away from heat.
 You should avoid keeping the battery for a long period of time at full load
or fully discharged.
 There is not necessary to wait to fully discharge before a charge because
these batteries have no memory effect.

Chapter 2: SETTING UP 6 November 2023

 2.3 Equipment Details

S
C
Inputs and Outputs
A
N

2.3.1 RANGER Neo 2

Figure 3. Front View.

November 2023 7 Chapter 2: SETTING UP

 Figure 4. Side View.

Chapter 2: SETTING UP 8 November 2023

 Figure 5. Top View*.

November 2023 9 Chapter 2: SETTING UP

 2.3.2 RANGER Neo 3

Figure 6. Front View.

*. For Optical Option refer to annex.

Chapter 2: SETTING UP 10 November 2023

 Figure 7. Side View.

November 2023 11 Chapter 2: SETTING UP

 Figure 8. Top View*.

Chapter 2: SETTING UP 12 November 2023

 2.3.3 RANGER Neo 4

Figure 9. Front View.

*. For Optical Option refer to annex.

November 2023 13 Chapter 2: SETTING UP

 Figure 10. Side View.

Chapter 2: SETTING UP 14 November 2023

 Figure 11. Top View*.

November 2023 15 Chapter 2: SETTING UP

 2.4 Switching On/Off

►Switching On:

1 Press for a while (approximately one second) the ON/OFF button placed on
the side of the equipment.

2 The boot screen appears and also a progress bar that indicates the system
is loading. At the top left corner it shows the equipment model and release.

3 After the system loads, it shows the last status used (mode and screen).

►Switching Off by hardware:

1 Press the ON/OFF button placed on the side of the equipment:

 Short Press (<1 s): A menu on screen allows the user to select between
power off or reboot.
 Long Press (>2 s): The equipment turns off directly.

►Switching Off by software:

1 Press the Tools key .

2 Select the “Power Off” option.

►Switching Off by software (Energy save):

1 Press the Preferences key (press 1 s).

2 Select the “Appearance” tab.

3 The option "Off" allows the user to enable the automatic shutdown option.
Select a waiting time (time without pressing any key and the meter not
working) after which the equipment turns off automatically.

NOTE: The shutdown process lasts few seconds, during which it shows the boot
screen picture and also a bar showing the shutdown progress.

The equipment keeps its last status (mode and screen) which is
recovered when power on.

*. For Optical Option refer to annex.

Chapter 2: SETTING UP 16 November 2023

 2.5 Reset

How to RESET: Hold down the key for 6 seconds and release.

When to RESET:

 When it crashes and does not respond to any key. Hold down the
ON/OFF button for 10 seconds and if the meter does not turn off then
RESET.
 When it does not switch on. If it does not start after trying turning on
by the normal procedure (by pressing the ON/OFF button with the meter
connected to the mains) then RESET.
 When it does not finish the boot process. Hold down the ON/OFF
button for 10 seconds and if the meter does not turn off then RESET.

2.6 Screen Icons and Dialog Boxes

On the screen are some icons that provide useful information to the user about
the current status of the instrument.

Figure 12.

November 2023 17 Chapter 2: SETTING UP

 2.7 Menu Tree

► RF Menu

Figure 13. RF Tuning

Chapter 2: SETTING UP 18 November 2023

 Figure 14. Tools Menu

November 2023 19 Chapter 2: SETTING UP

 Figure 15. Advanced Menu

Chapter 2: SETTING UP 20 November 2023

 ► WiFi Menu

Figure 16.

November 2023 21 Chapter 2: SETTING UP

 ► IPTV Menu

Figure 17.

Figure 18.

Chapter 2: SETTING UP 22 November 2023

 ►Installation Management Menu

Figure 19.

November 2023 23 Chapter 2: SETTING UP

 ► Preferences Menu

Figure 20.

Chapter 2: SETTING UP 24 November 2023

 ►Settings Menu

Figure 21.

Figure 22.

November 2023 25 Chapter 2: SETTING UP

 2.8 Controls

The equipment has been designed to be an easy tool to use. For this reason the
number of keys has been reduced and they are grouped by function.

S
C
Front Panel
A
N

The equipment can be fully operated using both the touch panel (even using
wearing gloves) and the conventional keyboard. For measurement and
navigation through the menus, the equipment has the touch panel, one joystick,
4 function keys (softkeys) and 6 direct access keys (shortcut keys).

The menu navigation includes hints that appear when the cursor is placed on an
disabled (grayed) option for a while. These hints help the user to understand
why an option is disabled and what to do to enable it.

2.8.1 Touch Screen

The control software is designed in such a way that the meter can be fully
operated using the touch panel.

S
C
Touch Screen
A
N

These actions can be done through the touch panel:

 Menu Selection.
 Frequency or Channel Selection.
 Frequency or Channel Scroll.
 Virtual Keyboard Writing.
 Toolbar Access.
 Screen Mode Switch.
 Installation Manager Access.
 One-touch zoom-in.

Chapter 2: SETTING UP 26 November 2023

 ► Menu Selection

User can operate on the menus on screen: drop-down a menu, select an option,
accept or exit a message, and so on, just touching on the option.

Figure 23.

Figure 24.

November 2023 27 Chapter 2: SETTING UP

 Figure 25.

►Frequency or Channel Selection

At the Spectrum Analyzer mode, user can select a channel or frequency by

tapping on the frequency or channel.

Figure 26. First screen (channel locked).

Chapter 2: SETTING UP 28 November 2023

 Figure 27. Tap on the new frequency.

Figure 28. The cursor moves to the frequency.

November 2023 29 Chapter 2: SETTING UP

 ►Frequency or Channel Scroll

At the Spectrum Analyzer mode, user can scroll through frequency or channels
by dragging and dropping his finger on the screen.

Figure 29.

Figure 30.

Chapter 2: SETTING UP 30 November 2023

 ►Virtual keyboard/keypad writing

User can type directly on the on-screen keyboard or keypad.

Figure 31.

Figure 32.

November 2023 31 Chapter 2: SETTING UP

 ►Toolbar Access

User can access the most important functions through the toolbar by pressing
on the right top corner of the screen. It displays a box with several icons to
access several functions.

Figure 33.

Figure 34.
•Toolbar Icons Description
Icons

Chapter 2: SETTING UP 32 November 2023

 ►Mode Screens

User can switch the view of the current mode by pressing on the top center of
the screen.

Figure 35.

►Installations Management

User can access data from the current installation by pressing on the left top
corner.

Figure 36.

November 2023 33 Chapter 2: SETTING UP

 ►One Touch Zoom-in

In a view with different windows (Measurement, Spectrum and / or TV), if the

user clicks on one of the windows, he will directly access the corresponding
enlarged view.

Figure 37.

Chapter 2: SETTING UP 34 November 2023

 2.8.2 Joystick

Joystick can make five movements:

Figure 38.
In some modes or tools, the joystick is multifunctional, that is, each time you
press on it (validate), its function changes:

Figure 39. Functions of Joystick in SPECTRUM ANALYZER mode.

The user can see the active function according to the icon that is displayed at
the upper right corner of the equipment (see next figure).

November 2023 35 Chapter 2: SETTING UP

 Figure 40. Channel Tuning selected

Also, depending on the screen, the joystick has some specific functions. They
are:

► In MEASUREMENT mode, the joystick has these functions:

 Left - Right
•Channel change or frequency change (according to tune selected: tune by
channel or tune by frequency).
 Up - Down
•Change of main measure on screen (screen MEASUREMENT 1/3).

► In TV mode, the joystick has these functions:

 Left - Right
•Channel change or frequency change (according to tune selected: tune by
channel or tune by frequency).
 Up - Down
•Change of TV service.

► In SPECTRUM ANALYZER mode, the joystick has these functions:

 Left - Right
•CH or FR: Channel change (CH) or frequency (FR) change (according to
tune selected: tune by channel or tune by frequency).
•SP: Span change.
•MK: Marker move (if marker is enabled).
 Up - Down
•Reference level change.

In Spectrum Analyzer mode, pressing the joystick for 1 second, a box appears
explaining the joystick modes available. From here user can also select the
joystick mode.

Chapter 2: SETTING UP 36 November 2023

 Figure 41.
► In WIFI mode, the joystick has these functions:

 Left - Right
•AP or CH:Change of Access Point (AP) or Channel (CH) (according to tune
selected: tune by Access Point or tune by Channel).
•SP:Change of Span.
 Up - Down
•Reference level change.

► In ECHOES tool, the joystick has these functions:

 Left - Right
•CH or FR:Channel (CH) change or frequency (FR) change (according to
the tune selected: tune by channel or tune by frequency).
•EC:Echo change.
 Up - Down
•Distance span.

S
C
Navigating through Menus
A
N

2.8.3 Select and Edit Parameters

To edit or select any parameters follow these instructions:

1 Place over the option and press the joystick.

2 The data field gets into the edit mode (yellow background).

3 A menu is deployed with some options or if it is numeric, a number gets a

black background.

November 2023 37 Chapter 2: SETTING UP

 4 Move the joystick up/down to select one option. To move between figures
press right/left and to change it press up/down.

5 After finish press joystick to confirm or any function key to exit.

2.8.4 Shortcut Keys

►Management Keys

There are two Management keys. Depending on how long you press these keys,
it has two different functions:

 Installations / Preferences key

•Short Press (<1s): It shows the list of installations and the menus to
manage them.
•Long Press (>1s): It shows the Preferences menu.

 Tune Settings / Video - Audio Settings

•Short Press (<1s): It shows the Settings menu (menu changes according
to signal source selected).
•Long Press (>1s): It shows the Video & audio settings.

►Screenshot / Reference key

Depending on how long you press this key, it has two different functions:

•Short Press (<1s): Pressing this key for less than one second on the
Spectrum Analyzer mode, it holds on screen the current waveform as a
trace or reference. It is equivalent to go to the option "Reference - Set"
from the "Advanced" menu. Pressing short again, it deletes the waveform
reference. It is equivalent to go to the option "Reference - Clear" in the
"Advanced" menu.
•Long Press (>1s): Pressing this key for one second it makes a capture of
what it is shown on screen at the time. The capture may be from the
screen image, from the measurement data or from both. The type of
capture, either screen, data, or both can be set in the "Export button"
option which is on the label "Measures" in the "Preferences" menu (for
more details refer to “Screen and Data Capture (Export key)” on
page 134).

Chapter 2: SETTING UP 38 November 2023

 ►Mode keys

On the left side there are three keys to access the most important modes of the
meter.

 Measurement key.

 Spectrum Analyzer key.

 TV Mode key.

The active function on screen is indicated by the LED next to the function key.

Pressing on one of these keys repeatedly provides access to a different view

within the same function. For analogue signals only the first view of each
function is available. Each view name is shown at the top centre of the screen.
When reaching the third view it returns to the first view.

2.8.5 Function keys or Softkeys

There are four programmable keys, also called softkeys, numbered from to
.

Each key provides access to one menu. This menu changes according to the
mode or tool selected.

The menu is displayed over each softkey at the bottom of the screen.

Figure 42.

2.8.6 Virtual Keyboard

When a user needs to enter or edit a text (from an image, Channel Plan, etc.),
a screen with a virtual keyboard appears (see figure).

November 2023 39 Chapter 2: SETTING UP

 Figure 43.
To edit a word user should follow these steps:

1 Place the cursor over the text box where the name appears.

2 Move the cursor to place it next to the letter that user wants to edit.

3 Press on the virtual keyboard to edit.

4 Once edition is finished, press OK to accept or to Cancel.

To delete a letter, move the cursor to the right side of the letter and then press
the joystick on the Delete key or press Delete .

To enter an upper case letter press first or press the joystick on the key .
To block upper case press or press the joystick on the key twice. To
return to lower case press or the key again.

Keys with a point at top right corner give access to special characters, by
keeping pressed the joystick for one second on the key.

2.9 Practical examples

The next section is a general explanation of how to tune a terrestrial or satellite

RF signal, step by step. For more details about operation and setting parameters
refer to “RF SIGNAL TUNING” on page 56).

2.9.1 RF Terrestrial signal tuning

1 Connect the RF input signal cable to the RF input connector of your

equipment.

2 Press the Preferences key for 1 second.

3 Access the tab “Stealth ID” to use the automatic identification feature.

Chapter 2: SETTING UP 40 November 2023

 4 Select the type of signals you want to identify when the meter is searching
a signal. Press “Save” and “Exit”.

5 Press the Settings key. At “Source of signal” select RF. At “Band” select
Terrestrial.

6 Press the Spectrum key. The signal spectrum appears on screen. Press
again this key to switch among views. Select the SPECTRUM 1/3 view.

7 Press the joystick to change to SP mode. In this mode, when moving left or
right it changes the Span. The recommended value for a terrestrial signal is
50 MHz. The span value is shown at lower right corner. Once is selected,
press again the joystick to return to Tune mode.

8 Press the joystick up or down to adjust the reference level.

9 Press the key and in the “Tune by” option select if you want to tune by
frequency or by channel.
10 If you want to tune by channel, then select a proper channel plan according
to your area in option “Channel plan”.
11 In case you do not find a proper channel plan, you can add or create a new
channel plan using one of this tools:

•Press -> : Manage -> F3: Installation -> Add Channel Plan.
•F3: Tools -> Explore Channel Plan.
•WebControl -> Installations management -> Create a Channel Plan.
12 Press and confirm StealthID is enabled (On).
13 Search your frequency or channel by moving the cursor left or right. You can
also enter a frequency or select a channel on menu .
14 If the signal is locked, then some info about the signal shows up on the lower
left corner. A triple cursor shows the bandwidth for the signal detected in
case it is a digital carrier.
15 The meter detects automatically all the parameters for the signal and shows
on screen the main measurements.

2.9.2 RF Satellite signal tuning

1 Connect the RF input signal cable to the RF input connector of your

equipment.

2 Press the Preferences key for 1 second.

3 Access the tab “Stealth ID” to use the automatic identification feature.

4 Select the type of signals you want to identify when the meter is searching
a signal. Press “Save” and “Exit”.

November 2023 41 Chapter 2: SETTING UP

 5 Press the Settings key. At “Source of signal” select RF. At “Band” select
Satellite.

6 If you want to use a rotor to move the satellite dish, press the Settings
key and enable the option “Supply output”. Then select the communication
protocol you are going to use to send commands to the rotor (DiSEqC, SCD,
SCD2).

7 Press the Spectrum key. The signal spectrum appears on screen. Press
again this key to switch among views. Select the SPECTRUM 1/3 view.

8 Press the joystick to change to SP mode. In this mode, when moving left or
right it changes the Span. The recommended value for a satellite signal is
100 MHz. The span value is shown at lower right corner. Once is selected,
press again the joystick to return to Tune mode.

9 Press the joystick up or down to adjust the reference level.

10 Press the key and in the “Tune by” option select if you want to tune by
frequency or by channel.
11 If you select the option tune by frequency, press the Settings key and
select the settings parameters: Supply voltage, polarization and satellite
band.
12 If you select the tune by channel option, then select in “Channel plan” a
proper channel plan according to your area. Channels from channel plan
have pre-set parameters (supply voltage, polarization and satellite band),
so they cannot be changed from the Settings menu.
13 In case you do not find a proper channel plan, you can add or create a new
channel plan using one of this tools:

•Press -> : Manage -> F3: Installation -> Add Channel Plan.
•F3: Tools -> Explore Channel Plan.
•WebControl -> Installations management -> Create a Channel Plan.
14 Press and confirm StealthID is enabled (On).
15 Search your frequency or channel by moving the cursor left or right. You can
also enter a frequency or select a channel on menu .
16 If the signal is locked, then some info about the signal shows up on the lower
left corner. A triple cursor shows the bandwidth for the signal detected in
case it is a digital carrier.
17 The meter detects automatically all the parameters for the signal and shows
on screen the main measurements.

S
C
How to point a rotor driven antenna
A
N

Chapter 2: SETTING UP 42 November 2023

3 SETTINGS AND PREFERENCES

3.1 Settings Menu

Press the Settings key to access the settings menu. Depending on the signal
source, the menu may be different.

Figure 44. Settings for RF (Terrestrial and Satellite band)

Figure 45. Settings for WiFi and IPTV / Video & Audio

November 2023 43 Chapter 3: SETTINGS AND PREFERENCES

 Next there is an explanation about each option available in this menu.

S
C
Settings Menu
A
N

►Signal Source

It allows the user to select the signal coming into the equipment: RF (for radio-
frequency signals), IPTV (for TV over any type of IP packet based distribution
network), WiFi (for WiFi operation bands), OTT (for Over the Top services) or
CCTV* (to show video from video-surveillance devices).

►Band

It allows the user to select between terrestrial or satellite frequency band for RF,
or the WiFi operation band for WiFi.

►Decoder TS Input

It allows the user to select the transport stream coming into the equipment from
the RF Demodulators, IPTV input, ASI input or TS Recorded (played from the
transport stream recorded with the TS Recording tool).

 RF Demodulators: (This option is available only if RF is selected as a

Signal Source). The TS extracted from the RF signal by means of the
internal RF demodulator. The RF signal can come from digital terrestrial,
satellite or cable.
 IPTV: (This option is available only if IPTV is selected as a Signal Source).
The TS extracted from the IPTV signal.
 ASI Input: The TS coming directly through the ASI-TS input connector.
 Recorded TS: (This option is available only if there is a TS previously
recorded). The TS comes from the one being played and previously
recorded with the TS Recording tool (warning: this option is automatically
selected each time a recorded TS is played. Disable it once the TS playing
has finished).

►ASI Output

It allows the user to select the signal source for the TS-ASI packets going out
through the equipment ASI Output. User can select among Off, RF

*. It works with the CV-150 adapter. Contact PROMAX for more info.

Chapter 3: SETTINGS AND PREFERENCES 44 November 2023

 Demodulators, IPTV, ASI Input and Recorded TS. This transport stream can feed
the signal to other devices.

 Off: ASI Output disabled.

 RF Demodulators: (This option is available only if RF is selected as a
Signal Source). The signal through ASI Output is the TS extracted from
the RF signal by means of the internal RF demodulator. The RF signal can
come from digital terrestrial, satellite or cable.
 IPTV: (This option is available only if IPTV is selected as a Signal Source).
The signal through ASI Output is the TS extracted from the IPTV signal.
 ASI Input: TS-ASI packets coming from ASI input connector go out
through the ASI output connector.
 Recorded TS: The TS comes from the one being played and previously
recorded with the TS Recording tool (warning: this option is automatically
selected each time a recorded TS is played. Disable it once the TS playing
has finished).

►External power supply (available for terrestrial and satellite band)

It enables or disables the power supplied to external units such as preamplifiers

for antennas in terrestrial television or LNBs and FI simulators in the case of
satellite TV.

When this option is enabled the equipment applies at the output the voltage
selected by the user in the Supply Voltage option (see below). When this option
is disabled the equipment does not apply the voltage to the output but it will
behave as if it did.

►Supply voltages (available for terrestrial and satellite band)

It selects the voltage to be applied to an external unit. Available voltage options

change depending on the selected band. In tuning by channel mode this option
can not be changed because is defined by the channel.

 Voltage available for terrestrial band: External, 5 V, 12 V and 24 V.

 Voltage available for satellite band: External, 5 V (for devices working with
5 V such as GPS active antennas), 13 V, 13 V + 22 kHz, 15V, 18 V, 18 V +
22 kHz.

In the External supply voltage option the power supplier to the external units is
the power supplier of the antenna preamplifiers (terrestrial television) or the
satellite TV receiver (collective or domestic).

November 2023 45 Chapter 3: SETTINGS AND PREFERENCES

 ►LNB Drain (available for terrestrial and satellite band)

The LNB drain option shows the voltage and current flowing to the external unit.
The DRAIN LNB light indicator is lit if current is flowing to the external unit.

If there is any problems (e.g. short circuit), an error message appears on the
screen ('SHORTCIRCUIT'), a warning beep sounds. The equipment allows you to
disable the output tension that feeds the LNB when the short-circuit warning is
displayed.

The equipment does not return to its normal operating state until the problem
is solved. During this time the equipment checks every three seconds if there
still the problem, warning with an audible signal.

► DiSEqC Mode (only available for satellite band)

It enables or disables DiSEqC mode. DiSEqC (Digital Satellite Equipment

Control) is a communication protocol between the satellite receiver and
accessories of the satellite system (for more details refer to “CONNECTING TO
EXTERNAL DEVICES” on page 245).

►SCD/EN50494 (only available for satellite band)

It enables or disables the SCD/EN50494 function to control devices of a satellite

TV installation that supports this technology (for more details refer to
“CONNECTING TO EXTERNAL DEVICES” on page 245).

►SCD2/EN50607 (only available for satellite band)

It enables or disables SCD2/EN50607 mode to control devices in a satellite TV

installation which must be compatible with this technology (for more details
refer to “CONNECTING TO EXTERNAL DEVICES” on page 245).

►Polarization (only available for satellite band)

It allows the user to select the signal polarization between Vertical/Right

(vertical and circular clockwise) and Horizontal/Left (horizontal and circular anti-
clockwise), or disable it (OFF). In tuning by channel mode this option can not be
changed because is defined by the channel.

Chapter 3: SETTINGS AND PREFERENCES 46 November 2023

 ►Sat Band (only available for satellite band)

It allows the user to select the High or Low band frequency for satellite channel
tuning. In channel tuning mode the Band Sat can not be changed. In tuning by
channel mode this option can not be changed because is defined by the channel.

►LNB Low Osc. (only available for satellite band)

It defines the local oscillator frequency for the LNB low band. When a channel
plan is selected but LNB oscillator values are not properly selected, a warning is
issued.

►LNB High Osc. (only available for satellite band)

It defines the local oscillator frequency for the LNB high band (up to 25 GHz).
When a channel plan is selected but LNB oscillator values are not properly
selected, a warning is issued.

3.2 Video & Audio Settings

Press the Settings key for one second to access the Video & Audio settings
menu.

Figure 46.
A brief explanation of each option available on the menu:

►Volume

It increases or decreases the volume of the speaker audio output by moving the
joystick to the right (+ volume) or left (- volume).

►Brightness

It increases or decreases the screen brightness by moving the joystick to the

right (+ brightness) or left (- brightness).

November 2023 47 Chapter 3: SETTINGS AND PREFERENCES

 ►Colour System

The coding system used in analogue transmissions. Available options are: PAL
50 Hz, PAL 60 Hz, PAL-M, NTSC, SECAM.

3.3 Preferences Menu

S
C
Preferences Menu
A
N

Preferences menu is available by pressing the Installations Management

key for one second. The options are grouped in tabs as follows:

 Equipment: Equipment information.

 Appearance: Equipment customizing options.
 Time & Date: It allows the user to change date, time, date format and
time zone (selecting continent and country/city).
 Measurements: It allows the user to choose between several units of
measure among other parameters.
 Tools: It allows to edit some parameters for different tools.
 StealthID: It allows the user to select the set of signal types being used
while auto identifying any modulation type.
 Security: It allows to edit the PIN code.
 IPTV: IPTV network parameters settings.
 Network: Network parameters settings.
 Streaming V/A: Streaming configuration.
 SNMP: SNMP configuration.
 SMTP: e-Mail server configuration.
 NTP (Network Time Protocol): It allows your meter to connect to a server
in order to set date and time.

Chapter 3: SETTINGS AND PREFERENCES 48 November 2023

 Figure 47.
To navigate between tabs move the joystick left or right. To navigate between
options inside the tab move the joystick up or down.

Press Exit to exit Preferences.

Press Save to save changes.

November 2023 49 Chapter 3: SETTINGS AND PREFERENCES

 A brief explanation of the options available in each tab:

►Equipment Information

 Provider: Provider’s name.

 Name: Equipment’s name.
 Serial number: Unique identification number for this equipment.
 Release: Version of software installed on the equipment.
 Date: Date of software installed on the equipment.
 Free system memory: Free size of the flash memory installed on the
equipment / Size of the flash memory installed on the equipment for
system (equipment software).
 Free data memory: Free size of the flash memory installed on the
equipment / Size of the flash memory installed for data (dataloggers,
screenshots, service recording and so on...).
 Company: Name of the company which owns the equipment (set by user;
protected by PIN code). This field appears on the boot screen.
 User: Name of the equipment's user (set by user; protected by PIN code).
This field appears on the boot screen.

►Appearance Options

 Language: Language used on menus, messages and screens. Available

languages are: English, Spanish, Catalan, Czech, German, French, Italian,
Norwegian, Polish, Portuguese, Greek, Russian, Slovak and Swedish. Once
the new language is selected, the equipment shows a warning message
and re-starts in order to load the new language.
 Skin: It is the theme and colours used on screen.
 Power Off: It allows the user to select the time to power off, which is the
time after which the equipment shuts down automatically unless user
press any key.
 Brightness: User can select between two options:
•Manual: The display brightness is adjusted manually using the brightness
setting (see section Video and audio settings)..
•Automatic: The display brightness is automatically adjusted according to
the light received by the sensor.
 Background: It allows the user to select the background colour on the
display screen. Options available are: white, green, red, black and blue.
 Battery Time: It hides or shows the remaining battery time. Remaining
battery time is displayed on the inside of the battery level icon.
 TFT Screen: User can select a time after which the TFT screen turns off,
but the equipment is still running normally. The screen turns on by

Chapter 3: SETTINGS AND PREFERENCES 50 November 2023

 pressing any key. Time options are: off, 1, 5, 10 or 30 minutes.
 Color System: The coding system used in analogue transmissions.
Available options are: PAL 50 Hz, PAL 60 Hz, PAL-M, NTSC and SECAM.
 Values Format: It allows the user to select the format to show on fields
PID, NID, ONID, TSID and SID in TV mode screen 3/3 and on field SID in
“Select Service” tool. Available formats are decimal or hexadecimal.
 Touchscreen Calibration: Press on F4 to run a test to calibrate the
touchscreen. Just follow the instructions and press on each circle at corner
and centre to calibrate.

►Time & Date Options

 Date: It allows the user to edit the date. Press the joystick for edit mode.
 Time: It allows the user to edit the time. Press the joystick for edit mode.
 Date Format: It allows the user to change the date format, which is the
order in which is shown day (DD), month (MM) and year (YYYY or YY).
 Time Zone: It allows the user to select continent and country/city where
the meter is in order to determine if it is necessary to apply DST (Daylight
Saving Time).

►Measurement Options

 Terrestrial Units: It allows the user to select the terrestrial measurement

units for the signal level. Available options are: dBm dBmV and dBµV.
 Satellite Units: It allows the user to select the satellite measurement units
for the signal level. Available options are: dBm, dBmV and dBµV.
 Optical Units: It allows the user to select the optical measurement units
for the signal level. Available options are: dBm.
 Satellite Band: It allows the user to select the type of satellite band used
between Ku/Ka band and C band.
 Reference Level: It allows the user to select the type of reference level
adjustment between manual (modified by the user) or automatic (selected
by the equipment).
 TER. Downlink: If this option is enabled it allows you to set a local
oscillator in terrestrial band from Settings and it displays intermediate
and downlink (DL) frequencies calculated from local oscillator. For
example, it allows you to work with terrestrial radio-links or frequency
converters.
 Position Tone: The user can select where at the voltage to insert a 22 kHz
tone: Up, Center or Down. The tone will be inserted on the top, in the
center or below the LNB tension respectively.
 Min. TER. Power: It sets the minimum power for a terrestrial digital signal

November 2023 51 Chapter 3: SETTINGS AND PREFERENCES

 to be identified when channel exploring or datalogger.
 Min. SAT. Power: It sets the minimum power for a satellite digital signal to
be identified when channel exploring or datalogger.
 Min. TER. Level: It sets the minimum level for a terrestrial analogue signal
to be identified when channel exploring or datalogger.
 Min. FM Level: It sets the minimum power for a FM signal to be identified
when channel exploring or datalogger.
 Input Impedance: It allows the user to select the impedance at the RF
input between 50 Ω and 75 Ω.
 Power Offset: It adds this value to the power/level measurement. When
this value is different to 0 dB, next to power/level measurement an
asterisk (*) is shown as a warning that offset is been applied.

►Tools Options

 Datalogger PSI: If you select the option "Capture", when datalogger is

working it captures the service list of each channel. This process slows the
datalogger, but provides additional information that can be downloaded in
XML files. To disable this option select "Don't capture".
 Database Services: When it is enabled, it saves all the services been
detected in the current installation. There is a database for services in
terrestrial band and another for services in satellite band. Services are
included automatically when the signal is locked. If enabled, these
services will be displayed on the "View all services" option in the Tuning

menu.
 Export Button: It allows the user to select the data to be exported when
pressing the export key among the following options: screen only, data
only or both. More info in the "Export key" chapter.
 LTE Filter F. Min: Select the minimum frequency for the external LTE filter.
 LTE Filter F. Max: Select the maximum frequency for the external LTE
filter.
 Center Frequency: User can set the center of frequency to Manual or
Auto mode. In Manual mode the user sets the center of frequency and
the equipment does not change it never, so the main cursor can be moved
out of screen. In Auto mode the equipment changes the center of
frequency to display always the main cursor on screen.
 Moni. ddbb loc.: It allows you to select where the database for the
webControl “Monitoring” tool will be stored (for more details refer to
“Signal Quality Monitoring” on page 220). The available options are
“Internal” to save to the internal memory of the meter or “Hard Drive” to
save to an external disk connected to the device. In the case of using the
external disk option, it must be USB 2.0 formatted with the “ext4” file
system and labeled with the name “PR0MAX_HD” where 0 is a zero.

Chapter 3: SETTINGS AND PREFERENCES 52 November 2023

  Watchdog: It allows you to enable or disable a surveillance system that
resets the equipment if it crashes.
 Zoom: It enables the “Zoom” option to be available on the “Advanced”
menu in the Spectrum mode (for more details refer to “?Advanced Menu
in Spectrum Analyzer Mode” on page 65).

►Stealth-ID Options

It allows the user to select the set of signal types being used while auto
identifying any modulation type (for more details refer to “?Stealth-ID” on
page 62).

►Security Options

It allows the user to change the PIN code that gives access to protected data
fields. The default PIN code is "1234". To change the PIN, first enter the current
PIN code, then enter the new PIN.

In case the user forgets the PIN, after the third attempt, a 12-digit code will
appear on screen. Sending this 12 digit code to the PROMAX customer service,
the user will recover the PIN.

► IPTV Options

Network parameters that user has to fill out in order to register the equipment
into a data network. This is necessary to receive IPTV signal. Network
parameters are:

 MAC: Physical address of the equipment. It is unique and cannot be

edited.
 DHCP: Enable this option to get the proper IP address when the unit is
first connected to a network. That feature contributes to make things
easier to installers when debugging network access. Enable the DHCP
protocol for proper IP configuration.
 IP Address: IP Address of the equipment into the local network.
 Mask: Subnet mask of the equipment (by default 255.255.255.0).
 Gateway: IP Address of the router into the local network (by default
10.0.1.1).
 IGMP Version: Protocol for multicast transmissions used by the router.
Available versions are 1, 2 and 3. To disable select Off.
•IMGPv1: IGMP version 1. Each time user selects a multicast address,
meter asks for the new multicast stream.

November 2023 53 Chapter 3: SETTINGS AND PREFERENCES

 •IMGPv2: IGMP version 2. Each time user selects a multicast address,
meter stops receiving the current stream and asks for receiving the new
one.
•IMGPv3: IGMP version 3. Each time user selects a multicast address,
meter stops receiving the current stream and asks for receiving the new
one, from the servers approved by the user.
•Off: Meter does not send any IGMP messages and discards the received
ones.

►Network Options

Network parameters that user has to fill out in order to identify the equipment
into a data network. This is necessary to connect to a PC via ethernet. Network
parameters are:

 MAC: Physical address of the equipment. It is unique and cannot be

edited.
 DHCP: Enable this option to get the proper IP address when the unit is
first connected to a network. That feature contributes to make things
easier to installers when debugging network access.
 IP Address: IP Address of the equipment into the local network.
 Mask: Subnet mask of the equipment (by default 255.255.255.0).
 Gateway: IP Address of the router into the local network (by default
10.0.1.1).

►Streaming V/A Options

Streaming parameters that user has to fill out in order to broadcast video/audio
from the meter to a PC. Streaming parameters are:

 IP Address: IP address belonging to the PC to broadcast in streaming from

the meter.
 Port: Broadcasting port linked to the PC IP.

For more details refer to “Streaming V/A” on page 174.

►SNMP Options

SNMP is a communication protocol to monitor devices in a network. User has to

fill out these parameters to communicate with the meter and to supervise it.
SNMP parameters are:

 SNMP Configuration:

Chapter 3: SETTINGS AND PREFERENCES 54 November 2023

 •Get Community (by default “public”): Community identification name for
request messages.
•Set Community (by default “private”): Community identification name for
setting messages.
 SNMP version 1 / SNMP version 2
•Traps: It allows enabling or disabling alert messages.
•Manager IP: IP address for SNMP Manager.
•Community: Community identification name.

►SMTP Options

SMTP stands for simple mail transfer protocol. User has to fill in all these
parameters in order to receive by e-mail all the notifications triggered during
monitoring (for more details refer to “Signal Quality Monitoring” on page 220).
SMTP parameters are:

 Enabled: When checking this box e-mails sending is enabled.

 Server IP Address
 Server port.
 From e-mail address.
 Connection type (secure, unsecure).
 Authentication required: Check this box if authentication is required and in
that case enter user and password.

►NTP Options

NTP (Network Time Protocol) is a network protocol that synchronizes time from
a server on a device. It periodically connects this server and updates date and
time. This function requires an Internet connection to work. It is especially
necessary in tools where accuracy at the time of execution is important, such as
in monitoring, task management, etc.

NTP parameters are:

 Enabled: Mark this checkbox to enable NTP.

 Server URL Address: NTP server address (example: 0.pool.ntp.org).
 Test Configuration: NTP connection server test (to perform this test, first
unmark the Enabled checkbox).

November 2023 55 Chapter 3: SETTINGS AND PREFERENCES

4 RF SIGNAL TUNING

4.1 Introduction

On the panel left side, the equipment has three functions keys, which give direct
access to three ways to display RF signal.

 MEASUREMENT : This mode shows main measures of RF signal and

allows you to identify if any measure is above or below usual values.

 SPECTRUM ANALYZER : This mode shows spectrum and allows you to

visually identify any anomalies over the RF signal.

 TV : This mode shows RF signal demodulated and allows you to check

broadcasting quality for video and audio.

Pressing a key repeatedly provides access to a different view within the same
mode displaying different windows. Each view combines several RF modes
(demodulated, spectrum, measures) which is very convenient to identify
problems.

The StealthID function is an auto-identification system which identifies type and

characteristic parameters of the signal and then tries to tune and demodulate it
with no need to enter any parameter by hand.

4.2 Operation

1 Connect the RF input signal to the equipment.

2 Press the Settings key to access Settings menu and in “Signal Source”
select “RF”.

3 From Settings menu access the “Band” option and select “Terrestrial” to
work on terrestrial band or “Satellite” to work on satellite band.

4 Select the display mode by pressing the MEASUREMENT, SPECTRUM

ANALYZER or TV mode. Pressing a key repeatedly provides access to
different views.

5 Enter frequency or channel using the “Tuning” menu or using the joystick
to go left or right along the frequency / channel band.

Chapter 4: RF SIGNAL TUNING 56 November 2023

 6 Once you are placed on the channel or frequency, the StealthID function tries
to identify and lock the signal and its characteristic parameters and will show
results on screen.

4.3 General Menu Options

At the bottom of the screen four menus are accessible via the softkeys or
function keys.

 It displays the channel where is pointing the cursor and gives access
to the tuning menu.

 It displays the selected transmission standard and gives access to

the signal parameters menu.

 It displays the Tools menu.

 It displays the Advanced menu.

In general, these options are the same for all modes (Measure, Spectrum
Analyzer and TV).

The specific options for a mode are placed in the menu "Advanced" pressing the
key .

In next sections each one of these menus is described.

4.3.1 F1: Tuning - Selecting Channel / Frequeny

Press to access. It contains tuning options.

Tuning options are:

►Channel/Frequency

It displays the channel/frequency pointed by the cursor. Tuning type (channel/

frequency) is selected by means of the “Tune by” option

November 2023 57 Chapter 4: RF SIGNAL TUNING

 ►Channel Plan

This option allows the user to select a channel plan from the ones available for
the current installation.

►Tune by

It allows the user to select between tuning by channel (selecting a channel or

channel by channel with the joystick) and tuning by frequency (selecting a
frequency or step by step with the joystick).

In case of tuning by channel:

1 Place over the Channel option and press the joystick.

2 A box appears with all channels of the active channel plan and its frequency.

3 Move the joystick on the box to select a channel.

4 After finished press the joystick to save the selected value or any function
key to exit without saving.

5 The cursor will place on the selected channel and it will appear on the
option.
•Channels can be changed directly with the joystick in CH mode.

NOTE: When using tune by channel on satellite, the polarity parameters

(horizontal/vertical and left/right) and satellite band (high/low) are
selected automatically by the equipment, according to the channel plan
enabled and cannot be changed by the user. To change these
parameters, the user may switch to frequency tuning. But the user can
change the voltage output while in a channel plan, as long as none has
been defined in that same channel plan. For instance, if a standard
channel plan is being used like the CCIR, there is no need for switching
to frequency tuning mode.

In case of tuning by frequency:

1 Place over the Frequency option and press the joystick.

2 The option is highlighted in yellow to indicate it is in edit mode.

3 Move the joystick left/right to move between the figures and up/down to
change the figure.

Chapter 4: RF SIGNAL TUNING 58 November 2023

 4 After finished press the joystick to save the selected value or any function
key to exit without saving.
•The frequency can be changed directly with the joystick in FR mode in 50
kHz steps.

S
C
Manual input of frequencies
A
N

►Center Frequency

This option is available only for the Spectrum Analyzer mode. It allows to edit
the center frequency. The center frequency is the frequency at which the screen
is centered.

►Reference Level

This option is available only for the Spectrum Analyzer mode. It allows you to
edit the reference level. The reference level is the power range represented on
the vertical axis.

The Reference Level can be changed directly pushing the joystick up or down.

►Span

This option is available only for the Spectrum Analyzer mode. It allows to edit
the span, which is the frequency range displayed on screen on the horizontal
axis. The current span value appears on screen at bottom right.

Span available values change according to Resolution Bandwidth selected (for

more details refer to “Spectrum Analyzer Mode” on page 269).

To switch among span default values move the joystick (left, right) in span (SP)
mode. For example, for RBW = 100 kHz default span values are Full (full band),
500 MHz, 200 MHz, 100 MHz, 50 MHz, 20 MHz and 10 MHz. To change to any
other span value in this frequency range use the "span" option in the Tuning
menu ( key).

►Center Tuned Frequency

This option is only available for the Spectrum Analyzer mode. When selecting
this option, the frequency tuning (where the main cursor is pointing) is placed

November 2023 59 Chapter 4: RF SIGNAL TUNING

 at the center of the screen. This option does not work with FULL span or if main
cursor is very close to band boundaries.

►Downlink

This option shows up if “Terrestrial Downlink” option in Preferences is enabled

and if it is selected tune by frequency. It displays downlink (DL) frequency
calculated from local oscillator value. To set a local oscillator value press Settings
from terrestrial band.

►View all services

This option only appears if the Database services option is enabled in the
Preferences menu.

This option displays a window with a list of services that have been detected in
the current installation.

The list shows service name, provider, SID (stream identifier) and an icon that
shows its type (radio, TV) and if it is scrambled. When hovering on the service
for one second it displays a hint window with more information.

If user presses the joystick on a service, it will access that service. When
disabling the Database services option, all services in the installation will be
deleted from the list.

At the bottom of this option are shown the softkeys with these functions:

 Cancel: It exits the option.

 Filter List: It shows several options to filter the list of services:

•By access (Free Only, Scrambled Only, All).
•By type (All, TV, Radio).
•Search by name (filtered by the name).
•Reset list (it restarts the list as at first) Service filtering is persistent until
reseting.

 Page Up: It jumps one page up.

 Page Down: It jumps one page down.

Chapter 4: RF SIGNAL TUNING 60 November 2023

 4.3.2 F2: Signal Parameters

Access by the , function key. It allows selecting the standard transmission and
displays the parameters for signal transmission.

►Signal Type

It displays the selected standard. It allows selecting another standard in the

same band (terrestrial or satellite):

1 Place over the Signal Type option and press the joystick.

2 It displays a menu with transmission standards.

3 Move the joystick up / down to select a standard.

4 Press joystick to select the standard or any function key to exit without
selecting.

►View Advanced Parameters

It shows the TPS parameters (Transmission Parameters Signalling) for the

locked signal according to the modulation standard. This option is available only
when these parameters are detected. The remaining transmission parameters
are detected demodulating the locked signal.

•In case of a DVB-S/S2 signal, the symbol-rate parameter can be set

manually.
•In case of a Generic signal, the bandwidth of the channel can be set
manually.

In case of a DVB-S2 signal, there will be some special settings for this type of
signal. They are:

 Physical Layer Scrambling or PLS is used in DVB-S2 as a way to improve

data integrity. A number called the "scrambling sequence index" is used
by the modulator as a master key to generate the uplink signal. This same
number must be known by the receiver so that demodulation is possible.
 Most satellite transponders use PLS 0 as a default value but there are
some transponders that use other values.
 If it is a multistream signal (MIS), it will appear an option that enables
filtering by the input stream identifier (ISI) and to select the stream to

November 2023 61 Chapter 4: RF SIGNAL TUNING

 demodulate (by default it will randomly select one stream from the
signal).

S
C
Measuring and decoding DVB-S2 multi-stream
A
N

►Stealth-ID

The StealthID function is a RF signal identification function performed

automatically by the equipment without any user intervention.

The equipment tries to identify the channel or frequency of the input signal it
receives, and according to the band selected by the user (terrestrial or satellite),
it applies identifying criteria according to the standards available on that band.
When the equipment recognizes in the input signal the identification parameters
of a specific standard, it decodes and identifies data of that signal.

Settings:

1 Press the Preferences key for 1 second.

2 In the StealthID tab, select the signal types to auto-identify. By default all
them are selected. Press the key to save the changes made and the
key to exit the Preferences screen.

Operation:

1 Press the key and check the StealthID option is ON.

2 Press the Settings key.

3 Select the band (terrestrial or satellite).

4 Select a channel or frequency to identify.

5 The bottom of the screen shows the message "Searching for signal" and
the standard transmission checking. The identification system tries to lock
the first signal using the modulation defined in the channel plan for that
signal. If after five seconds it fails to lock with that modulation, it starts the
wheel for automatic detection. If then it locks in a modulation other than
indicated, it generates an internal temporary channel plan to accelerate
tuning the same channel later on.

6 Wait a few seconds for the equipment to identify the signal. User can force
the auto-identification of a signal by pressing the key and selecting the
type of signal from the menu.

Chapter 4: RF SIGNAL TUNING 62 November 2023

 7 When the equipment identifies the signal it displays on screen its standard
and type.

8 Press Signal Parameters to see all signal parameters.

9 Once the signal has been identified, to disable auto-identification press

and on StealthID option select OFF. In this way, if the signal unlocks, the
system will try to look the previous signal, without restarting the auto-
identification.

►Signals automatically detected

 Digital Terrestrial Television First Generation (DVB-T).

 Digital Terrestrial Television Second Generation (DVB-T2: T2-Base and
T2-Lite profiles).
 Digital Satellite Television First Generation (DVB-S).
 Digital Satellite Television Second Generation (DVB-S2).
 Digital Satellite Television, exclusive for DirecTV (DSS).
 Digital Cable Television First Generation (DVB-C).
 Digital Cable Television Second Generation (DVB-C2).
 Integrated Services Digital Broadcasting - Terrestrial (ISDB-T).
 Digital multi-programme systems for television, sound and data services
for cable distribution (J83 Annex B).
 Analogue TV.
 Analogue FM.

4.3.3 F3: Tools

Access by the key. It shows the Tools menu. If a specific tool is not available
for the signal locked then the option is disabled. Tools are:

 Select Service: It displays the list of services available in the multiplex

tuned, with the service name, icons that identify the service type, SID
(stream identifier in decimal or hexadecimal format) and LCN (logic
channel number). Icons that appear next to the service name identify the
features of the service. The meaning is given in the following table:

November 2023 63 Chapter 4: RF SIGNAL TUNING

  Signal Monitoring: This tool allows the user to monitor a signal by
measuring its power, MER and C/N. All this data, can be downloaded to a
PC and exported to a file for later analysis. In this file are saved all
characteristics measurements for each type of signal.

 Signal Coverage*: This option allows the user to check signal coverage by
measuring its power, MER and C/N. The position where all these
measurements are taken is determined by a GPS receiver. All this data,
measurements and GPS position can be downloaded to a PC and exported
to a file for later analysis.
 Explore Channel Plan: It explores the selected channel plan. Tune by
channel must be selected.
 Datalogger: It creates a file in which are stored measurements. This file
belongs to the selected current installation.
 Constellation: It displays the constellation of the locked signal.
 LTE Ingress Test: It enables the detection of signal interferences coming
from mobile phones.
 Attenuation Test: This feature allows the user to easily check the response
of the telecommunications installations before antennas and headers are
working.
 Echoes: It detects the echoes that may appear due to the simultaneous
reception of the same signal from several transmitters.
 MER by carrier: This function analyses continuosly the measure of the
MER value for each one of the carriers forming the selected channel and
they are displayed in a graphic on screen.
 MEROGRAM: This functions shows a graphical representation of the MER
level for each carrier of the locked signal, which is superimposed over
time.
 Spectrogram: This function shows a graphical representation of the
spectrum superimposed over time of a channel or frequency selected by
the user.
 Discover FM Stations: This function scans the FM band and creates a FM
channel plan from scratch. Scanned frequency range is from 87 to 108
MHz.
 Field Strength: This function allows the equipment to measure as a field
strength meter.

*. GPS receiver not included with the RANGER Neo 2. Contact PROMAX to obtain a valid GPS
receiver.

Chapter 4: RF SIGNAL TUNING 64 November 2023

  Task Planner: This function allows the user to schedule specific tasks.
 TS Analyzer: This function allows the user to make a comprehensive
analysis of the Transport Stream (TS) contained in a tuned signal.
 TS Recording: This function can capture in real time the received transport
stream (TS) contained in the received signal.
 Shoulder Attenuation: This function measures the shoulder-shaped
interferences in the adjacent channels.
 Service Recording: This function records in real-time the digital service
shown on display from the tuned transport stream.
 Tilt: This function shows level difference among four carriers, in graphic
and numerical mode.
 Scan: This function shows signal level in bar graph mode for all channels
in a channel plan.
 Streaming V/A: This function allows the user to broadcast video/audio
from the meter to a PC through a data network.

 Network Delay*: The Network Delay Margin function shows time delay of
the transport stream from beginning to the final destiny.
 Power Off: This option allows you to switch off the meter from the menu.

For more information about these features, refer to “TOOLS” on page 88.

4.4 Advanced Options

Press key , to access advanced options for the mode selected.

►Advanced Menu in Spectrum Analyzer Mode

 Average: The user can select the amount of signal values to be used to set
the average signal value to be displayed on screen. The larger the average
value, the more stable the displayed signal appears.
 Spectrum Line: It defines the spectrum display. The Outline option
displays the spectrum outline. The Solid option displays the contour of the
spectrum with solid background. The Transparence option shows the
outline in yellow and the background in a softer yellow.
 Tone Level: This option produces a tone that changes according to the
input level of the signal so the tone is sharper if the level increases and
deeper if the level decreases.
 Marker: It allows enabling/disabling the marker. This marker is displayed
on screen with the shape of an arrowhead, showing on screen some
information about the frequency and power level where it points. You can

*. Only available for RANGER Neo 3 and RANGER Neo 4.

November 2023 65 Chapter 4: RF SIGNAL TUNING

 move left/right by the joystick in MK mode (press the joystick until the
icon MK appears). When the Marker is ON at the top right corner a window
pops up with the following data:
•Freq: Frequency where is placed the marker.
•Level: Power level at the frequency where is placed the marker.
•F: Difference of frequency between the marker and the main cursor.
•L: Difference of power level between the marker and the main cursor.
 Marker Trace: It allows the user to select the trace to place the marker
on:
•Normal: It places the marker on the spectrum trace in real time.
•Reference: It places the marker on the spectrum reference trace. To make
a spectrum reference use the Reference function.
•Max. Hold: It places the marker on the max. hold trace. To make a
maximum hold trace use the Max. Hold function.
•Min. Hold: It places the marker on the min. hold trace. To make a
minimum hold trace use the Min. Hold function.
 Max. Hold:(Off/Permanent/Curtain). It allows the user to display the
current signal with the maximum values measured for each frequency.
The OFF option disables this function. The Curtain option displays the
maximum values in blue for a moment with the current signal. The
Permanent option maintains maximum signal on the screen. This option is
especially useful for detecting sporadic noises.
 Min. Hold: (Off/Permanent/Curtain). It allows the user to display the
current signal with the minimum values measured for each frequency. The
OFF option disables this function. The Curtain option displays the
minimum values in green for a moment with the current signal. The
Permanent option maintains minimum signal on the screen. This option is
useful for detecting interferences in TV cable or identify deterministic
interference in analogue and digital channels.
 Persistence: When active, the signal is displayed on a coloured
background. The signal prior to current signal persists for a while before
disappearing so the user can see how the signal changes easily.
 Detector Type: (PEAK/RMS). It allows the user to select between
maximum PEAK detector or RMS detector. The maximum PEAK detector is
mainly used for analogue modulated signals, while the RMS option is the
right choice for digital modulated signals. The maximum peak detector
causes the noise floor to rise, according to the RMS to peak ratio. That
same effect causes digital signals to apparently grow in level when
maximum peak detector is used.
 Resolution Bandwidth (RBW): Resolution filters available are: 2 kHz (only
terrestrial band), 10 kHz, 20 kHz, 30 kHz, 40 kHz, 100 kHz, 200 kHz and
1000 kHz. According to filter selected maximum and minimum span
changes (for more details refer to “Spectrum Analyzer Mode” on
page 269).
 Vertical Range: It allows setting the vertical scale on screen. Available
values are 1, 2, 5 and 10 dB per division.

Chapter 4: RF SIGNAL TUNING 66 November 2023

  Dashed BW: When it is ON the channel bandwidth area is hatched by
lines.
 Reference: (Set / Clear). It memorizes the current trace on screen, which
can be used as a reference for further comparison. It may be also very
helpful for visually measure the gain or attenuation in a TV distribution
network. To delete the reference, select the "clear" option. The trace can

be also captured by a short press on the export key in the Spectrum

Analyzer mode. Pressing short again on the export key it clears the
reference.
 Start Zoom (this function must be previously enabled on Preferences ->
Tools): It automatically sets parameters from the Spectrum mode in order
to analyse small signals. Settings are:
•Span: 200 kHz.
•Resolution filter: 12.5 kHz.
•Reference level: minimum.
•Measurement units: dBm.

NOTE: Some parameters such as average, spectrum line, tone level and marker
are recovered after switching on.

►Advanced Menu in TV Mode

 Analogue Signal: This option is available only if the detected or selected

signal is ANALOGUE. Pressing the key it allows you to select the source
for the analogue signal between antenna (via RF connector) and external
(via V/A input connector). To get an external analogue signal use the A/V
input.
 Aspect Ratio: This option is available only if the detected or selected signal
is ANALOGUE. It allows the user to select the image aspect ratio (4:3;
16:9). It remembers this selection even after switch off.
 Advanced: This option is available only if the detected or selected signal is
DIGITAL. There are these options:
•Audio: It allows the user to select among the audio tracks available.
•TS Data: It shows the IRG data descriptor. If the signal contains this
carrier identifier, this option will be enabled. If the signal does not contain
this identifier, the option will be disabled (for more information refer to
“IRG Descriptor” on page 85).
•Discovered URLs: If shows the URL related to the interactive service.

November 2023 67 Chapter 4: RF SIGNAL TUNING

 4.5 Screen Description

The information that appears on screens for each mode (Measurement mode,
Spectrum mode and TV mode) is described below. To change the mode, press
the corresponding mode key. To change the screen in the same mode, press the
same mode key consecutively.

S
C
Spectrum Analyzer 1/3
A
N

S
C
Spectrum Analyzer 2/3
A
N

S
C
Spectrum Analyzer 3/3
A
N

S
C
Measurement mode
A
N

S
C
TV mode
A
N

Chapter 4: RF SIGNAL TUNING 68 November 2023

 4.5.1 Measurement Mode Screens

► FULL MEASUREMENT (MEASUREMENT 1/3)

Figure 48.
1 Selected installation, date and time.
2 Main measurement and its numeric value. To select another main
measurement move joystick up / down. The main measurement selection
does not change even if you change screen or switch off the meter.
3 Number of view/total views.
4 Selected band, battery level.
5 Total power detected over the whole selected band (terrestrial or satellite).
The total power can be used to know when it is close to saturation. It also
shows the link margin measurement. The link margin is the margin of safety
remaining for a good reception.
6 Graphical measurement of the main measurement.
7 Measurement values for the type of locked signal.
8 Signal status (searching/locked/multiplex name).
9 Softkeys menus.

Joystick functions:
•Joystick up/down: Change of main measurement on screen.
•Joystick left/right: Change of channel/frequency.

November 2023 69 Chapter 4: RF SIGNAL TUNING

 ► MEASUREMENT + TV + SPECTRUM (MEASUREMENT 2/3)

Figure 49.
1 Selected installation, date and time.
2 Image of locked signal.
3 Number of view/total views.
4 Selected band, battery level.
5 Spectrum of locked signal.
6 Measurement values for the type of locked signal.
7 Signal status (searching/locked/multiplex name).
8 Softkeys menus.
Joystick functions:
•Joystick left/right: It changes channel/frequency.

Chapter 4: RF SIGNAL TUNING 70 November 2023

 ► MEASUREMENT + PARAMETERS (MEASUREMENT 3/3)

Figure 50.
1 Selected installation, date and time.
2 Number of view/total views.
3 Selected band, battery level.
4 Demodulation parameters for the locked signal.
5 Measurement values for the type of locked signal.
6 Signal status (searching/locked/multiplex name).
7 Softkeys menus.

Joystick functions:
•Joystick left/right: It changes channel/frequency.

November 2023 71 Chapter 4: RF SIGNAL TUNING

 4.5.2 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Screens

► SPECTRUM + MEASUREMENT (SPECTRUM 1/3)

Figure 51.
1 Selected installation, date and time.
2 Number of view/total views.
3 Joystick active mode, selected band, battery level.
4 Measured values of the signal at the frequency/channel where is pointing the
cursor.
5 Spectrum in the band with the selected span.
6 Centre frequency and cursor. It also shows the bandwidth of a digital locked
signal.
7 Signal status (searching/locked/multiplex name/selected span).
8 Softkeys menus.

Joystick functions:
•Joystick up/down: It changes reference level.
•Joystick left/right (depending on the joystick active mode):
-SP: Span change.
-FR or CH: Frequency change or Channel change.
-MK: Marker change (if marker is enabled).

Chapter 4: RF SIGNAL TUNING 72 November 2023

 ► SPECTRUM + MEASUREMENT + TV (SPECTRUM 2/3)

Figure 52.
1 Selected installation; date and time.
2 Number of view/total views.
3 Joystick active mode; selected band; battery level.
4 Measured values of the signal at the frequency/channel where is pointing the
cursor.
5 Image of the tuned signal.
6 Spectrum in the band with the selected span.
7 Centre frequency and cursor. It also shows the bandwidth of the digital signal
locked.
8 Signal status (searching/locked/multiplex name/selected span).
9 Softkeys menus.

Joystick functions:
•Joystick up/down: It changes reference level.
•Joystick left/right (depending on the joystick active mode):
-SP: Span change.
-FR or CH: Frequency change or Channel change.
-MK: Marker change (if marker is enabled).

November 2023 73 Chapter 4: RF SIGNAL TUNING

 ► FULL SPECTRUM (SPECTRUM 3/3)

Figure 53.
1 Selected installation, date and time.
2 Number of view/total views.
3 Joystick active mode; selected band; battery level.
4 Spectrum in the band with the selected span.
5 Centre frequency and cursor. It also shows the bandwidth of a digital signal
locked.
6 Softkeys menus.

Joystick functions:
•Joystick up/down: It changes reference level.
•Joystick left/right (depending on the joystick active mode):
-SP: Span change.
-FR or CH: Frequency change or Channel change.
-MK: Marker change (if marker is enabled).

Chapter 4: RF SIGNAL TUNING 74 November 2023

 ► FULL SPECTRUM (SPECTRUM 3/3) WITH MARKER

Figure 54.
1 Horizontal reference line: It shows level of signal.
2 Vertical axis: It indicates the signal level.
3 Vertical reference line: It indicates the frequency.
4 SPAN: It is the frequency range displayed on the horizontal axis. Span values
available changes according to Resolution Bandwidth selected. The current
span value appears at the bottom right of the screen. To switch among span
default values use the joystick (left, right) in span mode (SP). For example,
for RBW = 100 kHz default span values are Full (full band), 500 MHz, 200
MHz, 100 MHz, 50 MHz, 20 MHz and 10 MHz. To change to any other span
value in that frequency range use the "span" option in the Tuning menu (
key).
5 Reference Level: It is the power range represented on the vertical axis. To
change use the joystick (up, down; 5 dB steps). This equipment has an option
to activate the automatic adjustment of the reference level, so it detects the
optimal reference level for each situation. In automatic mode, it sets the
optimum reference level each time it enters the spectrum mode. This option
can be enabled or disabled through the PREFERENCES menu and
Measurements tab.
6 Cursor: Red vertical line that indicates position during the channel or
frequency tuning. When a digital signal is detected, there is a triple cursor
that shows the frequency for the signal locked and two vertical lines that
shows the bandwidth of the digital carrier. In the case of a GENERIC signal,
the bandwidth shown is the one selected by the user on the "Signal
Parameters" menu when pressing the key. To change frequency/channel

November 2023 75 Chapter 4: RF SIGNAL TUNING

 use the joystick (left, right) in FR mode (tuning by frequency) or CH mode
(tuning by channel).
7 Marker: It is a special cursor that can be placed on a given frequency to check
the power in this point. This option can be enabled using the "Marker" option
from the Advanced menu ( key). To change use the joystick (left, right) in
MARKER (MK) mode.The window Marker shows the following data::
•Freq: Frequency where is placed the marker (MHz units; accurate to Hz).
•Level: Power level at the frequency where is placed the marker (in case of
working with FSM tool, it shows FSM level).
•F: Difference of frequency between the marker and the main cursor (MHz
units; accurate to Hz).
•L: Difference of power level between the marker and the main cursor.
8 Centre Frequency: Frequency at which the screen is centered. This frequency
can be set through the Tuning key . It also changes when moving the
cursor out of screen.

Chapter 4: RF SIGNAL TUNING 76 November 2023

 4.5.3 TV Mode Screens

► FULL TV (TV 1/3)

Figure 55.
1 Selected installation; date and time.
2 Number of view/total views.
3 Selected band, battery level.
4 Tuned service image.
5 Signal status (searching/locked/multiplex name) and name of the selected
service.
6 Softkeys menus.

Joystick functions:
•Joystick up/down: It changes service.
•Joystick left/right: It changes channel/frequency (depending on the tuning
mode).

November 2023 77 Chapter 4: RF SIGNAL TUNING

 ► TV + SPECTRUM + MEASUREMENT (TV 2/3)

Figure 56.
1 Selected installation; date and time.
2 Number of view/total views.
3 Selected band, battery level.
4 Tuned service image.
5 Spectrum.
6 Measured values of the signal in the frequency/channel the cursor is pointing.
7 Signal status (searching/locked/multiplex name) and name of the selected
service.
8 Softkeys menus.

Joystick functions:
•Joystick up/down: It changes service.
•Joystick left/right: It changes channel/frequency (depending on the tuning
mode).

Chapter 4: RF SIGNAL TUNING 78 November 2023

 ► TV + SERVICE DATA (TV 3/3)

Figure 57.
1 Selected installation; date and time.
2 Tuned service image.
3 Tuned service information.
 TYPE: Encoding type and video transmission rate.
 FORMAT: Resolution (horizontal x vertical), aspect ratio and frequency.
 PROFILE: Profile level.
 PID: Video program identifier.
4 Number of view/total views.
5 Selected band; battery level.
6 Tuned service information.
 NETWORK: Television distribution network (Terrestrial). Orbital position
(Satellite).
 PROVIDER: Program provider name.
 NID: Network identifier where the signal is distributed.
 ONID: Identifier of the original network where the signal originates.
 TSID: Transport stream identifier.
 SID: Service Identifier.

November 2023 79 Chapter 4: RF SIGNAL TUNING

  App. Type: Type of detected interactive service such as HbbTV, MHP and
MHEG-5. It also shows the URL related to the interactive service in F4:
Advanced - Discovered URLs.
 LCN: Logic Channel Number. It is the first logic number assigned to the
first channel in the receiver.
 +Info: Additional service information.
 v. NIT: Network Information Table (NIT) version.
 FREE/SCRAMBLED: Free/scrambled transmission.
 DTV/DS: Standard type of transmission.
 STTL: Subtitles available.
 Text: Teletext available.
 AD: Audio description available (for visually impaired).
7 Tuned Audio Information.
 TYPE: Type of audio encoding and transmission speed.
 FORMAT: Service audio format. Bit depth; sampling frequency; sound
reproduction.
 LANGUAGE: Broadcasting language.
 PID: ID of the audio program.
8 Signal status (searching/locked/multiplex name) and name of the selected
service.
9 Softkeys menu.

Joystick functions:
•Joystick up/down: It changes service.
•Joystick left/right: It changes channel/frequency (depending on the tuning
mode).

NOTE: For services with video in 4K UHD, the RANGER Neo 4 meter will
display video on screen. On the other hand, models RANGER Neo 2
and RANGER Neo 3 will not be able to show this video but they will be
able to show a sequence of fixed images (frames) extracted from the
video by means of the "4K Frame Grabber" function available in the F4
Advanced menu.

NOTE: PID, NID, ONID, TSID and SID fields can be shown in decimal or
hexadecimal format. To select this parameter go to "Values Format" in
"Preferences" - "Appearance".

Chapter 4: RF SIGNAL TUNING 80 November 2023

 ► AUDIO RADIO (RADIO 1/3)

Figure 58.

► AUDIO RADIO + SPECTRUM + MEASUREMENT (RADIO 2/3)

Figure 59.

November 2023 81 Chapter 4: RF SIGNAL TUNING

 ► AUDIO RADIO + RDS DATA (RADIO 3/3)

Figure 60.
1 RDS Data:
 PS: Programme service.
 PI: Programme Identification.
 PTY: Program type.
 UTC Time: Universal time.
 Local: Local time.
 ECC: Extended country code.
 LIC: Language Identification Code.
 TP: Traffic program.
 TA: Traffic announcement.
 MS: Music switcher.
2 Radiotext: Extra text information.
3 Decoder ID: It identifies different operation modes of the decoder.
4 Alternative Freqs: : It shows alternative frequencies and its total number.

Chapter 4: RF SIGNAL TUNING 82 November 2023

 4.6 Additional Functions

In this chapter there is explained some additional functions for the meter. There
are:

 Generic Signal
 Satellite Identification
 IRG Descriptor
 4K Decoding
 LTE Signals

4.6.1 Generic Signal

This is a special digital signal that the equipment does not demodulate. It can
be used for special signals as DAB/DAB + or COFDM modulation with narrow BW.

To select this type of signal press and in “Signal Type” select GENERIC.

In this type of signal the user can select the signal bandwidth by accessing the
"Signal Parameters" menu on the key.

The power measure and C/N ratio is calculated according to the bandwidth
selected by the user. The triple cursor shows on screen the BW selected by the
user.

4.6.2 Satellite Identification

The spectrum analyzer makes easier the fieldwork for engineers when working
with SNG mobile units and VSAT communications, since it allows adjusting
transmission-reception systems. It also has several functions to identify
satellites that avoid any possibility of error. When the signal is locked it identifies
the satellite and shows on screen its name.

Often satellite operators request to look for the Beacon signal, as a method of
satellite identification. This signal is easily identified by the meter, because it has
high resolution, high sensitivity and short sweep times.

S
C
How to locate satellite beacon carriers
A
N

November 2023 83 Chapter 4: RF SIGNAL TUNING

 Below are two Beacon screen-shots signals, with a span of 10 MHz and a
bandwidth of 100 kHz resolution, all with a sweep time of 90 ms.

Figure 61.

Figure 62.
More info about satellite signals in the application note “How to point a dish
antenna” available on the PROMAX website.

Chapter 4: RF SIGNAL TUNING 84 November 2023

 4.6.3 IRG Descriptor

The analyzer is compatible with IRG recommendations and it can extract the
Carrier ID information and display it conveniently showing all the details.

This information is useful to identify the interference, thanks to the carrier ID.
This identifier provides enough information to detect the interference source
(customer name, contact data, geo coordinates, etc.) and allows the operators
to communicate directly with the RFI source to resolve the incident.

IRG descriptor function is available only for signals containing the carrier
identifier. To access this feature:

1 Connect the RF input signal to the equipment.

2 Tune the channel that produces interferences.

3 Access the TV mode and press the Advanced menu .

4 Select the TS Data option. If the signal has a carrier identifier, this option is
enabled. If the signal does not contain this identifier, this option is disabled.

5 The IRG descriptor window is displayed with the data about the provider
(see figure below).

Figure 63.

November 2023 85 Chapter 4: RF SIGNAL TUNING

 4.6.4 4K Decoding

The equipment can identify the HEVC (H.265) signalling and display its
transmission data such as the video type, profile format, aspect ratio, bit rate
and image.

RANGER Neo 2 and RANGER Neo 3 have the “4K Frame Grabber” function.
This function decodes UHD video frames and displays them on screen as a
slideshow.

RANGER Neo 4 is able to decode 4K UHD services (Ultra High Definition) and
shows its data broadcasting information and video/audio.

S
C
Decoding a real 4K signal in DVB-T2
A
N

4.6.5 LTE signals

The equipment can measure LTE signals at 900 MHz (band 8) or at 2600 GHz
(band 7)*.

1 Connect the RF input signal to the equipment. In "Settings” select the RF

source signal and the terrestrial band.

2 Select the Spectrum Analyzer mode . Press and select the GENERIC
signal.

3 In this kind of signal the user can select its bandwidth from “Signal
Parameters” on key . Usually the bandwidth for this signal is 10 MHz.

4 Now press F1 and select tuning by channel or frequency. If you have a

channel plan with the operators channels** then use the tuning by channel.
If not then use tuning by frequency.

5 If using tuning by frequency, enter the frequency for the operator’s link you
want to measure. If using tuning by channel just select a channel.

*. Band 7 is an expansion option. Refer to annex.

**.Contact PROMAX for specific LTE channel plans.

Chapter 4: RF SIGNAL TUNING 86 November 2023

 Figura 64.
6 Set the SPAN to better signal view. Measure on downlink and uplink
frequencies.

S
C
LTE signal measurement (mobile telephony)
A
N

November 2023 87 Chapter 4: RF SIGNAL TUNING

5 TOOLS

5.1 Introduction

Tools are specific functions that complement the standard functions of the
meter. These tools can help solve specific situations where the usual
measurement is not enough. In this chapter, each of these tools is described in
detail. It is advisable to know them to make the most of the meter potential.

Tools are accessible by pressing the key . Some tools may be disabled or
unavailable when they are incompatible with the type of signal tuned.

The following lists shows all available tools and the type of signal they are
compatible with:

Name Type of Signall Additional Data

Constellation All digital signals
LTE Ingress Test All terrestrial digital signals
Echoes DVB-T, DVB-T2, DVB-C2, ISDB-T
MER by Carrier DVB-T, DVB-T2, DVB-C2
MEROGRAM DVB-T, DVB-T2, DVB-C2
Spectrogram All signals
Attenuation Test All signals
Signal Monitoring All signals
Signal Coverage All signals GPS connected to USB port is
mandatory
Datalogger All signals
Screen and Data Capture (Export All signals Also for other source signals: IPTV,
key) WiFi and OTT
Explore Channel Plan All signals
Discover FM Stations FM
Field Strength All signals
Task Planner All signals Also for IPTV source signal
Transport Stream Analyzer All digital signals Also for other source signals: IPTV
and TS-ASI input
T2MI* DVB-S2 It is a sub-function inside TS Analyzer
Also for other source signals: IPTV
and TS-ASI input
Transport Stream Recording All digital signals Also for other source signals: IPTV
and TS-ASI input
Network Delay Margin** IPTV Also with TS-ASI input
Shoulders Attenuation DVB-T, DVB-T2, DVB-C, DVB-C2,
ISDB-T
Service Recording All digital signals Also for other source signals: IPTV
and TS-ASI input
Tilt All terrestrial signals
Scan All terrestrial signals
Streaming V/A All signals Also for other source signals: IPTV
and TS-ASI input

Chapter 5: TOOLS 88 November 2023

 *. T2MI function in TS Analyzer tool is not available for RANGER Neo 2
**. Not available for RANGER Neo 2

5.2 Constellation

5.2.1 Description

The constellation diagram is a graphic representation of the digital symbols

received over a period of time. There are different types of constellation
diagrams according to the modulation type.

In the case of an ideal transmission channel without noise or interference, all

symbols are recognized by the demodulator without errors. In this case, they
are represented in the constellation diagram as well defined points hitting in the
same area forming a very concentrated dot.

Noise and interferences cause the demodulator to not always read the symbols
correctly. In this case hits are dispersed and create different forms which can
visually determine the type of problem in the signal.

Each type of modulation is represented differently. A 16-QAM signal is shown on

screen by a diagram of a total of 16 different zones and a 64-QAM signal is
represented by a diagram of 64 different zones and so on.

The constellation diagram shows in different colours the density of hits and
includes features to zoom, move and delete the display on screen.

S
C
Constellation
A
N

5.2.2 Operation

The constellation is available to all digital signals, both terrestrial and satellite.

To access the Constellation tool:

1 Connect the RF input signal to the equipment.

2 Tune to a digital signal from satellite or terrestrial band.

3 Press the Tools key.

4 Select Constellation.

November 2023 89 Chapter 5: TOOLS

 5 The Constellation of the tuned signal appears.

► Screen Description

Figure 65.
1 Selected installation; date and time.
2 Constellation window. The colour scale placed at the left side indicates the
signal quality in a qualitative way by a gradation of colours proportional to
the density of symbols concentrated in a given area. The colour scale ranges
from black (no symbols) to red (highest density). Greater dispersion of the
symbols indicates higher noise level or worse signal quality signal. If there is
symbols concentration with respect to the full grid (see advanced menu for
types of grid) this is indicative of good ratio signal/noise or absence of
problems.
3 Selected band; battery level.
4 Constellation modulation.
5 Data Window. Data shown are: Start Carrier, Stop Carrier, Power, C/N and
frequency/channel.
6 Spectrum of the tuned signal. Spectrum is displayed with the span selected
at the Spectrum mode.
7 Signal status (searching/locked/multiplex name).
8 Softkeys menus.

Chapter 5: TOOLS 90 November 2023

 Joystick functions:
•Joystick left/right: Frequency/Channel change (depending on the tuning
mode).

5.2.3 Menu Options

On the bottom of the screen there are four menus accessible via the function
keys.

 It displays the channel / frequency where is pointing the cursor,

accesses the tuning menu and allows selecting the channel plan.

 It displays the selected transmission standard menu and accesses

the signal parameters.

 It displays the Tools menu.

 It displays the Advanced menu.

In the Advanced menu there are some options to set the constellation tool.
They are:

 Grid type:
•Full Grid:The grid where the constellation is displayed is a complete grid.
•Cross Grid: The grid where the constellation is displayed is made of
crosses.
 Persistence: It allows the user to set the level of persistence, which is the
lapse of time the signal stays on the screen before disappearing. Available
options according to the persistence level are: low, medium, high or
permanent.
 Zoom: It allows the user to select a quarter (I, II, III or IV) where apply
the zoom in. To come back to normal view select All.
 Start Carrier/Stop Carrier: This option allows selecting the range of
carriers to be displayed between the first and last.
 Clear: This option clears all symbols in the whole constellation window.

November 2023 91 Chapter 5: TOOLS

 5.3 LTE Ingress Test

5.3.1 Description

Long Term Evolution is a new standard for mobile networks. This mobile
communication standard uses a frequency band close to the bands used by
television. For this reason it can cause interferences.

The equipment allows you to use an LTE external filter to put on the RF input
connector. This filter can be enabled to check if the quality of the TV signal
reception improves, when much of the LTE band has been attenuated by the
filter. With this tool you can measure the MER of a DTT channel, presumably
affected by an LTE signal, and evaluate the effects of enabling an LTE filter.

To be clarified that these filters cannot completely remove the LTE band signals.
Especially for the TV channels close to 790 MHz, where is the end for the current
UHF. If we are close to a LTE station with low downlink channels, a filter cannot
be a sufficient solution.

Other options to better mitigate the LTE signals can be considered, such as a
change in the location of the TV antenna or a passive shield in the way between
the two antennas (TV and LTE).

For more information, refer to application note “LTE Digital Dividend” available
on the PROMAX website.

S
C
LTE ingress test
A
N

5.3.2 Operation

The LTE Ingress Test is available to all digital terrestrial signals.

► Settings

1 Press the "Installation manager" key for one second to access "Preferences"
settings.

2 Go to "Tools" tab and edit the LTE filter settings:

 LTE Filter F. Min.: Select the minimum frequency for the external LTE
filter.
 LTE Filter F. Max.: Select the maximum frequency for the external LTE
filter.

Chapter 5: TOOLS 92 November 2023

 3 Once selected, press to save changes and to exit "Preferences".

► Operation

1 Connect the external LTE filter between the signal and the RF input.

2 Tune the channel that is possibly affected by a LTE interference.

3 Press the key : Tools.

4 Select the LTE Ingress Test mode.

5 Screen shows a confirmation message. Press on "Yes" if filter is connected

or "No" if filter is not connected.

6 It starts to measure.

7 To change filter status (ON / OFF), press again the key and will appear a
confirmation message. Connect / disconnect the LTE filter at the RF input and
then press key: Ok to start measuring.

8 The user can enable / disable the LTE measure by pressing the : ON/
OFF. Remember to connect / disconnect the LTE filter to the RF input. Each
time a LTE measure starts, the time counter will reset.

9 Check how to connect and disconnect the LTE filter affects the installation,
by comparing the MER measure and the LTE band power.

November 2023 93 Chapter 5: TOOLS

 ► Screen Description

Figure 66.
1 Selected installation; date and time.
2 Elapsed time with filter enabled (ON).
3 Measurement with LTE filter enabled:
 MER: Maximum and minimum MER for the TV channel tuned (the one
probably affected by the LTE interference signal).
 LTE Power: Maximum and minimum power for the complete band,
between minimum and maximum filter frequencies.
4 Spectrum band, frequencies between minimum and maximum filter
frequencies.
5 Identifier icon of the LTE filter ON (when using internal LTE filter)*.
6 Selected band; battery level.
7 Time elapsed with filter disabled (OFF).
8 Measurement with LTE filter disabled:
 MER: Maximum and minimum MER for the TV channel tuned (the one
probably affected by the LTE interference signal).
 LTE Power: Maximum and minimum power for the complete band,
frequencies between minimum and maximum filter frequencies.
9 Measurement units/centre frequency/span (span: 10 MHz/division).

*. only for some models.

Chapter 5: TOOLS 94 November 2023

 10 Signal status (searching/locked/multiplex name).
11 Softkeys menus.

5.3.3 Menu Options

On the bottom of the screen there are four menus accessible via the function
keys.

 It displays channel/frequency and access the tuning menu. It allows

selecting the channel plan and the channel where apply the LTE ingress
test.

 It displays the selected transmission standard menu and accesses

the signal parameters.

 It displays the Tools menu.

 It enables (ON) / disables (OFF) the LTE filter.

5.4 Echoes

5.4.1 Description

The Echoes function shows the response in time of a digital terrestrial channel
and therefore it can detect echoes that can occur due to the simultaneous
reception of the same signal from several transmitters with different delays and
amplitudes.

Another cause that may cause echoes is reflection of the signal on large objects,
as buildings or mountains. This may be the explanation that having a good C/N
and a good signal, the BER does not reach the minimum value.

With the Echoes function is possible to know the distance from where the
equipment is to the transmitter or the object that caused the echo. Thus, the
installer can minimise the effect that the echo may cause on the installation,
reorienting the antenna and reducing the effect of received echoes.

November 2023 95 Chapter 5: TOOLS

 This function is only available for DVB-T, DVB-T2, DVB-C2 and ISDB-T.
Therefore, previously have to configure the equipment for the reception of such
signals.

S
C
Echoes analyzer
A
N

5.4.2 Operation

Echoes function is available for DVB-T, DVB-T2, DVB-C2 and ISDB-T signals.

1 Connect the RF input signal to the equipment.

2 Tune a DVB-T, DVB-T2, DVB-C2 or ISDB-T digital signal at the terrestrial
band.
3 Press the Tools key.
4 Select the Echoes option.
5 The Echoes function of the tuned signal appears on screen.

► Screen Description

Figure 67.
1 Selected installation; date and time.
2 Selected band, battery level.
3 Main signal data: Power, C/N and Cell ID (it shows the main signal
transmitter, if available).

Chapter 5: TOOLS 96 November 2023

 4 Echoes Diagram. The display shows a graphical representation of the
echoes. The horizontal axis of the graph corresponds to the delay in receiving
the echo on the main path (the stronger signal).The vertical axis represents
the attenuation of the echo in dB on the main path.
5 Data box with main data regarding echoes. EIn the list of echoes it shows the
power, the delay in microseconds and the distance in kilometres to the
echoes.
6 Signal status (searching/locked/multiplex name).
7 Softkeys menus.

Joystick functions:
•Joystick left/right (Channel/Frequency mode): It changes the channel/
frequency (according to the tuning type selected).
•Joystick left/right (Echoes mode): It changes echo.
•Joystick up/down (Echoes mode): It changes zoom.

Remember to press the joystick to switch between the Echoes (EC) mode and
the Channel/Frequency (CH/FR) mode.

5.4.3 Menu Options

At the bottom of the screen there are four menus available via the function keys.

 It displays the channel/frequency where is pointing the cursor, it

allows the user to select a channel or frequency, a channel plan and
access the tuning menu.

 It displays the selected transmission standard menu and accesses

the signal parameters.

 It displays the Tools menu.

 It displays the Advanced menu. The ZOOM option changes the zoom
on the echoes windows. Zooms are 1x, 2x, 4x and 8x.

5.5 MER by Carrier

5.5.1 Description

The MER by Carrier function analyses continuously the measure of the MER value
for each one of the carriers forming the selected channel and they are displayed

November 2023 97 Chapter 5: TOOLS

 in a graphic on screen. This tool is especially useful for the analysis of systems
in which signals of different type and origin interfere with each other, as may
occur during the transition from analogue to digital TV.

S
C
MER by carrier
A
N

5.5.2 Operation

The MER by carrier tool is available for signals with carriers: DVB-T, DVB-T2 and
DVB-C2.

1 Connect the RF input signal to the equipment.

2 Select terrestrial band and tune a DVB-T, DVB-T2 or DVB-C2 digital signal.

3 Press the Tools key .

4 Select MER by carrier option.

5 The MER function appears on screen.

6 To exit press any key of mode (TV mode, Spectrum mode or Measurement
mode).

► Screen Description

1 Selected installation; date and time.

Chapter 5: TOOLS 98 November 2023

 2 Joystick active mode; Selected band, battery level.
3 Measurement values for the signal tuned at the frequency/channel selected.
4 Average measurement value and standard deviation value of MER.
5 MER by carrier graphic.
6 Signal status (searching/locked/multiplex name).
7 Softkeys menus.

Joystick functions:
•Joystick left/right: Channel/frequency change (according to the tuning
mode).
Axis description:
•Axis X: Number of Carriers.
•Axis Y: MER.

5.5.3 Menu Options

At the bottom of the screen there are three menus available via the function
keys.

 It displays the channel/frequency where is pointing the cursor, it

allows selecting channel plan and channel and access the tuning menu.

 It displays the selected transmission standard menu and accesses

the signal parameters.

 It displays the Tools menu.

5.6 MEROGRAM

5.6.1 Description

The MEROGRAMA function shows a graphical representation of the MER level for
each carrier of the locked signal, which is superimposed over time. During the
MEROGRAM function, maximum and minimum of some parameters and the time
when they are reached are stored. This tool is especially useful for detecting
sporadic problems over time.

S
C
MEROGRAM
A
N

November 2023 99 Chapter 5: TOOLS

 5.6.2 Operation

The MEROGRAM function is available for signals with carriers: DVB-T, DVB-T2
and DVB-C2.

1 Connect the RF input signal to the equipment.

2 Select the terrestrial band and tune a DVB-T, DVB-T2 or DVB-C2 channel or
frequency.

3 Press the Tools key.

4 Select the MEROGRAM function.

5 It shows the MEROGRAM function of the signal.

6 To exit press any key of mode (TV mode, Spectrum mode or Measurement
mode). All data registered is cleaned after leaving.

► Screen Description

Figure 68.
1 Selected installation; date and time.
2 Measurement values for the signal tuned at the frequency/channel selected.
3 Maximum level of MER.
4 MEROGRAM graphic.
5 Minimum level of MER.

Chapter 5: TOOLS 100 November 2023

 6 Selected band, battery level.
7 Maximum and minimum MER value and MER average over time.
8 Maximum and minimum value of the measure selected by the user in the
option "User measure" (see next section).
9 Elapsed time after starting the MEROGRAM function.
10 Signal status (searching/locked/multiplex name).
11 Softkeys menus.

Joystick functions:
•No function in this tool.
Axis Description:
•Axis X: Number of Carriers.
•Axis Y: Power.

5.6.3 Menu Options

At the bottom of the screen there are four menus available via the function keys.

 It displays the channel/frequency where is pointing the cursor, it

allows selecting channel plan and channel and access the tuning menu.

 It displays the selected transmission standard menu and accesses

the signal parameters.

 It displays the Tools menu.

 It displays the Advanced menu.

In the Advanced menu there are some options for the MEROGRAM function
configuration. They are:

 User measure: It allows the user to select the measure to view on screen
among the several available for each type of signal..
 Details: It allows the user to view on screen the date and time when
maximum and minimum measures were reached. To quit this view press
the key .
 Clear measures: It clears the MEROGRAM function, measurement and
restarts the timer.

November 2023 101 Chapter 5: TOOLS

 5.7 Spectrogram

5.7.1 Description

The Spectrogram function shows a graphical representation of the spectrum

superimposed over time of a channel or frequency selected by the user. During
the Spectrogram, maximum and minimum of several measures and time are
registered. This tool is especially useful to analyse the behaviour of a spectrum
over time, because sporadic and indeterminate anomalies can be detected.

S
C
Spectrogram
A
N

5.7.2 Operation

The Spectrogram tool is available for all signals.

1 Connect the RF input signal to the equipment.

2 Select a channel or frequency.
3 Select the SPAN within the spectrogram will be displayed.
4 Press the Tools key .
5 Select the Spectrogram option.
6 It shows the Spectrogram of the signal.
7 To exit press any key of mode (TV mode, Spectrum mode or Measurement
mode). All data registered is cleaned after leaving.

While using the Spectrogram function, if the signal unlocks, timer and
measurement reset and they will start to register again when signal locks.

Chapter 5: TOOLS 102 November 2023

 ► Screen Description

Figure 69.
1 Selected installation; date and time.
2 Measurement values for the signal tuned at the frequency/channel selected.
3 Spectrum over time at the selected span.
4 Softkeys menus.
5 Selected band, battery level.
6 Maximum and minimum values of signal power and band power over time.
7 Maximum and minimum value of the measure selected by the user in the
option "User measure" (see next section).
8 Elapsed time.
9 Signal status (searching / locked / multiplex name / selected span).

Joystick functions:
•No function for this tool.
Axis description:
•Axis X: Span (MHz).
•Axis Y: Power.

5.7.3 Menu Options

At the bottom of the screen there are four menus available via the function keys.

November 2023 103 Chapter 5: TOOLS

  It displays the channel/frequency where is pointing the cursor and
access the tuning menu.

 It displays the selected transmission standard menu and accesses

the signal parameters.

 It displays the Tools menu.

 It displays the Advanced menu.

In the Advanced menu there are some options for the spectrogram
configuration:

 User measure: It allows the user to select a measure to view on screen

among the several available for each type of signal.
 Details: It allows the user to view on screen the date and time when
maximum and minimum measures were reached. To quit this view press
the key .
 Clear measures: It clears the spectrogram, measurement and restarts the
timer.

5.8 Attenuation Test

5.8.1 Description

The Attenuation Test function allows the user to easily check the response of the
telecommunications installations before antennas and headers are working. It
allows the user to evaluate the response along the complete range of
frequencies by measuring the losses (attenuation) in the distribution of TV
signals, comparing reference levels at headend output and at each house
antenna plugs.

S
C
Attenuation test
A
N

Chapter 5: TOOLS 104 November 2023

 5.8.2 Operation

Attenuation test function is available for all signals.

1 In Settings select the terrestrial or satellite band.

2 Press the Tools key .
3 Select the Attenuation Test option.
4 The Attenuation Test function for the signal appears on screen.
5 First, set the parameters before the test, pressing the Advanced key.
Parameters to set are: Frequencies of pilot signals (pilot 0, pilot 1 and pilot
2), maximum attenuation and threshold attenuation (for more details refer
to next section).
6 Then it is necessary to Set References. This requires a signal generator. We
recommend to use of one of the PROMAX signal generators: RP-050, RP-080,
RP-110 or RP-250 (depending on the frequency band).
7 Connect the generator and the meter where the origin of the signal
distribution is in the installation (antenna, headend, etc.) or connect the
generator directly to the RF input of the meter. If necessary, the meter can
feed the generator using the Supply Output option from the Settings menu
.
8 Active the signal generator and in the equipment, press the Set Reference
key .
9 Once are set the references for the pilot signals, let the signal generator
connected to the source point of the distribution system and take
measurements in each user access point with the equipment.
10 In each measurement a message over each pilot signal indicates whether
the measure "Pass" or "Fail" according to the parameters set.
11 The measurement data from the Attenuation Test can be saved through the
Datalogger tool. To do this, when creating a new datalogger, in the option
Include Attenuation Tests, select Terrestrial and/or Satellite. Then, the user
must perform a datalogger from the test point where he is performing the
attenuation test. Another quick option it is to select the "Test & Go" function
in the "Datalogger" menu. This option creates automatically one channel plan
(TER ICT or SAT ICT according to the current band) and starts to save
measurements. The data will be saved and can be checked and transferred
to a PC. For more information, see "Datalogger" section under the "Tools"
chapter. Also measurement data or screen image can be exported by
pressing the Export key (for more details refer to “Screen and Data
Capture (Export key)” on page 134) and after that display the images or
download the data files (in XML format).

NOTE: In both satellite and terrestrial band, the system saves the LNB state
every time the user sets a reference and uses this value always that the
equipment is working in this mode.

November 2023 105 Chapter 5: TOOLS

 ► Screen Description

Figure 70.
1 Installation selected, date and time.
2 Selected band; battery level.
3 Status message depending on the attenuation level.
4 Power level of the signal.
5 Signal Frequency (MHz).
6 Power level of the reference signal obtained when setting the reference and
used to calculate the attenuation level (dBµV).
7 Power level of the test signal at the user access point (dBµV).
8 Attenuation level (dB); Attenuation = Reference - Current.
9 Softkeys.

Joystick functions:
•No function for this tool.
Axis description:
•Axis X: Pilot signals.
•Axis Y: Power.

5.8.3 Menu Options

In the bottom of the screen are four menu accessible via the softkeys.

 Exits the tool.

Chapter 5: TOOLS 106 November 2023

  Pressing this option the current power values are captured and they
are assigned as reference values.

 Access the Tools main menu.

 Access the Advanced menu.

In the Advanced menu there are five parameters to set the attenuation test.
They are:

 Threshold Attenuation: It defines the maximum difference that may exist

between the pilot signal of higher level and the pilot signal of lower level.
All pilot signals out of this range will be removed and not used as a pilot
signal during the measurement process.
 Maximum Attenuation: It sets the attenuation level used by the
equipment to show on screen if the signal passes or fails. When the
attenuation level is below this value the message on screen is "PASS" and
when it is above this value is "FAIL".
 Pilot 0: It defines the frequency of the pilot signal 0 (MHz).
 Pilot 1: It defines the frequency of the pilot signal 1 (MHz).
 Pilot 2: It defines the frequency of the pilot signal 2 (MHz).

5.9 Signal Monitoring

5.9.1 Description

The Signal Monitoring tool allows monitoring one locked signal or a channel plan
(several channels) by measuring its power and other parameters over time. All
this data can be visualized in the meter or downloaded to a PC and exported to
a file for later analysis.

S
C
Signal monitoring
A
N

5.9.2 Operation

The Signal Monitoring tool is available for all RF signals.

1 In Settings select the source of signal RF and terrestrial or satellite band.

November 2023 107 Chapter 5: TOOLS

 2 Access the Spectrum mode. Select the channel plan (key F1) and tune the
signal for monitoring.

 In case of tuning a DVB-T2 signal, in the Signal Parameters menu

select the Profile (Base or Lite) and in the key select the PLP identifier.
User has to choose one profile and one PLP identifier per each monitoring.

3 Press the Tools key .

4 Select the Signal Monitoring option.

5 Select between monitoring a single channel or a channel plan.

6 The Signal Monitoring function appears on screen.

7 Before starting the monitoring, access the Configuration option in the

Advanced menu for settings (for more details refer to next section).

8 After settings, access the Advanced menu and press on Start to start the
signal monitoring analysis. Before starting, it shows some warnings to
confirm signal parameters (signal locked or unlocked, bandwidth and
reference level) and if the file name already exists.

9 In Continuous mode, the equipment takes samples automatically according

to sample time (see next section). In Manual mode each time the user
presses the joystick the equipment takes a sample. In Schedule mode it
starts to take samples automatically at the end of the countdown to the
starting time.

10 Access the Advanced menu and press on Stop to finish the signal
monitoring. Data obtained is automatically stored.

11 After stopped, it gives the option to access the Signal Monitoring Viewer that
allows the user to watch the final results (for more details refer to “Data
Viewer” on page 112).

12 You can also access data by pressing the Installation Management key to
check that the monitoring data file has been saved. This file is a "Signal
Monitoring" type. To manage the data, see below the section "Data File
Processing".

Chapter 5: TOOLS 108 November 2023

 ► Screen Description

Figure 71. Single Channel Monitoring

Figure 72. Channel Plan Monitoring

1 Selected installation; date and time.
2 Spectrum.
3 Power measurement over time (window size is span time set in
configuration).
4 MER and C/N measurement over time (window size is span time set in
configuration). In case of monitoring a FM signal, it shows nothing as there
is no measure to draw.

November 2023 109 Chapter 5: TOOLS

 5 Indicator of signal monitoring started.
6 LNB, Selected band; battery level.
7 Signal information window 1:
 Frecuency: frequency at which signal is locked; Profile (only for
DVB-T2 signals): Base or Lite; PLP identifier (only for DVB-T2 signals):
identifier of the layer being measured, TS Hierarchy (table hierarchy at
the transport stream) TS Priority (packet priority at the transport stream).
8 Signal information window 2:
 Measurements of the signal over time.
9 Signal information window 3:
 File name: Name of the current monitoring.
 Elapsed: Time elapsed since the beginning of the monitoring.
 Samples: Samples taken since the beginning of the monitoring.
 Space left: Space left in the memory to save data.
10 Channels from the channel plan being monitored. Measurement data are
from the selected channel (pointed by a red arrowhead).

Joystick functions:
•No function for this tool.
Axis Description (Single channel monitoring screen):
•Axis X: Window 1: Frequency; Window 2 and 3: Time.
•Axis Y: Window 1 and 2: Power; Window 3: MER and C/N.

5.9.3 Menu Options

At the bottom of the screen there are four menus available via the function keys.

 It displays the channel/frequency where is pointing the cursor and

access the tuning menu.

 It displays the selected transmission standard menu and accesses

the signal parameters.

 It displays the Tools menu.

 It displays the Advanced menu.

Chapter 5: TOOLS 110 November 2023

 In the Advanced menu there are some options for the Signal Monitoring. They
are:

 Start: It starts the signal monitoring.

 Stop: It stops the signal monitoring.
 Pause: It stops the signal monitoring for a while until resuming.
 Configuration: It shows the settings window with some parameters (for
more details refer to next section).
 Audio: It allows enable or disable audio. When this option is enabled, the
user can listen to any service in the monitored signal, knowing about
signal reception while driving or doing other tasks.

5.9.4 Settings

User can adjust some parameters on the Signal Monitoring:

Figure 73. Settings for Single Channel Monitoring

 File Name: User can give a name to the file where data is saved. All
measurement will be stored on the data file. Be sure to change the file
name when starting a new signal monitoring. If not, after a warning
message, the new data file will be saved on the last one.
 Comment: User can write some comments about the monitoring.
 Mode: There are three operation modes:
•Continuous: A sample is taken automatically every sample time.
•Manual: A sample is taken every time that user presses the joystick.
•Schedule: User defines starting time for monitoring. Then he must press
on “Start” in Advanced menu (F4) to start the countdown to the starting
time.

November 2023 111 Chapter 5: TOOLS

  Sample Time: Time between samples. Only when working in continuous or
schedule mode. Minimum time is 1 second.
 Span Time (only for single channel monitoring): It is the width, in time,
shown on screen for the X axis.
 Save to: There are two options: Internal or USB. For Internal option it
saves the file with all data in the internal memory of the equipment. For
USB option it saves the file with all data in a USB flash-drive connected to
the port of the equipment.
 GPS Alarm: If this box is checked then it sounds a beep when the GPS is
unlocked.

5.9.5 Data Viewer

The data viewer allows the user to watch the monitoring final results. It accesses
directly when signal monitoring ends or also by opening the data file in the
installation management screen.

According to the monitoring signal, saved parameters can change. For example,
in case of a FM signal, it also saves some RDS data like the PI and PS.

► Screen Description

Figure 74.
1 Selected installation; date and time.
2 Power measurement over time.
3 MER and C/N measurement over time. In case of a FM signal, it shows
nothing as there is no measure to draw.

Chapter 5: TOOLS 112 November 2023

 4 Joystick mode selected: PA mode (panoramic) or MA mode (cursor
movement).
5 LNB, selected band; battery level.
6 Signal information window 1: Measurement where the cursor is.
7 Signal information window 2: Date, time and elapsed time.
8 Scroll-bar: it shows position and size of the data displayed related to total
data.
9 Time span of displayed data.
10 Menu Options:
•F1: Exits the data viewer.
•F2: It shows transmission parameters of the monitored signal.
•F3: It shows the monitored channel or for channel plan it allows selecting
the channel to view data.
Joystick functions:
•Joystick up/down: It increases / decreases zoom.
•Joystick left/right: In PA mode it moves time span along the total time. In
MA mode it moves the cursor along the samples of the time span.
•Joystick Press: It switches between panoramic (PA) and movement (MA)
mode.

5.9.6 Data File Processing

►Description

This document is an explanation about the process that is needed to be done in

order to obtain a more comfortable view of the XML data obtained with the
meter, when performing a Signal Monitoring.

Once you got the monitoring data, copy the XML data file from the equipment to
a USB memory using the Installation Manager (for more details refer to “? Menu
Options” on page 205).

►Obtaining an excel file

For this section, you must have at least Excel 2003 or newer version. Excel 2007
(or later) is highly recommended to avoid macro problems.

1 First of all we need to locate the XML data file in the folder from which we
want to work. There are no requirements needed to be satisfied. A file named
COVERAGE.XSL must be placed in the same data file folder. That second file
allows proper data formatting when processed by Excel.

November 2023 113 Chapter 5: TOOLS

 2 Select the XML data file and then right click with the mouse button on the
file name.

3 Choose the option “Open with” and then select Excel 2007 (or the available
version).

Figure 75.
4 When Excel tries to open the file it will ask you the import method to open
the XML data file by this way:

Figure 76.
5 You must choose the option in which a stylesheet is asked. It will appear as
an option the “COVERAGE.xsl” file (you can download the “COVERAGE.xsl”
file from the PROMAX website).

6 Now Excel is opening the XML data file using the format that the XSL file is
providing. This step could take few seconds depending on the size of the XML
data file.

Chapter 5: TOOLS 114 November 2023

 7 At this point, you should have an excel file with three different sheets. Each
sheet corresponds to a different view of the same data:
 The first one will show you the generic signal information and the different
coverage measures for each point acquired.
 In the second one, you will find the same data but presented in a table
format, more user friendly for working with graphs based on each
measured parameter.

8 Now save the data as a true excel file. No specific name or path is required,
but you must remember the path.

5.10 Signal Coverage

5.10.1 Description

The Signal Coverage function allows the user to check signal for a tuned signal
or a channel plan (several channels) by measuring power and other parameters
over time.

The position where all these measurements are taken is determined by a GPS
receiver. When the equipment locks a GPS signal, it automatically sets date and
time using the GPS signal. As long as the GPS is locked, date and time is updated
every hour.

All this data, measurements and GPS position can be visualized on the meter or
downloaded to a PC and exported to a file for later analysis.

S
C
Signal coverage 1/2 (GPS)
A
N

5.10.2 Operation

The Signal Coverage tool is available for all RF signals.

1 Connect the GPS* receiver to the meter.

2 In Settings menu select the source of signal RF and terrestrial or satellite

band.

3 Access the Spectrum mode and tune the signal for coverage study.

*. GPS is not included for RANGER Neo 2. Contact PROMAX to get a valid GPS.

November 2023 115 Chapter 5: TOOLS

  In case of tuning a DVB-T2 signal, in the Signal Parameters menu
select the Profile (Base or Lite) and the PLP identifier. User has to choose
one profile and one PLP identifier per each signal coverage analysis.

4 Press the Tools key .

5 Select the Signal Coverage option.

6 Select between monitoring one single channel or one channel plan.

7 The Signal Coverage function appears on screen.

8 Before starting the signal coverage analysis, access the Configuration option
in the Advanced menu for settings (for more details refer to next section).

9 After settings, access the Advanced menu and press on Start to start the
signal coverage analysis. Before starting, it shows some warnings to confirm
signal parameters (signal locked or unlocked, bandwidth and reference level)
and if the file name already exists.

10 In Continuous mode, the equipment takes samples automatically according

to sample time (see next section). In Manual mode each time the user
presses the joystick the equipment takes a sample. In Schedule mode it
starts to take samples automatically at the end of the countdown to the
starting time. Measurement are linked to the GPS reference.

11 Access the Advanced menu and press on Stop to finish the signal
coverage analysis. Data obtained is automatically stored.

12 After stopped, it gives the option to access the Signal Monitoring Viewer that
allows the user to watch the final results (for more details refer to “Data
Viewer” on page 120).

13 You can also access data by pressing the Installation List key to check
that the monitoring data file has been saved. This file is a "Data Capture"
type. To manage the data, see below the section "Data File Processing".

Chapter 5: TOOLS 116 November 2023

 ►Screen Description

Figure 77. Signal Coverage for Single Channel

Figure 78. Signal Coverage for Channel Plan

1 Selected installation; date and time. The “Current installation” in green
indicates the system has locked the GPS signal. The “Current installation”
in red indicates that the system has not locked the GPS signal.
2 Spectrum.
3 Power measurement over time (span time is set in configuration).

November 2023 117 Chapter 5: TOOLS

 4 MER and C/N measurement over time (span time is set in configuration). In
case of monitoring a FM signal, it shows nothing as there is no measure to
draw.
5 Indicator of Signal coverage started.
6 LNB, Selected band; battery level.
7 Signal information window 1:
•Frequency: frequency at which signal is locked; Profile (only for
DVB-T2 signals): Base or Lite; PLP identifier (only for DVB-T2 signals):
identifier of the layer being measured, TS Hierarchy (table hierarchy at the
transport stream) TS Priority (packet priority at the transport stream).
8 Signal information window 2:
•Measurement over time.
9 Signal information window 3:
 File name: Name of current coverage file.
 Elapsed: Time elapsed since the beginning of the coverage study.
 Samples: Samples taken since the beginning of the coverage study.
 Space left: Space left in the memory to save data.
 GPS status: It shows if the GPS receiver is locked or unlocked.
 Latitude, Longitude: It shows the latitude and longitude at the current
position, if GPS is locked.
10 Channels from the channel plan being monitored. Measurement data are
from the selected channel (pointed by a red arrowhead).

Joystick functions:
•No function for this tool.
Axis Description (Single Channel Monitoring screen):
•Axis X: Window 1: Frequency; Window 2 and 3: Time.
•Axis Y: Window 1 and 2: Power; Window 3: MER and C/N.

5.10.3 Menu Options

At the bottom of the screen there are four menus available via the function keys.

 It displays the channel/frequency where is pointing the cursor and

access the tuning menu.

 It displays the selected transmission standard menu and accesses

the signal parameters.

Chapter 5: TOOLS 118 November 2023

  It displays the Tools menu.

 It displays the Advanced menu.

In the Advanced menu there are some options for the Signal Coverage. They
are:

 Start: It starts the signal coverage study.

 Stop: It stops the signal coverage study.
 Pause: It stops the signal monitoring for a while until resuming.
 Configuration: It shows the settings window with some parameters (for
more details refer to next section).
 Audio: It allows enable or disable audio. When this option is enabled, the
user can listen to any service in the monitored signal, knowing about
signal reception while driving or doing other tasks.
 GPS Status: It shows a list and a graph with satellites detected to locate
the GPS signal. It is also provided additional data such as longitude,
latitude, date and universal time, visible satellites and GPS status (locked
or not).

Figure 79.

5.10.4 Settings

November 2023 119 Chapter 5: TOOLS

 User can adjust some parameters on the Signal Coverage analysis:

Figure 80.
 File name: User can give a name to the file where data is saved. All
measurement will be stored on the data file. Be sure to change the file
name when starting a new Signal coverage analysis. If not, a warning
message appears before new data file will be saved on the last one.
 Comment: User can write some comments about the study.
 Mode: There are three operation modes:
•Continuous: A sample is taken automatically every sample time.
•Manual: A sample is taken every time that user presses the joystick.
•Schedule: User defines starting time for monitoring. Then he must press
on “Start” in Advanced menu to start the countdown to the starting
time.
 Sample Time: Time between samples. Only when working in continuous or
schedule mode. Minimum time is 1 second.
 Span time (only for signal channel coverage): It is the width, in time,
shown on screen for the X axis.
 Save to: There are two options: Internal or USB. For Internal option it
saves the file with all data in the internal memory of the equipment. For
USB option it saves the file with all data in a USB flashdrive connected to
the micro-USB port of the equipment.
 GPS Alarm: If this box is checked then it sounds a bip when the GPS is
unlocked.

5.10.5 Data Viewer

Chapter 5: TOOLS 120 November 2023

 The data viewer allows the user to browse along the final results. It opens
directly after saving the data or by opening the associated data file (that is
located in the installation manager).

According to the monitoring signal, saved parameters can change. For example,
in case of a FM signal, it also saves some RDS data like the PI and PS.

► Screen Description

Figure 81.
1 Selected installation; date and time.
2 Power measurement over time.
3 MER and C/N measurement over time. In case of a FM signal, it shows
nothing as there is no measure to draw.
4 Joystick mode selected: PA mode (panoramic) or MA mode (cursor
movement).
5 LNB, selected band; battery level.
6 Signal information window 1: Measurement where the cursor is.
7 Signal information window 2: Date, time and elapsed time.
8 BScrollbar: it shows position and size of the data displayed related to total
data.
9 Time span of displayed data.

November 2023 121 Chapter 5: TOOLS

 10 Menu Options:
•F1: Exits the data viewer.
•F2: It shows transmission parameters of the monitored signal.
•F3: It shows the monitored channel or for channel plan it allows selecting
the channel to view data.
Joystick functions:
•Joystick up/down: It increases / decreases zoom.
•Joystick left/right: In PA mode it moves time span along the total time. In
MA mode it moves the cursor along the samples of the time span.
•Joystick Press: It switches between panoramic (PA) and movement (MA)
mode.

5.10.6 Data File Processing

►Description

This document is an explanation about the process that is needed to be done in

order to obtain a more comfortable view of the XML data obtained with the
meter, with GPS option, when doing a Signal Coverage analysis.

Once you got the coverage data, copy the XML data file from the equipment to
a USB memory using the Installation Manager (for more details refer to “? Menu
Options” on page 205).

►Obtaining an Excel File

For this section, you must have at least Excel 2003 or newer version. Excel 2007
(or later) is highly recommended to avoid macro problems.

1 First of all we need to locate the XML data file in the folder from which we
want to work. There are no requirements needed to be satisfied. A file named
COVERAGE.XSL must be placed in the same data file folder. That second file
allows proper data formatting when processed by Excel.

2 Select the XML data file and then right click with the mouse button on the
file name.

3 Choose the option “Open with” and then select Excel 2007 (or the available
version).

Chapter 5: TOOLS 122 November 2023

 Figure 82.
4 When Excel tries to open the file it will ask you the import method to open
the XML data file by this way:

Figure 83.
5 You must choose the option in which a stylesheet is asked. It will appear as
an option the “COVERAGE.xsl” file (you can download the “COVERAGE.xsl”
file from the PROMAX website).

6 Now Excel is opening the XML data file using the format that the XSL file is
providing. This step could take few seconds depending on the size of the XML
data file.

7 At this point, you should have an excel file with three different sheets. Each
sheet corresponds to a different view of the same data:
•The first one will show you the generic signal information and the different
coverage measures for each point acquired
•In the second one, you will find the same data but presented in a table
format, more user friendly for working with graphs based on each
measured parameter.
•The third one provides data in a format adapted for geolocation.
Information is shown in terms of parameters required for presenting the

November 2023 123 Chapter 5: TOOLS

 measured data as a map layer (latitude, longitude, id, description and an
icon identifier number) as required for GIS and Google Earth technologies.
This third sheet is formatted mainly to be compatible with main Google
Earth format converters available in Internet

8 Now save the data as a true excel file. No specific name or path is required,
but you must remember the path.

5.10.7 Displaying Measurement in Google Earth

Measurement taken with the Signal Coverage tool can be exported and displayed
on Google Earth 3D maps.

S
C
Signal coverage 2/2 (KML generator)
A
N

1 Install Google Earth (https://www.google.com/earth/) on your PC.

2 Once measurements have been made and coverage data obtained, copy the
generated data file (COVERAGE.XML) to a USB stick or to a PC (for more
details refer to “CONNECTING TO EXTERNAL DEVICES” on page 245).

3 Access the KML Generator application by PROMAX (http://www.promax.es/

tools/kml-generator/).

4 Click on the KML Generator screen and then a file explorer opens. Select your
data file (COVERAGE.XML) exported from the meter.

5 If the file is correct it opens a window with a series of options that allow you
to customize the visualization:
 Assign colors to the test points using a quality-based color scale: It
assigns a color (selected by the user) for the worst quality value and
another color for the best quality value. For the intermediate values
performs a gradation between both colors.
 Use a PASS/FAIL threshold: It uses only two colors (selected by the user).
A color for measures that are below a certain threshold value and another
color for measures that are above that value.
 Quality parameter to use as reference: Select the type of measurement
(POWER, MER…) to show on the map.
 Bad quality test points color: Select one color for bad quality points.
 Good quality test points color: Select one color for good quality points.
 Value: Define a value for bad quality and another for good quality points.
These values are related to color above.

Chapter 5: TOOLS 124 November 2023

  Automatic: If you check this option it uses the highest and / or lowest
value detected in your exported data file.
 Threshold value: It allows you to select the limit value to paint the
measurements of one color or another.
 Generate and overlay a legend: It shows a legend that provides
information to understand the map.
 Include test points with UNLOCKED signal (only for digital signals): It
shows all test points even if signal is not tuned.
 Add extra information to test points (all measurements, date and time): It
displays all measures for each test point also date and time when they
were taken.
 Skip test points at the same physical location: It only uses the first
measure if are more than one with the same coordinates.
 Choose a marker style for test points geolocation: Select the type of
marker.

6 Once the configuration of the file is finished, click on the option “Download
your KML file for Google Earth”.

7 Click on the downloaded file in KML format (COVERAGE.KML). It Should open

the Google Earth program showing the measurement data over a 3D map.

5.11 Datalogger

5.11.1 Description

The Datalogger function stores automatically measurements in a file set by the

user (name, channel plan). User can store for each datalogger measurements
taken at different test points of the selected installation. Measurements are
made for all channels in the active channel plan, both analogue and digital. Each
installation has its own datalogger files.

As an example, you can picture the Installation folder as a folder that includes
all the measurements of a building. Within the installation folder the datalogger
sub-folders would group the measurements for each apartment inside that
building. Finally the test points would be the files with the measurements that
would be taken in each one of the TV sockets inside the apartment.

S
C
Datalogger
A
N

November 2023 125 Chapter 5: TOOLS

 5.11.2 Operation

► Creating a new datalogger

1 First select one installation of the list of installations and load it pressing
the "Load" key . An installation contains the channel plans and DiSEqC
commands selected by the user and it stores dataloggers and screenshots
when it is selected (for more information refer to “Installation Management”
on page 204).

2 Check that your installation has beenis selected. The name of the installation
should appear on the upper left corner of the screen.

3 Press the : Tools key.

4 Press on the "Datalogger" option.

5 It displays a menu with the "New ...", "Test & Go" option and a list of all
dataloggers at the selected installation.

6 Select "New ..." to create a new datalogger, select "Test & Go" to create a
quick datalogger (see next) or select the file name of an existing datalogger
(if the user want to save data on a specific datalogger already existing).

7 If "New ..." is selected, a installation wizard shows how to create a new

datalogger. Follow its instructions:

• Next: to move to the next screen.

• Previous: to move to the previous screen.
• Cancel: to cancel.

8 When creating a new datalogger through the wizard, the user can give a
name to the datalogger.

Chapter 5: TOOLS 126 November 2023

 Figure 84.
9 Next, the user can select the terrestrial and/or satellite channel plan to use
in the datalogger. The channel plans that are shown depends on the channel
plans available for the current installation.

Figure 85.

November 2023 127 Chapter 5: TOOLS

 Figure 86.

Figure 87.
10 In the next window, the user can select among some options:
 Capture service list during process: This option slows down the process
but provides more information about the services detected in the channel.
 Pause before changing channel plan: This option allows the user to enable
a pause between channel plans (the process stops until the user wants to
carry on).
 Skip Channels: This option skip channels that are below the values defined
in Preferences -> Measurement (for more details refer to “?Measurement
Options” on page 51).

Chapter 5: TOOLS 128 November 2023

  Include attenuation tests: This option allows the user to perform a
datalogger on the attenuation test, terrestrial or satellite (for more details
refer to “Attenuation Test” on page 104).

11 At the last step, user can select to open the just created new datalogger (by
default, this option is selected).

12 Once a new datalogger is created or selected an already existing one, it

shows the datalogger viewer screen and measurements of test points can
start.

13 If it is a new datalogger, in first place before starting the datalogger, the

system will create a new test point (see next section). Test points represent
a specific point such a TV antenna socket.

► Starting a datalogger

1 After creating a new datalogger file or selecting an existing one, the user can
start the datalogging process.

2 From the datalogger viewer screen, press the "Test point" key and from
the menu select an existing test point using the "Jump to..." option or
"Create new..." to create a new test point. If a new test point is created, user
has to give it a name.

Figure 88.
3 Now datalogger is ready to start. Press the key and "Start". The
datalogger process starts, during which all the measurements of all channels
that are part of the datalogger and also the attenuation test are saved.

November 2023 129 Chapter 5: TOOLS

 4 During datalogger, it catches the list of available services of all channels in
the channel plan that are part of the datalogger (if this option was selected
when creating the datalogger or if the "Datalogger PSI" option is enabled in
the Preferences menu). If there is a change of channel plan during
datalogger there will be a pause (if this option was selected when creating
the datalogger). User can pause and resume the datalogger process at any
time by pressing on the key "Pause" . If the "Attenuation Test" option was
included when creating the datalogger, these measures will also saved.

5 At the end it saves the data and allows watching the results on screen by
channel plan/attenuation test. To change the view of channel plan or
attenuation test data press on the key. Data about terrestrial and satellite
attenuation will appear as the option TER ICT and SAT ICT respectively.

6 It is also possible to download Datalogger files to a PC by the NetUpdate

software (free download on the PROMAX website). Once downloaded, the
program can generate reports with these files. This is not possible with the
datalogger files exported directly to a USB (without using NetUpdate).
Information of Service lists is in the XML files downloaded to the PC.

NOTE: To make a datalogger with the Field Strength tool, in first place user has
to enable the field strength tool, and then to create a new datalogger file.
The field strength data will be stored in this datalogger.

► Screen Description (Datalogger)

Figure 89.
1 Selected installation; date and time.
2 Current datalogger name.

Chapter 5: TOOLS 130 November 2023

 3 Selected band; battery level.
4 Exploring the spectrum in real time.
5 Level/Power, C/N ratio, MER, time remaining to identify a channel, elapsed
time since the start of the channel identification.
6 Softkey menus.
7 Current channel plan, progress bar in the current channel plan, selected test
point.
8 Channel, frequency and Downlink.

►Screen Description (Data Viewer)

Figure 90. Channel Plan Data Viewer.

November 2023 131 Chapter 5: TOOLS

 Figure 91. Attenuation Test Data Viewer.
1 Selected installation; date and time.
2 Tab identifying the displayed test point.
3 Current datalogger name.
4 Selected band; battery level.
5 Tab identifying each test point.
6 Date and time when the datalogger was created. Number of channels locked
(PASS) or not locked (FAIL).
7 Data table with measurement data for each channel. In order from left to
right: Colour identifying if the channel has been locked (WHITE) or not locked
(RED) channel; signal type; power/level; BER; MER; Link Margin. Move the
joystick up or down to navigate along the measurement data. Press the
joystick on a channel to display more signal parameters (Carrier/Noise (C/N)
rate, etc.).

NOTE: When performing a datalogger for a DVB-T2 signal, the channel field will
show channel name, profile and layer (PLP). This is show by letter “B”
which stands for Base profile or “L” for Lite profile. The number indicates
the amount of PLP.

8 Softkey menus.
9 Table with the measurement data for each pilot signal in the attenuation test.
In order from left to right: number of pilot signal, pilot signal frequency,
maximum attenuation allowed, reference level value, level value at the test
point, error and signal status.

Chapter 5: TOOLS 132 November 2023

 5.11.3 Menu Options

► Data Viewer Menu

 It starts the datalogger in the selected test point.

 It clears all the acquired data.

 It displays a menu with the available channel plans to select the

channel plan whose data want to be displayed. Channel plans available
are those that have been selected during the creation of the datalogger.

 It contains four options:

•Jump to:It allows selecting a test point.
•Create New...:It creates a new test point.
•Delete Current:It deletes the current test point.
•Delete All:It deletes all test points of the datalogger.

► Datalogger Menu Options

 It cancels the datalogger.

 It pauses datalogger until the user resumes by pressing again.

5.11.4 Test & Go

"Test & Go" function inside the "Datalogger" tool allows the user to create a
quick datalogger by creating automatically a new datalogger, a new test point
and then starting it.

Datalogger parameters are set automatically based on:

 File name: DL [current band - terrestrial or satellite][consecutive

number].
 Channel plan: Current channel plan selected in the equipment.
 Test point: PM01.
 No capture of services list.

November 2023 133 Chapter 5: TOOLS

 If "Test & Go" is performed when using the "Attenuation test" tool, then the
datalogger created will be specific to save attenuation test data.

5.12 Screen and Data Capture (Export key)

5.12.1 Description

The Screen and Data Capture function captures what is displaying on screen at
the moment. The capture can be an image, measurement data or both. This is
set through the Preferences menu ("Export button" option).

Data capture is saved in a XML file with all data, measurements and text, that
is on screen at this time. The image is saved in a PNG file.

Captures can be displayed on the equipment or also can be downloaded and

displayed through an external software.

S
C
Spectrum footprint
A
N

5.12.2 Operation

► Settings

1 Press the "Management Installation" key for one second to enter

“Preferences" menu.

2 Go to the label "Tools" and select your option in "Export button". There are
three options available: Screen Only, Data Only or Screen+Data. "Screen
Only" saves the screen image in PNG format. "Data Only" saves
measurement data on screen in a XML file format. "Screen + Data" saves
both screen and data.

3 Once selected, press to save changes and to exit "Preferences".

► Capture

1 Press the Export key for one second when on screen appears the screen
to be captured. The LED next to key lights.

2 A progress bar shows the progress of the capture process. When finished,
the screen is captured and the LED is OFF.

Chapter 5: TOOLS 134 November 2023

 3 Then the virtual keyboard appears with the default name assigned to the file.
The filename for the screen capture is automatically generated with the
following code: capture mode (SP for Spectrum mode, TV for TV mode, ME
for Measurement mode), capture channel (CHXX) and a consecutive
number.

4 Edit the name if necessary (see section "Virtual keyboard"). Then press :
OK to end the capture or : Cancel for cancellation.

► Display

1 To display the screen captured press on the Installations Management key

.

2 Select the installation where the capture was done and press Manage.

3 Press Filter by type. Select “Screen Shots” or "Data Captures" option. This
shortens the list to the selected option.

4 It appears a list of all the captures.

5 Move up or down to find the file to be displayed.

6 Leave the cursor on the file to be displayed. It appears a progress bar that
lasts a few seconds, depending on the size. Then the capture appears.

7 To see the capture in full screen just press the Options key and then on
the menu press "View in Full Screen". To exit the full screen view press any
softkey.

8 To delete or copy the capture to a USB stick, select the capture by pressing
the joystick, and then select the appropriate option from the menu : File.

9 Captures can also be displayed on a PC, by downloading the whole

installation file using the NetUpdate software (see the NetUpdate manual for
more information).

5.13 Explore Channel Plan

5.13.1 Description

The Explore Channel Plan function performs a scan of the selected channel plan.
It detects where active signals are in a channel plan and in which channels of

November 2023 135 Chapter 5: TOOLS

 the current channel plan signal is received. With this information it explores
these channels with signal, looking for any broadcast and identifying them.

S
C
Explore channel plan
A
N

5.13.2 Operation

The Explore Channel plan function is available for all signals.

1 Connect the RF input signal to the equipment.

2 Access Preferences by pressing the Installations key for 1s.

3 At the 'Measures' tab check the minimum values for the signal to be
identified during the scan (for more information refer to section: Preferences
-> Measures options).

4 Press the Tools key .

5 Select the Explore Channel Plan option.

6 The first screen of Explore Channel Plan appears.

Figure 92.
7 After the exploration the following screen appears:

Chapter 5: TOOLS 136 November 2023

 ► Screen Description

Figure 93.
1 Spectrum and Measurement: It shows the cursor scrolling through each of
the channels of the channel plan. On the bottom of the screen the channel
and frequency appears next to the Power/Level and the C/N ratio.
2 Progress Bar: It shows the signal type detected and the scan progress in real
time. At the end a box shows a message informing the exploration process
has finished.
3 Channel plan: At the end of the process it shows the channels that have been
detected during the channel plan exploration. In parentheses shows the
number of detected channels to total channels of the channel plan. When
moving the cursor through the channels, the spectrum and measurement
windows are dynamically updated for the selected channel. It allows you to
select/unselect channels to save them as a new channel plan.

5.13.3 Menu Options

At the bottom are the function keys. They are detailed below.

 Cancel (during the process): EThis option appears only while

performing the exploration process. It cancels the exploration before
finish. When pressing, a confirmation message appears before cancelling.

 Save (at the end of the process): This option appears at the end of
the exploration process. It saves the results obtained during the

November 2023 137 Chapter 5: TOOLS

 exploration as a new channel plan. The name of the original channel plan
is assigned to the new one by default and the user can modify the name
using the virtual keyboard that appears prior to saving. Each channel
takes its name from the service name extracted from RDS data. The new
channel plan is now available in the list of channel plans in the installation
and can be used as any other channel plan. After saving it becomes the
selected channel plan to work with.

 Skip (during the process): This option allows skipping the current
channel and explore the next one in the channel plan.

 Discard (at the end of the process): This option appears at the end
of the exploration process. It discards the results obtained from the
exploration.

5.14 Discover FM Stations

5.14.1 Description

The Discover FM Stations tool scans the FM band and creates a FM channel plan
from scratch. Scanned frequency range is from 87 to 108 MHz.

S
C
Discover FM stations
A
N

5.14.2 Operation

To scan the FM band:

1 Connect the RF input signal to the equipment.

2 Press the Tools key .

3 Select the Discover FM Stations option.

4 The first screen of Channel Plan Exploration appears and the exploration
starts.

Chapter 5: TOOLS 138 November 2023

 Figure 94.
5 After the exploration the following screen appears:

► Screen Description

Figure 95.
1 Spectrum and Measurement: It shows the cursor scrolling through each of
the channels of the FM band. On the bottom of the screen the channel and
frequency appears next to the Power/Level and the C/N ratio. In the
spectrum area there is the Minimum FM Level. This line is the minimum signal
level required to identify the FM signal. The channels below that signal level

November 2023 139 Chapter 5: TOOLS

 will not be identified. It can be configured in the "Measures" tab in
"Preferences" .
2 Progress Bar: It shows the signal type detected and the scan progress in real
time. At the end a box shows a message informing the exploration process
has finished.
3 Channel Plan: It shows a list with the channels being detected during the
exploration of the FM band. At the top and between parentheses there is the
number of detected channels to total channels. When moving the cursor
through the channels, the spectrum and measurement windows are
dynamically updated for the selected channel. User can mark / unmark the
FM channels to save in the channel plan.

5.14.3 Menu Options

Function keys are detailed below:

 Cancel (during the process): This option appears only while

performing the exploration process. It cancels the exploration before
finish. When pressing, a confirmation message appears before cancelling.

 Save (at the end of the process): It appears at the end of the
exploration process. It saves the results obtained during the exploration.
It is assigned a name by default to the channel plan but the user can
modify the name using the virtual keyboard that appears prior to saving.
Each channel takes its name from the service name extracted from RDS
data (if available). The new channel plan is now available in the list of
channel plans in the installation and can be used as any other channel
plan. After saving it becomes the selected channel plan to work with.

 Skip (during the process): This option allows skipping the current
channel and explore the next one.

 Mark All (at the end of the process): This option marks all the
channels that appear on the channel list.

 Unmark All (at the end of the process): This option unmarks all the
channels that appear on the channel list.

Chapter 5: TOOLS 140 November 2023

  Discard (at the end of the process): This option appears at the end
of the exploration process. It discards the results obtained from the
exploration.

5.15 Field Strength

5.15.1 Description

The Field Strength function allows the equipment to work as a field strength
meter, measuring dBµV per meter. To perform this type of measurement is
needed to enter the calibration parameters of the antenna being used to receive
the signal.

S
C
Field strength
A
N

5.15.2 Operation

The Field Strength tool is available for all signals received by the RF input.

1 Connect the antenna to the RF input of the equipment.

2 Select a channel or frequency.

3 Press the Tools key.

4 Select the Field Strength option and in the drop down menu select On.

5 Select again the Field Strength option, now select the new option that
appears, called Configuration.

6 In the configuration window enter the antenna calibration parameters, by

hand or selecting one of the available antenna types (data of different
antenna types should be imported by the user. Refer to the following
section).

7 Now access the Spectrum Analyzer or Measurement mode to check the field
strength measure shown as FSM (dBµV/m). This measure replaces the
power.

November 2023 141 Chapter 5: TOOLS

 Figure 96.
8 To save FSM data, go to "Tools", select "Datalogger" and then "New" to
create a new datalogger. Keep in mind that the "FSM" tool does not
demodulate any signal, it only detects the transmitted energy, so it is
identied as a GENERIC signal. For this reason only FSM data is saved for each
channel (for more details refer to “Datalogger” on page 125).

9 Once finished, return to the Tools menu and in the Field Strength
option select Off.

NOTE: Some tools (Constellation, Echoes, MER by carrier, Merogram...) are

disabled when the Field Strength option is enabled. Remember to turn
off "FSM" option if you want to use these other tools.

5.15.3 Settings

The Field Strength configuration option allows the user to enter the correction
factors for the antenna and cable used when measuring the field strength.

Chapter 5: TOOLS 142 November 2023

 Figure 97.
Data fields to be filled are:

► Antenna:

 Type: In this box the user must select the type of antenna between
manual and any other type of antenna available. If you select the manual
antenna, you must enter the correction factor by hand. If you select an
antenna type then the correction factors associated with each frequency
are applied. These data are defined in the antenna file imported by the
user (refer to next section to know how import antenna data).
 Factor: This is the correction factor (K) for the antenna at the
measurement frequency.
 Detector Type: (PEAK/RMS). It allows the user to select between
maximum PEAK detector or RMS detector. The maximum peak detector is
mainly used for analogue modulated signals, while the RMS option is the
right choice for digital modulated signals.

► Cable

 Type: In this box the user must select the type of antenna between
manual and any other type of cable available. If you select the manual
cable, you must enter cable loss by hand.
 Loss (dB): In this box the user must enter the estimated loss for the cable
used to connect to the antenna.

At the bottom of the configuration window you can see the field strength in real
time according to the current frequency and correction factors.

5.15.4 Creating and Importing Calibration Tables

The user can import the antenna calibration data obtained from the
manufacturer. There is a template (available on the download area at PROMAX

November 2023 143 Chapter 5: TOOLS

 website) that can be filled and imported into the equipment (this template has
been created in an Excel file; the procedure explained below only works for the
Excel 2007 version and above).

Figure 98.
Next are the steps to fill in the template data and import them to the equipment:

► Antenna Generator

1 Download the "Antenna XML Generator" template from the PROMAX website.

2 In the "Model" box enter the name by which the antenna will be identified
(maximum 8 characters).

3 In the "Description" box, type a description to identify the antenna.

4 In the "Impedance" box select the impedance of the antenna between 50

and 75 ohms.

5 In the "Height" box enter the antenna height in meters.

6 Now fill the calibration table of the antenna with the K factor according to
frequency.

7 Do not change units when filling the table.

8 Extend or contract the calibration table to the number of filled lines.

9 After filling the calibration table, go to option "Save As -> Other Formats.

10 In the window that appears, edit the file name in "File name".

Chapter 5: TOOLS 144 November 2023

 11 In the drop down menu "Save as type" select the "XML Data" option. Then
click "Save”.

12 If a warning message shows up, click "Continue".

13 Now the file is already generated with the selected name and the extension
"xml".

14 Now just import it to your equipment and load the calibration table of the
antenna in the installation.

► Import

1 Copy the generated file on a flash drive and connect it to the meter’s USB
port.

2 Press the Installation Manager key .

3 Press the Tools key .

4 Select "Import from USB" option.

5 The Import Files window appears. Select the generated file and press the
"Import" key.

6 Press the Installation Manager key , select the installation to which you
want to add the antenna calibration table and press the "Manage" key.

7 Press key: "Installation" and select the "Add Antenna" option.

8 Select the antenna to be added and OK.

9 The antenna calibration table is now added to the installation.

10 Now this antenna will be available in the type of antenna field in the
configuration menu of the "Field Strength" tool.

► Remove

1 Press the Installation manager key .

2 Press "Tools" key.

3 Select “Installed Antennas” option.

4 Check the antenna to remove.

5 Press : “Remove” key.

November 2023 145 Chapter 5: TOOLS

 5.16 Task Planner

5.16.1 Description

The Task Planner function allows the user to set-up a task list, selecting when
to start, a repetition rate and other parameters. The equipment can be switched
off after setting all parameters and it will wake-up, at the required time, to
perform the scheduled tasks.

S
C
Task planner
A
N

5.16.2 Operation

The Task Planner tool is available to run screenshots and dataloggers.

1 Press the Tools key.

2 Select the Task Planner option to access the Task Planner window that shows
a list of scheduled tasks. In the right column and next to each task there is
its status: if the date of the next execution appears then the task is pending;
if “finished” appears then the task has been executed; if nothing appears
then the task has not been scheduled.

Figure 99.
3 To add a new task press : Tasks and select the "Add" option. It deploys a
menu with three options: Capture, Datalogger and Monitoring.

Chapter 5: TOOLS 146 November 2023

 Figure 100.
4 The "Capture" option performs the capture task. The user can select the
screen and type of capture. The screen options include any view in the three
modes: Measurement, Spectrum or TV. The options for type of capture are:
screen only, data only or screen+data (for more details refer to “Screen and
Data Capture (Export key)” on page 134).

Figure 101.
5 The "Datalogger" option performs the datalogger task. The user must first
select the datalogger from those available for the current installation. If
there not any datalooger task available the user must create one (for more
details refer to “Datalogger” on page 125).

November 2023 147 Chapter 5: TOOLS

 6 The "Monitoring" option performs a monitoring task. The user must first
select the monitoring from those available for the current installation and its
duration (days, hours and minutes). If there is not any monitoring task
available the user must create one using the webControl program (for more
details refer to “Signal Quality Monitoring” on page 220).

7 After selecting the type of task, check the box next to it and press :Timer
to schedule the time to execute the task (for more details refer to next
section).

8 When saving the timer for the task, the upper right corner shows an icon of
a clock indicating that the equipment has tasks pending to execute.

Figure 102.
9 To change any parameter of the task, check the box next to the task and
press : Parameters.

10 To delete a task, check the box next to it and in :Tasks, press "Delete".

11 After setting up the tasks press : Exit. Since this moment the timer for
task execution starts.

12 When the task is finished, the user can access the data through "Go to file
..." option in : Tasks. It will take you directly to the management
installation window where the data for each installation are stored.

13 Once the task is completed, user can access a short log for each
programmed task, just to know if each task has been successfully completed

Chapter 5: TOOLS 148 November 2023

 or to indicate if something prevented its execution. To access this function,
from Task Manager, press : Task and then "View Log...".

NOTE: The equipment can be turned off after task planning as it will
automatically turn on when the time to task execution comes.

Two tasks cannot be executed simultaneously.

It is recommended that the datalogger selected have not enabled the

option to pause between channel plans, since in that case the process
would stop during the execution of the task.

The filename for the screen capture is automatically generated with the
following code: capture mode (SP for Spectrum mode, TV for TV mode,
ME for Measurement mode), capture channel (CHXX) and a consecutive
number.

5.16.3 Timer

The timer window contains several options for task scheduling.

Figure 103.
 Start
•Start Now: The task begins immediately after leaving the task planner.
•On Date: The user selects the start date for the task (day / month / year)
and time (hour: minute).
 Repeat every: The task repeats each cycle of time (days, hours and
minutes).

November 2023 149 Chapter 5: TOOLS

  Stop
•Manual: The user finishes the task.
•On date: The user selects the stop date for the task (day / month / year)
and (hour: minute).
•Repeat a number of times: The task execution ends after the number of
times set.
 Turn off after execution: By checking this option, the equipment turns off
after the execution of the task.

5.17 Transport Stream Analyzer

5.17.1 Description

The Transport Stream Analyzer function allows the user to make a

comprehensive analysis of the Transport Stream (TS) contained in a tuned
signal. This function works for both standards DVB and ISDB-T with differences
that are explained next.

► DVB

The signal can be received through any of the equipment inputs: TS -IN, RF, IP,
CAM module and terrestrial and satellite demodulators. This feature gives a
great flexibility to process the signal in multiple ways, so the equipment
becomes a portable laboratory for the analysis of digital signal.

S
C
Transport Stream analyzer
A
N

This tool can be of great interest to research centres, broadcasting operators,

universities or training centres as well as to installers that want to expand their
technical knowledge or training in analysing the smallest unit of a digital signal
transmission.

This tool has these main functions:

 Tables: It shows all the metadata carried in the corresponding PSI/SI

tables in a tree diagram so user can deploy its content to the detail.
 Bitrates: It shows the bitrate information for each program in real time, in
a graphical way and also shows the percentage contribution of each one to
the total TS.
 Alarms: It shows a list of alarms that warn about any possible failure in
the TS layer according to the three priority levels described in the TR 101
290 measurement guidelines by the DVB group.

Chapter 5: TOOLS 150 November 2023

  PID List: It shows an ordered PID list with a short explanation of its
contents. PID bitrate is refreshed continuously to help in understand
bandwidth usage.

 T2MI*: It shows all the metadata carried in the corresponding T2MI tables
in a tree diagram so user can deploy its content to the detail.

► ISDB-T

BTS (Broadcast Transport Stream) is the stream used by the ISDB-T standard.
To detect this stream, the signal should be received through TS-IN, RF and
terrestrial demodulators.

This tool can do these functions:

 Tables: It captures DVB tables and also the BIT (Broadcaster Information
Table).
 Services: It captures and shows the services list and any service can be
played.
 Bitrates: It shows the bitrate information for each program in real time, in
a graphical way and also shows the percentage contribution of each one to
the total TS and the total bitrate for null packets.
 Alarms: It shows a list of alarms that warn about any possible failure in
the TS layer according to the three priority levels described in the TR 101
290 measurement guidelines by the DVB group. Alarms defined by the
ISDB-T standard are not shown.

5.17.2 Operation

The Transport Streams (TS) Analyzer tool is available for all DIGITAL signals.

1 Connect the digital signal to any input of the equipment.

2 Select the channel or frequency and tune the signal.

3 Press the Tools key .

4 Select the TS Analyzer option.

5 A drop down menu appears with these options: Tables, Bitrates, Alarms, PID
list and T2MI. Select your option.

6 While starting, the TS Analyzer takes few seconds to detect and identify the
TS signal (it shows the table capture process on screen), and then the results
appear.

*. not available for RANGER Neo 2

November 2023 151 Chapter 5: TOOLS

 7 An error message pops up if the signal does not contain any TS or if the TS
cannot be found. In this case, check the signal. If the user cancels the table
capture process, no data about the TS will appear. Then select “Restart
analysis” on F4 to try capture the TS again.

The following describes in detail each one of these functions.

5.17.3 Table Analyzer

► Description

This function displays the TS tables. When system starts it shows the table
capture process. When it finishes tables are shown in a tree diagram for easy
browsing with the joystick. All components and contents of tables can be
consulted by deploying the nodes. So the user can analyse the tables and see in
detail what is being transmitted and if the information is properly encapsulated.
This tool requires detailed knowledge about the contents of these tables.

► Screen Description

Figure 104.
1 Selected installation; date and time.

Chapter 5: TOOLS 152 November 2023

 2 Selected function.
3 Selected band; battery level.
4 Main Table Tree.
5 Detail Table Tree.
6 Signal status (searching/locked/multiplex name).
7 Softkey menus.

•Advanced : It shows the "Restart Analysis" option which makes a new

detection and updating of the TS tables.
Joystick functions:
•Joystick left/right: It changes between Main menu tree and Detail menu
tree.
•Joystick up/down: It moves along the tables in the tree.
•Joystick press: Pressing on a node with the symbol it deploys the tree.
Pressing on a node with the symbol it closes the tree.

► Tables Description

Below is a brief explanation of the main tables that can appear in the detection
of a TS. For more details we recommend to consult guidelines ETSI TR 101 211.

There are two generic groups of tables:

 PSI (Program Specific Information) Tables: These tables are specified by

the MPEG-2 standard worldwide. They are used by all the digital
transmission standards. The TS analyzer detects all the PSI tables.
 SI (Service Information) Tables: These tables are specified by the
standard used in the area or country (in this case DVB). These tables are
more detailed and imply a higher level of information relating to the PSI
tables. The TS analyzer detects the most important SI tables. The PID
(Packet Identification) code next to the name of the table is a 13-bit code
that identifies each packet type and therefore to what kind of table
corresponds.

► PSI Tables

PSI tables are:

 PAT (Program Association Table): It is a master table that lists all services
found in the TS being transmitted. It also points the table where are
specified each one of the services.
 PMT (Program Map Table): It is a table that identifies all the components
within a service (video, audio and/or data).

November 2023 153 Chapter 5: TOOLS

  NIT (Network Information Table): Optional table with information about
TS and multiplex of a given network. The content in detail is described in
the tables used by the digital standard (DVB in this case).
 CAT (Conditional Access Table): Table that controls the scrambling of a
service.

► SI Tables

Most important SI tables are:

 NIT (Network Information Table): It is a master table used by the

broadcasting network to manage the services. It provides logic network
info by grouping several TS together and adding tuning information for all
network services. In the case of a satellite provides information about its
channels. It also contains the LCN descriptor that provides information to
order the services.
 BAT (Bouquet Association Table): It is a table containing information
required to group a set of services or content, which is related for
commercial reasons (packs of a particular distribution platform, packs of a
particular film genre or sport, etc.).
 SDT (Service Description Table): It is a table with a description of each
service, providing a service name and other related information such as
head-end and service details, if it is scrambled or not, if it is radio or tv,
the provider, etc.
 EIT (Event Information Table): Table that provides information on events
(program or programs being broadcasted) in a given service. It is the
basis for building an EPG (Electronic Program Name), the program guide
shown on TV.
 TDT (Time and Date Table): Table that provides UTC (Universal Time
Coordinated) coded as MJD (Modified Julian Date) that means, time and
date at the current moment and universal.
 TOT (Time Offset Table): Table that provides the time offset related to
UTC in order to calculate the local time. It also provides information on
daylight saving time changes.

5.17.4 Bitrate Analyzer

► Description

This function shows the TS bitrate in a graphical way, and also by numbers and
percentage. A pie graph, which is updated in real time, shows the evolution of
the bitrate distribution for each one of the services in the tuned multiplex. It also
allows selecting any of the services to check its composition, which is also shown
in bar graph.

Chapter 5: TOOLS 154 November 2023

 This function allows the user to compare between television services and to
check the bitrate used by each one. User can observe dynamically the variation
that when changing the transmission content. Another use may be to identify
the amount of null packets and therefore to know the amount of available
payload by the multiplex.

► Screen Description

Figure 105.
1 Selected installation; date and time.
2 Selected function.
3 Selected band; Battery level.
4 Pie Chart. The graph represents and shows the percentage of each service on
the total bitrate for the tuned channel. The colours of the graph correspond
to the services detected. They are shown on the right side of the screen.
Services with a very low percentage are grouped with the legend "Others".
5 Detected services. It shows all the services identified in the tuned multiplex
and the percentage of each service relating to the total bitrate.
6 Detail of the Selected Service: Service name and percentage related to the
total bitrate (bitrate/total bitrate).
7 Bar graph representing the bitrate percentage for each component (video,
audio, data).
8 Video bitrate, audio and data.

November 2023 155 Chapter 5: TOOLS

 9 Softkey menus.

•Advanced : It shows the "Restart Analysis" option which makes a new

detection and updating of the TS tables.
Joystick functions:
•Joystick up/down: It moves among detected services.
•Joystick press: Pressing on a service it will show details of the selected
service.

5.17.5 Alarms

► Description

This tool monitors the TS. It is a dynamic tool as it displays in real time the
evolution of the TS and the alarms that may occur. The priority levels of alarms
are set according to the recommendations by technical standards TR 101 290.

Each alarm has a log where events are stored. These data can be exported.

► Main Screen Description

Figure 106.
1 Selected installation; date and time.

Chapter 5: TOOLS 156 November 2023

 2 Selected function.
3 Selected band; Battery level.
4 Priority 1: High level security parameters. These are alarms that make the
TS vulnerable and avoid them to be received. The parameters at this level
must be correct for the TS to be decoded. If any of these parameters fails the
information cannot be recovered and therefore the signal cannot be decoded.
5 Priority 2: Medium level security parameters. These are alarms
recommended by DVB for continuous or periodic monitoring of TS and ensure
quality of transmission parameters. The alarm in any of these parameters
does not prevent the receiving but it is indicative of a possible problem.
6 Priority 3: Low level security parameters. These are parameters that are not
harmful but are required for getting the most from the receiver capabilities.
They ensure that the receiver can extract in the best conditions the TS
information especially when there are additional features such as the
program guide or the services list.
7 Signal status (searching/locked/multiplex name).
8 Softkey menus.

•Advanced :It shows the "Restart Analysis" option which makes a new
detection and updating of the TS tables.
Joystick functions:
•Joystick up/down: It moves among alarms and highlights one on blue
background.
•Joystick press: When you press on an alarm, it gives access to the alarm
log.

Icons that appear according to the alarm type are:

 OK.

 Warning.

 Error.

► Alarm Log Screen Description

To access the alarm log screen, press on the alarm to access its log screen.

November 2023 157 Chapter 5: TOOLS

 Figure 107.
The "Log" tab shows the alarm log data.

The "Description" tab shows a description of the alarm.

The "Settings" tab shows the following settings options:

 Enable this alarm: When this box is checked the alarm is enabled.
 Notify on error: It enables or disables the alarm warnings. If it is enabled
it will notify the alarm status on screen.
 Log Size: It allows the user to select the number of events stored (10, 25
or 50).
 Order of events: Select the order for keeping the events between keeping
the first or the last ones.

To export the alarm log connect an USB memory to the equipment and press
: Export. Data is exported into a plain text file.

5.17.6 PID List

► Description

This tool shows an ordered PID list with a short explanation of each PID and its
bitrate. Bitrate is refreshed continuously to help in understand bandwidth usage.

Chapter 5: TOOLS 158 November 2023

 ► Screen Description

Figure 108.
1 Selected installation; date and time.
2 Selected function.
3 Selected band; Battery level.
4 PID, real-time bitrate and description.

5.17.7 T2MI*
*. not available for RANGER Neo 2

► Description

In DVB-T2 broadcast technology, the multiplexers are delivering one or more

MPEG-2 TS signals to a T2 Gateway. The T2 Gateway is assigning each MPEG-2
TS to a specific PLP (Physical Layer Pipe) and building up a more complex multi-
layered signal known as T2-MI (T2 Modulator Interface).

The T2-MI signal includes synchronization data for SFN broadcast and furnishes
the DVB-T2 modulators with modulation parameters setup for each PLP.

T2-MI is exclusively used in the link between the T2 Gateway output and the
DVB-T2 modulators input, and transported via either TS-ASI or IP.

November 2023 159 Chapter 5: TOOLS

 The equipment receives T2-MI through its TS-ASI, RF or IP (multicast) input,
letting the user record the T2-MI signal into a file and play out that file containing
the recorded T2-MI through the meter’s TS-ASI output.

Every type of T2-MI packet that has been found in the received stream is added
to a hierarchial tree view where user can navigate through all parameters.

► Screen Description

Figure 109.

Chapter 5: TOOLS 160 November 2023

 Figure 110.
1 Selected installation; date and time.
2 Selected function.
3 Selected band; battery level.
4 Main Table Tree.
5 Detail Table Tree.
6 Signal status (searching/locked/multiplex name/span).
7 Softkey menus.

•Advanced :It shows the “Restart Analysis” option wich makes a new
detection and updating of the TS tables. It also show the “Extract TS”
option which extracts and shows DVB-SI tables that belong to the MPEG-2
TS encapsulated in the PLP.
Joystick functions:
•Joystick left/right: It changes between Main menú tree and Detail menú
tree.
•Joystick up/down: It moves along the tables in the tree.
•Joystick press: : Pressing on a node with the symbol “+” it deploys the
tree. Pressing on a node with the symbol “-” it closes the tree.

November 2023 161 Chapter 5: TOOLS

 5.18 Transport Stream Recording

5.18.1 Description

The Transport Stream Recording function captures in real-time transport

streams received by any input (RF, ASI or IP) such as a DTT channel.

The TS recording can be stored in the internal memory or on an external USB

drive. Only the last recording stored in the internal memory can be played and
analyzed on the equipment itself as if it was a live received signal. The other
recordings can be exported or removed from the installation manager.

The recording time depends on the bitrate of the transport stream, but by
reference to a DVB-T signal of 19.9 Mbps, six minutes of transmission can be
stored.

S
C
Transport Stream recording
A
N

5.18.2 Operation

Transport Stream recording is available for all digital signals.

To access the Transport Stream recording tool:

1 Connect the signal to any of the equipment inputs.

2 Access the Settings menu and in the Source Signal option select between
RF or IPTV.

3 Access the Settings menu and in the Decoder TS Input select from where
comes the transport stream: RF/IPTV Demodulators or ASI Input.

4 Press : Tools and select the option TS Recording.

5 It shows the screen for TS recording / playback. Select where to save the TS
between internal memory or USB by Advanced menu .

6 Start recording by pressing the RECORD key . It shows an icon on the top
right corner that means it is recording. Even if you quit the TS Recording
screen it keeps recording.

7 If there is any problem during recording (too high bitrate; full memory) it
shows a message on screen.

Chapter 5: TOOLS 162 November 2023

 8 End recording by pressing the STOP key .

9 To play the recorded transport stream press the PLAY key . The TS keeps
playing even if you quit the TS Recording screen. To finish playing press on
the STOP key .

10 During the playback of the transport stream it can be analysed by the TS

Analyzer tool as if it was received live. All services encapsulated in the
transport stream are also available in the TV mode.

11 When playback ends verify that the “Decoder TS Input” option in the
Settings menu is properly set in order to receive the corresponding type
of signal.

NOTE: The equipment only can play and analyze the last transport stream
recorded. Also the transport stream bitrate must be equal or less than
44 Mbits/s and its size below 1 GB.

When not meeting these conditions, the transport stream is stored on the
internal memory but cannot be played or analyzed. To manage these
files use the Installations Manager (“Installation Management” on
page 204) where they can be exported to a USB or deleted.

The equipment can record TS at bitrate up to 66 Mbit/s. Between 44 and

66 Mbit/s can record the TS but not play it.

When playing a recorded TS, the “Decoder TS Input” option is

automatically selected as a “Recorded TS”. After playing it returns to its
previous state.

November 2023 163 Chapter 5: TOOLS

 ► Screen Description

Figure 111.
1 Selected installation; date and time.
2 Recording icon (if recording); Selected band; Battery level.
3 Recording / playback image.
4 Recording / Playback time elapsed.
5 Control Keys:

 : Recording.

 : Rewind.

 : Stop.

 : Forward.

 : Play.
6 File information window that reports about file duration, the recording date
and maximum bit rate.
7 This window reports about the recording source.
8 This window reports about available space and total space.
9 Softkey menus.

Chapter 5: TOOLS 164 November 2023

 Joystick functions:
•Joystick left/right: Navigation through the control keys.
•Joystick press: Start/Stop.

5.18.3 Menu Options

In the bottom of the screen are these options accessible via the softkeys.

 Exit: It exits the tool.

 Erase File: : It erases the internal memory dedicated to record

transport stream, prior a confirmation message.

 Export to USB:
•Start Copy: It starts to copy the TS to an USB if there is an USB is
connected.

 Advanced: There are two options:

•Play Loop: It allows you to enable the "Play Loop" option for playing the
recorded stream in an endless loop.
•Record onto: It allows to select where to save the TS between internal
memory or external USB memory.

5.19 Network Delay Margin*

*. not available for RANGER Neo 2

5.19.1 Description

The Network Delay Margin function shows time delay of the transport stream
from beginning to the final destiny.

All transmitters in a SFN (Single Frequency Network) must be synchronized.

Modulators at transmitters ensure that each bit of the transport stream is
emitted at exactly the same time. As the transport stream is sent to transmitters
located in different locations, usually via satellite-links or IP, they may arrive at
each destination with a variable delay. This delay is called the "network delay".

November 2023 165 Chapter 5: TOOLS

 5.19.2 Operation

The Network Delay function is available for all digital signals.

1 Connect the signal to be measured to the RF input.

2 Connect the synchronization signal to the 1PPS input.

3 Press the Tools key.

4 Select the Network Delay option.

5 The Network Delay screen shows up.

► Screen Description

Figure 112.
1 Network delay margin (difference between maximum acceptable network
delay and measured network delay).
2 Signal Detection Box: Transmission standard detected; Delay measured in
the network; Maximum acceptable delay in the network.
3 Signal Status Box: 1PPS (pulse per second) detected (check/ not check); CRC
(cyclic redundancy check) status (check/ not check); Synchronization
identifier.

Chapter 5: TOOLS 166 November 2023

 5.20 Shoulders Attenuation

5.20.1 Description

The Shoulders Attenuation function measures interferences in adjacent channels

that look like shoulders.

Broadcast signals such as DVB-T, DVB-T2, ISDB-T or ATSC are constructed to

follow strict RF requirements mostly aimed to ensure they occupy the bandwidth
they have been assigned and they do not interfere with any other adjacent
channels. In particular the shape of the signal spectrum must be within the limits
of certain given masks specified in the different corresponding standards, i.e.
ETR290 recommendations for DVB-T. The specific masks depend on the type of
signal and standard.

Due mainly to nonlinearities in the power amplifiers the output RF signal

contains unwanted band limit and out of band components, the shape of which
has given rise to the term “shoulder”, that tend to compromise the compliance
with the mask limits.

S
C
Shoulders attenuation
A
N

5.20.2 Operation

Shoulders attenuation tool is available for digital terrestrial signals.

1 Shoulder attenuation should be measured at the output of the power

amplifier right before sending the signal to the antenna through the net of
passive devices. Because of the power level typically available at that point
it is mandatory to use external power attenuators so that the level can be
adapted to the máximum accepted by the analyzer.

2 Connect the signal to be measured to the RF input and tune a digital channel
in terrestrial band.

3 Press the Tools key.

4 Select the Shoulders Attenuation option and the Shoulders Attenuation

screen shows up.

November 2023 167 Chapter 5: TOOLS

 ► Screen Description

Figure 113.
1 Frequency / tuned channel; Power; C/N; MER; CBER; VBER of pilot signal.
2 Channel spectrum showing shoulder attenuation delimited by two vertical red
markers. These markers delimit the area of calculation for Upper shoulder
attenuation and Lower shoulder attenuation. The Parameters window shows
the Resolution of the bandwidth.

5.21 Service Recording

5.21.1 Description

The Service Recording tool records in real-time one digital service from the
transport-steam received that is shown on screen. This service is saved directly
on the USB flash drive memory connected to the equipment. Afterwards that
record can be played on a PC with a video player.

S
C
Service recording
A
N

5.21.2 Operation

The Service Recording tool is available for all digital signals (except for DAB
digital radio services).

1 Connect the signal to the equipment input.

Chapter 5: TOOLS 168 November 2023

 2 Tune the channel and select the service to record.

3 Connect the adapter cable to the mini-USB port on the equipment and then
connect a USB memory.

4 Press the key : Tools and select the PVR option.

5 The screen to record the service appears.

6 Start the recording by pressing the RECORD key .

7 End the recording by pressing the STOP key .

8 The recording file is saved in the PVR folder created by the equipment in the
USB memory.

9 The file name is PVR plus a consecutive number and the file extension is TS.

10 The file can be played in a computer with a media player like VLC. This file
cannot be played from the meter itself.

► Screen Description

Figure 114.
1 Installation selected; date and time.
2 Icons from left to right: recording; USB connected; selected band; battery
level.
3 Recording Service.
4 Memory device where service is recorded: internal memory or USB

November 2023 169 Chapter 5: TOOLS

 5 Window with some information about recorded files such as name, size and
created date. It only shows files inside the memory device selected (internal
memory or USB).
6 Size of recording file and time duration.
7 Window with information about the service being recorded: recording length,
maximum bit rate, channel service recorded and free available memory.
8 Control keys:

 : Recording

 : Stop
9 Softkeys.

Joystick functions:
•Joystick left/right: Navigation between the control keys.

5.21.3 Menu Options

At the bottom there are the function keys. They are.

 Exit: Exits this function. If exits when it is recording it does not stop
the recording. To stop press stop key.

 Delete file: It deletes files selected on the recording files window

(after a warning message).

 Export to USB: It copies files selected to the USB.

 Advanced: It allows user to select between record on internal

memory or on USB.

5.22 Tilt

5.22.1 Description

The Tilt function displays on-screen, graphically and numerically, the difference
in level between any four carriers. This function works for upstream and
downstream band. Tilt is the difference in amplitudes between the minimum
and maximum frequency that the system can compensate.

Chapter 5: TOOLS 170 November 2023

 Typically, CATV networks transmit two pilot signals at the beginning and at the
end of the band. These signals are the ones that can be tuned simultaneously
on the screen. By this way you can evaluate the losses slope and therefore
readjust equalizers of the amplifiers in order to compensate these losses and
ensure a flat response along the band.

5.22.2 Operation

Tilt function is available for DVB-C and DVB-C2 signals.

1 Connect signal to input and check in Settings the source signal is RF and
band is terrestrial.

2 Press : Tools and select Tilt & Scan option. Then select Tilt option.

3 Tilt function opens.

4 Enter two pilot frequencies at the start of the band (freq 1 and freq 2) and
two pilot frequencies at the end of the band (freq 3 and freq 4).

5 Tilt appears on screen graphically and numerically.

6 Press Exit to quit this function.

► Screen Description

Figure 115.
1 Selected installation; date and time.
2 Icon area.

November 2023 171 Chapter 5: TOOLS

 3 Pilot frequencies 1 to 4 and power level of each one. These frequencies can
be selected by the user.
4 TILT value in dB/MHz and difference between pilot frequency 1 and pilot
frequency 4 in dB.
5 Graphic bar for each frequency pilot power and resulting TILT.
6 Softkeys.
•F1: Exits function.
•F3: Access other tools.
Joystick functions:
•Joystick up/down: Change of pilot frequency.

5.23 Scan

5.23.1 Description

The Scan function shows on screen the signal level in a graph bar for each one
of the channels in the channel plan.

5.23.2 Operation

The Scan function is available for all DVB-C and DVB-C2 signals.

1 Connect signal to input and check in Settings the source signal is RF and
band is terrestrial. Select channel plan and tune a channel.

2 Press : Tools and select Tilt & Scan option. Then select Scan option.

3 Scan function opens.

Chapter 5: TOOLS 172 November 2023

 ► Screen Description

Figure 116.
1 Selected installation; date and time.
2 Icon area.
3 Frequency and measurement for the selected channel.
4 Graphic bar of power for each channel in the selected channel plan. The
shadow area with a red arrowhead shows the selected channel. The system
tries to show all channels with no one reaching the reference level.
5 Softkeys.
•F1: Change of channel, channel plan or tune.
•F2: Parameters for the tuned signal.
•F3: Access tools.
Joystick functions:
•Joystick left/right: Change channel.

November 2023 173 Chapter 5: TOOLS

 5.24 Streaming V/A

5.24.1 Description

The Streaming V/A function broadcasts video/audio from the meter to a PC using
a data network.

5.24.2 Operation

The Streaming V/A function is available for all digital signals.

► Settings

1 Press "Installation management" key for one second to access the

“Preferences” settings.

2 Go to "Streaming V/A" tab and set streaming parameters:

 IP Address: It is the IP address of the computer where we are going to
broadcast in streaming from the meter.
 Port: Computer broadcasting IP port.

3 Once done, press to save changes and to quit "Preferences".

► Operation

1 Tune channel and service to broadcast in streaming.

2 Connect the Ethernet cable to meter using the IP CTRL port.

3 Press key : Tools.

4 Select Streaming V/A option. There are these options:

•Start TS: It starts streaming the complete Transport Stream (all services).
•Start Current Service: It starts streaming the selected service.
•Stop: It stops streaming.

5 The icon at the top right corner means streaming is working.

6 To watch streaming service from a computer you need a software that can
play this type of service, such as VLC multimedia player (free software).

7 In VLC, open “Media” from tool bar and select “Open Network Stream”.

Chapter 5: TOOLS 174 November 2023

 8 In the box “Enter a network URL” enter this text udp://@:1234 and press
on “Play”. “1234” is the port in the computer (see settings section). If
everything is right, it will play the service on the computer screen.

9 If you are streaming the whole TS, open “Playback” from toolbar and select
“Program”. It will show all available TS services. Select the service to watch
on screen.

10 To exit streaming, press : Tools, select “Streaming V/A” and then “Stop”.

November 2023 175 Chapter 5: TOOLS

6 WIFI MONITORING

6.1 Introduction

WiFi allows connectivity and communication among devices in the 2.4 GHz and
5 GHz frequency band. These bands are used by several technologies
simultaneously, such as Bluetooth, Wireless USB, Zigbee (used in Domotics),
cordless phones, security cameras, microwave ovens, etc. which may interfere
on WiFi devices. For this reason it is necessary to have a tool that can analyze
all these signals to detect problems and ensure good level in WiFi
communication.

S
C
WiFi measurement
A
N

On the panel side the equipment has two functions keys which give direct access
to two functions to display WiFi signal.

 MEASUREMENT : Access the “Site Survey” screen which shows all

access points (AP) and its characteristic parameters.

 SPECTRUM : Access the “WiFi Spectrum” screen which shows the

spectrum signal over WiFi channels and detected Access Points.

6.2 Operation

1 Connect the USB WiFi adapter (supplied) to one of the two USB ports on the
device. The "Wi-Fi Configuration" window pops up and it performs a Wi-Fi
scan showing all networks detected. The WiFi icon will appear at the top of
the screen. Press to exit because it is not necessary to log in a WiFi
network to use this tool.

2 Connect the RF omni-directional antenna (supplied) to the RF input. This

antenna detects WiFi band spectrum.

3 Press "Settings" key to access Settings menu. In "Signal Source" select

"WiFi".

4 Press "Settings" key again, access "Band" option and select a band from
available WiFi* bands.

5 The first screen is the “WiFi Spectrum” screen. This screen shows spectrum
and access points over channels in the selected band. This spectrum is traced

*. 5 GHz WiFi band available as an option.

Chapter 6: WIFI MONITORING 176 November 2023

 through signal coming from the RF input. So it shows any signal using this
band, not only WiFi signals (for more details refer to next section).

6 To display Access Points information, press Measurement key . Press

"Advanced" key for more details about access points (for more details
refer to next section).

7 To display the WiFi spectrum screen again press Spectrum key .

8 To start monitoring, select tuning mode wether to tune by access point (AP)
or channel (CH) using the "Tuning" menu (enabled tuning mode is shown
on joytstick icon). Then enter an access point or channel or navigate left /
right through the access points / channels. Define the workspace using the
span to focus on the desired APs.

9 To return to RF signal source press "Settings" key to access the Settings

menu and in "Signal Source" option select "RF".

6.3 WiFi Access Point Connect

To connect to a WiFi access point you need to log in that network. Configuration
window is available when the USB WiFi adapter is connected to the device. It
shows up right after is connected. It is also available as an option in "Tools"
menu .

WiFi settings are:

 Band*: Select the WiFi frequency band where to scan networks.

 DHCP: Enable this option to get automatically the proper IP address when
the unit is first connected to your network. This option works if your router
has enabled the DHCP protocol. Enable the DHCP protocol for proper IP
configuration. If DHCP is OFF you should enter data in next fields.
 IP Address: IP address of the meter into the local network.
 Mask: Subnet mask of the equipment (usually 255.255.255.0).
 Gateway: It allows the meter to get out from the local network (if the
network does not have gateway, use 0.0.0.0).

*. 5 GHz WiFi band available as an option.

November 2023 177 Chapter 6: WIFI MONITORING

 6.4 WiFi Spectrum

6.4.1 Description

This function shows spectrum on the WiFi band over access points and also data
and measurements such as power, identification and channel bandwidth. Set the
screen to clearly see each channel occupation.

With this function you can determine the occupation of each channel, how many
APs share the same spectrum and activity at any point on the spectrum.

All this information help user to determine the best place to place the AP or to
analyze interferences on the spectrum.

To display the WiFi spectrum screen from the WiFi tuning mode, press the
Spectrum key .

6.4.2 Screen Description

Figure 117.
1 Measurement
 CH:
-When tuning by Access Point it shows the central channel for the Access
Point selected. The Access Point selected is highlighted for easy
identification.

Chapter 6: WIFI MONITORING 178 November 2023

 -When tuning by Channel it shows current channel. If selected channel is
the central channel of an Access Point then the AP is highlighted and
shows data for that Access Point.
 BW: It shows Access Point (AP) bandwidth. Bandwidth changes depending
on the AP. Each AP can work in different bandwidths depending on
standard and configuration.
 AvPower: RMS value of power detected (dBm) in the bandwidth occupied
by the AP or channel selected.
 MaxPower: Maximum power detected (dBm) within the bandwidth
occupied by the AP or channel selected.
 N.AP: Number of access points using the same channel. This number
determines if the channel is very saturated. If it is used by more than one
AP there may be times with a high percentage of use.
 UTIL (%): Percentage of channel used. It is a measurement based on how
much time the channel is used. This measurement can help to decide if
this channel can accept another AP.
 RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indicator): Power measured by the dongle
(USB WiFi adapter) for the selected Access Point. The dongle measures
the power of a single AP and the meter measures the power of an area of
the spectrum where there may be several APs. For this reason and also for
using different type of antennas on each device, the power measured by
the dongle and by the spectrum may not match.
 SNR (Signal to Noise Ratio): SNR measured by the dongle (USB WiFi
adapter) for the selected Access Point.

2 WiFi Spectrum

It shows WiFi channels within the WiFi band, Access Points detected and name,
bandwidth and spectrum. Spectrum is drawn from the signal received by the
omni-directional antenna connected to the RF input.

This screen allows you to know how busy each channel is, how many APs share
spectrum, activity in each point of spectrum, etc. Spectrum not only shows WiFi
signals but any signals that use this band, such as those coming from security
video cameras, etc. which allows you to easily identify interferences in a
network.

November 2023 179 Chapter 6: WIFI MONITORING

 Joystick functions:
•Joystick press: It changes mode.
-In tuning by Access Point: (-> AP -> SP ->).
-In tuning by Channel: (-> CH -> SP ->).
•Joystick left/right:
-In AP mode: It changes Access Point.
-In CH mode: It changes WiFi channel.
-In SP mode: It changes span.
•Joystick up/down: It changes reference level.

6.4.3 Menu Options

► Tuning Menu

Press to access this menu. It has some options to tune a channel or an access
point. Tuning menu has these options:

 Channel: It allows you to select the channel to tune. After pressing it

shows available channels to select.
 Channel Plan: This option allows the user to select a channel plan from the
ones available for the current installation. It is necessary a Channel Plan
to work on WiFi band. Load a WiFi channel plan if your installation does
not have any (WIFI_2_4GHZ is available by default).
 Tune by: It allows the user to select between tuning by channel or tuning
by access point.
-Tuning by channel: It allows you to select a channel or jump from
channel to channel by pressing left / right. When the channel corresponds
to an Access Point central channel, the AP highlights and shows some
information on screen (RSSI and SNR).
-Tuning by AP: It allows you to select a AP or jump from AP to AP by
pressing left / right. The selected AP highlights and shows some
information on screen (RSSI and SNR).
 Reference Level: It allows you to edit the reference level. The reference
level is the power range represented on the vertical axis. Reference level
can also be change using joystick up/down.
 Span: It allows you to edit the span, which is the frequency range
displayed on screen. Span can also be change using joystick lefit/right in
SP mode.
 Center Tuned Frequency: When selecting this option, the channel / Access
Point tuned (where the main cursor is pointing) is placed at center of the
screen. This option does not work with FULL span.

Chapter 6: WIFI MONITORING 180 November 2023

 ► Advanced Menu

Press to access this menu. It has some options to display the spectrum.

 Persistence samples: It allows you to set retentive depth of spectrum. This

option helps to identify level of channel usage by non-wireless signals
such as those generated by microwave ovens or some wireless video
cameras. The more presence of this type of signals in the channel, the
brighter the spectrum will appear on screen.
 Resolution Bandwidth: Resolution filters available are: 10 kHz, 20 kHz, 30
kHz, 40 kHz, 100 kHz, 200 kHz and 1000 kHz. According to the filter being
selected, that maximum and minimum span allowed is modified.
 Vertical Range: It allows you to adjust vertical range on screen. Available
values are 1, 2, 5 and 10 dB per division.

6.5 Site Survey

6.5.1 Description

This function shows a chart listing all Access Points detected and its main
parameters.

To display the Site Survey screen from the WiFi tuning mode, press the
Measurement key .

To display a detailed report about a selected Access Point, select one and press
F4: Advanced \ View all parameters.

November 2023 181 Chapter 6: WIFI MONITORING

 6.5.2 Screen Description

► Access Points at Site Survey

Figure 118.
 SSID (Service Set ID): Access Point Name.
 BSS (Basic Service Set ID): MAC of Access Point.
 CH: Central Channel of Access Point.
 RSSI: Power (in dBm) of AP received. This power is measured by the USB
WiFi adapter.
 Security: Type of security to access the Access Point.
 Device: Name of device’s manufacturer that provides infrastructure. Not
always available.
Joystick functions:
•Joystick up / down: It changes Access Point.

Chapter 6: WIFI MONITORING 182 November 2023

 ► Access Point Report

Figure 119.

Joystick functions:
•Joystick up / down: It scrolls along the report.

6.5.3 Menu Options

► From Site Survey screen:

 Advanced Menu .
•View all parameters: It shows a detailed report about the access point
selected.

► From Access Point Report screen:

 Exit : Returns to the previous screen.

 Options .
•Copy to USB: If you insert a USB memory into a USB port you can copy
the Access point report.

 Page Up / Page Down ( / ): It scrolls through the report.

November 2023 183 Chapter 6: WIFI MONITORING

7 IPTV

7.1 Introduction

IPTV stands for TV over IP networks. It actually means TV over any type of IP
packet based distribution network. They can be referred to as LAN (Local Area
Network), ethernet, computer networks, etc. With the growth of LAN based TV
distribution systems, having an IPTV input in your field strength meter becomes
a handy feature.

The equipment allows you to receive television programmes coming from IPTV
networks. The multicast IPTV stream should carry MPTS or SPTS in order to be
analyzed and decoded. It is also able to work with networks where there are
redundant SPTS multicast streams with the same IP but different source. The
meter is also compatible with M3U files, which allows to load a service list from
an external file.

Those programmes can be displayed on the screen together with other

important service information. Although some concepts are similar, signal
quality assessment metrics is not the same in IPTV as it is in digital TV over RF.
The equipment offers you the measurements you need to understand, identify
and correct the new problems that can be found in this new type of television
distribution networks.

S
C
IPTV analyzer
A
N

7.2 Operation

1 Connect the IPTV input/output signal to the equipment through the Ethernet
IPTV connector.

2 In "Preferences" menu (press for one second), tab "IPTV" set parameters
to log your meter into the network (for more details refer to next section).

3 In "Settings" menu, option "Signal source" select IPTV. The IPTV icon
will appear at the screen corner.

4 Press the Multicast. Set the Multicast address and port. The equipment
automatically detects if it is UDP or RTP protocol (for more details refer to
next section).

5 Now image should appear on screen.

Chapter 7: IPTV 184 November 2023

 6 Access Measurement, Spectrum or TV mode by pressing the corresponding
key to view different measurement data and image (for more details refer to
next section). Press again to display the next view.

November 2023 185 Chapter 7: IPTV

 7.3 Screen Description

7.3.1 Measurement Mode

Figure 120.
1 Selected installation; date and time.
2 IPTV mode enabled; battery level.
3 Graphic bar "Buffer Usage" showing the internal multicast stream buffer
usage.
4 Graphic bar "TS Bitrate" showing the recovered TS bitrate.
5 Measurements on data network:
 Delay Factor (MDI - Media Delivered Index): Maximum time that one
multicast packet stream is within the receiving buffer of the equipment
(measurement done over the last second of data received) (recommended
value < 100 ms).
 Media Loss Rate (MDI): Ratio of lost packets to received packets in one
multicast stream (only for RTP protocol after FEC) (recommended value <
0.005 pkt/s).
 Resources Busy: Resources busy shows the “%” of equipment resources
used for handling current IP traffic. Arriving at 100%, means the receiver
can’t handle all packets related to data and IP protocols other than
Multicast stream. In that situation, data loss may happen.

Chapter 7: IPTV 186 November 2023

 6 Measurement on the multicast reception: received packets, RTP missing
packets, FEC fixed packets, buffer usage, stable reception and TS bitrate (if
TS input has many variations in packet reception a stable packet rate cannot
be established).
7 Measurements over all traffic data in the network: network bitrate, IP packets
with errors and IPER (IP Packet Error Ratio; ratio of Ethernet packets with
errors to Ethernet packets received).
8 Softkey menus (for more details refer to “Settings” on page 195).

Figure 121.
1 Selected installation; date and time.
2 IPTV mode enabled; battery level.
3 Image of the tuned signal.
4 Measurements on the data network: Delay Factor, Media Loss Rate and
Resources busy (for more details refer to next section).
5 Measurement on the multicast reception: received packets, RTP missing
packets, FEC fixed packets, buffer usage, stable reception and TS bitrate (if
TS input has many variations in packet reception a stable packet rate cannot
be established).
6 Measurements over all traffic data in the network: network bitrate, IP packets
with errors and IPER (IP Packet Error Ratio; ratio of Ethernet packets with
errors to Ethernet packets received).
7 Softkey menus (for more details refer to “Settings” on page 195).

November 2023 187 Chapter 7: IPTV

 Figure 122.
1 Selected installation; date and time.
2 IPTV mode enabled; battery level.
3 Internet parameters: Ethernet speed, IGMP protocol version, multicast
server address, detected communication protocol (UDP/RTP), forward error
correction (FEC) status, FEC rows, FEC columns and TS packets / IP frame.
4 Measurement on the multicast reception: received packets, RTP missing
packets, FEC fixed packets, buffer usage, TS locked/unlocked and TS bitrate.
5 Measurements over all traffic data in the network: network bitrate, IP packets
with errors and IPER (IP Packet Error Ratio; ratio of Ethernet packets with
errors to Ethernet packets received).
6 Softkey menus (for more details refer to “Settings” on page 195).

7.3.2 Interarrival Packet Time / Packet Rate Over Time

IPTV view in Spectrum Analyzer mode shows the "Interarrival packet time" or
"Packet Rate Over Time" screen. To switch between these two options press :
Tools and select on IPTV Graph submenu.

Chapter 7: IPTV 188 November 2023

 Figure 123. Interarrival Packet Time

Figure 124. Packet Rate Over Time

1 Selected installation; date and time.
2 IPTV mode enabled; battery level.
3 There are two specific tools:

November 2023 189 Chapter 7: IPTV

  Interarrival packet time: It shows the IP packet percentage as a
function of time between packets. Its purpose is check for reception
packet continuity, for the selected stream. Usually, the graph should
concentrate around small time values. Spreading through the time axis
may point to a network problem. Maximum interval measure shows the
maximum time detected between consecutive IP packets.
 Packet Rate Over Time: This graph shows the number of IP packets
being received from the current streaming over time.
4 Advanced.
 For Interarrival Packet Time allows to change span (4, 8, 40, 200, 400
and 1920 ms) or restart analysis.
 For Packet Rate Over Time allows change resolution (1, 5, 10, 50, 200
and 1000 ms) or restart analysis.

7.3.3 TV Mode

Figure 125. IP TV 1/3

1 Selected installation; date and time.
2 Number of view/total views.
3 IPTV mode enabled, battery level.
4 Tuned service image.
5 Multicast IP address and name of the selected service.
6 Softkeys menus (for more details refer to “Settings” on page 195).

Chapter 7: IPTV 190 November 2023

 Figure 126.
1 Selected installation; date and time.
2 Tuned service image.
3 Tuned service information.
 TYPE: Encoding type and video transmission rate.
 FORMAT: Resolution (horizontal x vertical), aspect ratio and frequency.
 PROFILE: Profile level.
 PID: Video program identifier.
4 Number of view/total views.
5 IPTV mode enabled; battery level.
6 Tuned service information.
 NETWORK: Television distribution network.
 PROVIDER: Program provider name.
 NID: Network identifier where the signal is distributed.
 ONID: Identifier of the original network where the signal originates.
 TSID: Transport stream identifier.
 SID: Service Identifier.
 App. Type: Type of detected interactive service such as HbbTV, MHP and
MHEG-5. It also shows the URL related to the interactive service in F4 -
Advanced - Detected URLs.

November 2023 191 Chapter 7: IPTV

  LCN: Logic Channel Number. It is the first logic number assigned to the
first channel in the receiver.
 NIT v.: Network Information Table version (NIT).
 +Info: Additional service information.
 v. NIT: Network Information Table (NIT) version.
 FREE/SCRAMBLED: Free/scrambled transmission.
 DTV/DS: Standard type of transmission.
 STTL: Subtitles available.
 Text: Teletext available.
 AD: Audio description available (for visually impaired).
7 Tuned audio information.
 TYPE: Type of audio encoding and transmission speed.
 FORMAT: Service audio format. Bit depth; sampling frequency; sound
reproduction.
 LANGUAGE: Broadcasting language.
 PID: ID of the audio program.
8 Multicast IP address and name of the selected service.
9 Softkeys menu (for more details refer to “Settings” on page 195).

7.4 Tools

Press : Tools to access tools for IPTV mode.

The IP Ethernet Frame Viewer, Ping and delay measurements and View
IP Network log are specific tools for IPTV. The other tools (TS Analyzer, TS
Recording, Service Recording, Streaming V/A, Network Delay and Task Planner)
are generic and its explanation and operation can be found in "Tools" chapter
(“TOOLS” on page 88).

7.4.1 PING measurement and relay

The PING tool is a diagnostic tool about the network. To use it follow these steps:

1 Set parameters for the PING/TRACE test. Press on : Advanced. Options

are:
 Mode: Select between
•PING: It confirms if a given unit can get any response from another
machine in the same network.

Chapter 7: IPTV 192 November 2023

 •TRACE: It shows all IP servers between the meter and the IP address
measuring transit delays of packets across the network.
•Avg Packet Delay / IPDV: It shows delay between two points in the
network and changes in this delay.
 Pings for each IP (only for PING tool): Number of times to repeat the ping
test. If "Forever" is selected, it can be stopped with "Cancel" or "Exit".
 Ping range (only for PING tool): Range of addresses to apply the ping test.
It adds the number selected to the original IP address.

2 Click on IP Address and enter the IP address of the remote machine you want
to check its communication. It works for both local network or external
network.

3 Press : Start. The equipment starts sending data packets to the IP address
of the remote machine.

4 If it gets response, on screen appears the message "Reply from" with the
response IP address, number of bytes received, time of response, TTL (time-
to-live) or average IPTD (average IP Packet Transfer Delay) and IPDV (IP
Packet Delay Variation).

5 To exit press : Exit.

Figure 127.

November 2023 193 Chapter 7: IPTV

 7.4.2 View IP Network Log

This function shows a log with network events about protocols IGMP, PING, ARP,
DHCP and also Ethernet link detection. Data shown is date, hour and a
description.

Figure 128.

 Options: The log can be exported to an USB flash memory or be

cleared.

7.4.3 IP Ethernet Frame Viewer

This function only works for Multicast streaming.

Chapter 7: IPTV 194 November 2023

 Figure 129.

 Multicast: It allows user to change multicast address.

 Capture: The system captures an Ethernet packet that belongs to the

multicast stream been received. Information of this packet is shown as a
tree that can be deployed to show header data of each protocol available
(Ethernet, IPv4, UDP and RTP).

7.5 Settings

7.5.1 Sofkey Menus

► : Multicast

The IPTV tuning options are on : Multicast. These options are available to
receive a multicast signal. Multicast is an open broadcasting over IP in which the
device only takes data packets with a specific address.

For multicast distribution, options are:

 Multicast Address: Multicast address at which the equipment is subscribed

to receive a multicast transmission.

November 2023 195 Chapter 7: IPTV

  Port: It allows the user to select the port (protocol is automatically
detected by the meter).
 Recent Multicast Addresses: It shows a list of multicast addresses recently
used.
 Discovered Multicast Addresses: It discovers and shows all multicast
streams into the network. It shows a complete list including IP addresses
and bitrates for each stream.
 IGMPv3 Server Sources: Multicast IP servers validated by the user to
receive multicast streams (only for IGMPv3 protocol; select IGMP version
protocol in "Preferences").

► IPTV

It displays a list of IP Parameters: ethernet speed, IGMP version, multicast

address, protocol, FEC status and TS packets/IP frame.

► Tools

It access tools for IPTV mode. The IP Ethernet Frame Viewer, Ping and
delay measurements and View IP Network log are specific tools for IPTV.
The other tools (TS Analyzer, TS Recording, Service Recording, Streaming V/A,
Network Delay and Task Planner) are generic and its explanation and operation
can be found in "Tools" chapter (“TOOLS” on page 88).

► Advanced

There is an option to reset IP measurements on IP Measurements Mode or

options to select audio track, URLs and TS Data on TV mode.

7.5.2 General Settings and Preferences

► Preferences

To access Preferences press the key for 1 second. Go to the IPTV tab to fill
out options to log in a data network. This is necessary to receive IPTV signal.

Network parameters are:

 MAC: Physical address of the equipment. It is unique and cannot be

edited.

Chapter 7: IPTV 196 November 2023

  DHCP: Enable this option to get the proper IP address when the unit is
first connected to a network. That feature contributes to make things
easier to installers when debugging network access. Enable the DHCP
protocol for proper IP configuration.
 IP Address: IP Address of the equipment into the local network.
 Mask: Subnet mask of the equipment (by default 255.255.255.0).
 Gateway: It allows the meter to get out from the local network when using
PING or TRACE (if the network does not have gateway, use 0.0.0.0).
 IGMP Version: Protocol for multicast transmissions used by the router.
Available versions are 1, 2 and 3 (by default it is disabled - Off).
•IGMPv1: IGMP version 1. Each time user selects a multicast address,
meter asks for the new multicast stream.
•IGMPv2: IGMP version 2. Each time user selects a multicast address,
meter stops receiving the current stream and asks for receiving the new
one.
•IGMPv3: IGMP version 3. Each time user selects a multicast address,
meter stops receiving the current stream and asks for receiving the new
one, from the servers approved by the user.
•Off: Meter does not send any IGMP messages and discards the received
ones.

► General Settings

When pressing the settings key it shows IPTV settings:

 Signal Source: It allows the user to select the signal coming into the
equipment. Select IPTV.
 Decoder TS Input: It allows the user to select the transport stream coming
into the equipment among RF demodulator, IPTV input and ASI input. If
you want to save the transport stream received by the IPTV, select the
IPTV input.
 ASI Output: It allows the user to select the way out for TS-ASI packets.
User can select among Off, IPTV and ASI Input. This transport stream
received by the equipment can feed the signal to other devices as well. If
you want to send to the output the transport stream from the IPTV signal,
select IPTV. In the case of IPTV option the TS-ASI packets go out through
the IPTV connector.

7.5.3 M3U file import

M3U are files that contain a list of services available on streaming. To load one
of these files on your meter follow these steps:

1 Copy your M3U file on a pendrive.

November 2023 197 Chapter 7: IPTV

 2 Access or create a new installation and press the F4 key: “Import from USB”.
Select your M3U file.

3 Once loaded, press F1 and it will appear an option to load the M3U file. Select
it and it will show a list with all available services, alike services on TV mode.

Chapter 7: IPTV 198 November 2023

8 OTT

8.1 Introduction

OTT or Over The Top refers to video, audio and other media services delivered
directly to the user over the Internet, for Video on Demand or Live broadcasting.
There are different standards being used to deliver OTT services. MPEG-DASH
and HLS are the most popular. All OTT protocols address the fundamental
problem of poor viewer tolerance to disruption or buffering during video play out
caused by the naturally changing network conditions of the Internet

To solve these problems, the OTT servers provide the same audio / video
fragments in different resolutions and bitrates so the user can select one or the
other depending on the network conditions. This helps to decrease the annoying
effect of buffering.

To know server’s availability is important, so the client media player can select
the right quality at a certain time. This information is contained in the HLS
MANIFEST file or in the MPEG-DASH MPD file (Media Presentation Description).
The meter can retrieve and display the information of these files and download
the selected content by segments and also it shows the download bitrate in a
graph.

S
C
OTT operation and analysis
A
N

8.2 Operation

1 Connect the OTT signal to the meter through the IP CTRL port.

2 Press "Settings" , and select OTT on "Signal Source".

3 First screen OTT 1/2 shows the log with some system messages. Press again
on to switch to screen OTT 2/2. This screen shows segments loading in
sequence.

4 Press URL . It shows a list of available URL. Select one URL. It also allows
the user to import a URL file from a USB pendrive by pressing “Import
from USB” (see next section).

5 The meter downloads the file (MANIFEST or MPD) from the URL. This file
should contain a description of all content available on the server.

November 2023 199 Chapter 8: OTT

 6 The meter validates the description file and shows basic information about
the description file (type and profile). If there is any problem while
downloading it will show a message on screen.

7 Then the meter selects one available stream and shows it on

“Representation”. OTT 1/2 screen shows detailed information about the
selected stream. OTT 2/2 shows the sequence of segment requests and
result (OK, failed). To view the OTT segment download bitrate in a graph
press .

8.3 Screen Description

8.3.1 OTT Mode

Figure 130.
1 URL selected.
2 Representation selected (resolution and profile).
3 System messages log.
4 Standard status.
5 Softkeys menus (for more details refer to “Menu Options” on page 202).

Joystick functions:
•Joystick up/down: It scrolls screen up and down.

Chapter 8: OTT 200 November 2023

 Figure 131. Log for Segment request and status

8.3.2 OTT Segment Bitrate

Figure 132.
1 URL selected.
2 Representation selected (resolution and profile).

November 2023 201 Chapter 8: OTT

 3 Bitrate of segments download. Graph scrolls to right while segments
downloading.
4 Standard status.
5 Softkeys menus (for more details refer to next section).

Joystick functions:
•Joystick up/down: Decreases/Increases time span.
Axis description:
•Axis X: Time Span (s).
•Axis Y: Download size (bytes). This axis re-scales according to biggest
value.

8.3.3 Menu Options

At the bottom of the screen there are some menus available via the function
keys.

 URL: It shows a screen with a list of available URL from which

download segments. It also allows you to import URLs from a file on a
pendrive.
•Import from USB: The USB flashdrive must have a text file named
OTT.URL on the root in order to be imported. It must contain the URL with
this format:
-#URL1 description
-https://URL1 address
-#URL2 description
-https://URL2 address
-...
-Example:
-#web PROMAX
-https://www.promax.es

 View: There are two options:

•Presentation Description: It shows a MPD file in text format.
•Presentation Parameters: It shows most common MPD parameters.

Chapter 8: OTT 202 November 2023

9 INSTALLATIONS MANAGEMENT

9.1 Introduction

The Installations Management is a program embedded in the equipment that

allows the user to easily create a file (installation) to individually store and
manage data for each installation. Measurements, channel plans, screenshots
and any other data associated with the installation will be stored in the folder
corresponding to that installation. These measures can then be displayed and
downloaded to a PC.

If the user does not create any file installation, the equipment stores
measurements in the installation file by default (named "DEFAULT").

S
C
Installations management
A
N

9.2 Operation

1 To access the Installations menu press the key .

2 It shows up a window with a list of all available installations. On the softkeys

appears the options to manage these installations.

3 To exit the list of installations press the key .

Figure 133.

November 2023 203 Chapter 9: INSTALLATIONS MANAGEMENT

 There are the following options:

 Load : It loads the selected installation. To select a installation from the

list, place the cursor on the installation and press the joystick, then press
“Load” to load it. Once loaded, the name of the installation appears on
the upper left corner of the screen, accompanied by the symbol , that
means that is the current installation. All measurements, screenshots,
channel plans and other data since this moment will be stored in the
current installation.

 Manage : It opens a window that displays all data of the current

installation and from where they can be edited, changed or view (for more
details refer to next section).

 Create New : It creates a new installation with the data introduced by

the user (for more details refer to next section).

 Tools : It shows up a menu with some tools to use with the installations
(see "Tools" section).

9.3 Installation Management

The DEFAULT installation is the installation preinstalled on the equipment. It is

like any other installation and it can load channel plans, DiSEqC programs, etc.
The DEFAULT installation can not be deleted or renamed.

In the list of installations, press on the option Manage to access to the

Installation manager screen:

Chapter 9: INSTALLATIONS MANAGEMENT 204 November 2023

 Figure 134.
The window is divided into three areas:

1 Display Area: It is the area where data file description is displayed. The file
data is displayed only if the cursor is placed for a moment on the file name.
For a screenshot, it displays a thumbnail of the full screen, as captured. In
the remaining cases, it only shows some data description of the file type. If
there is any extra option associated with the file, it will appear on the key
2 List of Files: It shows all types of data files in the selected installation. These
can be: screenshots, channel plans, dataloggers, DiSeqC commands, data
captures, signal monitoring, service databases and antennas. To move along
this file list move the joystick up or down. Any of these files can be selected
or deselected by pressing the joystick.
3 File Description Area: It shows file name, extension, creation date and time
and size.

► Menu Options

The installation manager menu has four options linked with the softkeys. They
are described below:

 Filter by Type: It shows all available file types in the current

installation and the amount of them between brackets. User can filter by
file type. The selected file type will be the only one available in the list of
files. Available file types are: screenshots, channel plans, dataloggers,

November 2023 205 Chapter 9: INSTALLATIONS MANAGEMENT

 DiSeqC commands, data captures, signal monitoring, service databases
and antennas (or all).

 File
•Mark All: It marks all files on the list of files area.
•Unmark All: It deselects all files on the list of files area.
•Delete: It deletes all selected files on the list of files area.
•Copy to USB: It saves selected files on the list of files area to an USB stick
connected to the equipment. If the name of the file to be copied is greater
than 8 characters the system cuts it. If the file name is cut and matches
with another one, then it is added a number to the name to make them
different. For instance, 2 files with similar names, like FILENAME01 and
FILENAME02 both files will be correctly copied with names FILENA~1 and
FILENA~2. To keep the file names with more than 8 characters it is
recommended to export the complete installation using the "Export to
USB" option (see "Tools" section). The Datalogger files copied to the USB
cannot be used to generate reports by the NetUpdate program. To do this
the datalogger files must be exported directly through the NetUpdate
program (for more details refer to NetUpdate manual on PROMAX
website).
•Send via mail: It allows you to send files, selected from the file list, via e-
mail. Mail server parameters must be defined on the SMTP tab at
Preferences (for more details refer to “?SMTP Options” on page 55).

S
C
Sending files by e-mail via WiFi
A
N

 Installation
•Add Channel Plan: It opens a window to add a channel plan, terrestrial or
satellite and band (for optical option), to the current installation.
•Add Antenna: It allows the user to add an specific antenna among the
ones available. To import an antenna refer to "Field Strength" section in
chapter "Tools".
•Add DiSEqC program: It allows the user to select and add to the current
installation any DiSEqC program available in the equipment.

 Options: This option appears if there is any extra option associated

with the file type.
•See Full Screen: This option only appears if user selects an image in the
list of files. It displays the selected image full screen.
•DiSEqC Program: This option only appears if a satellite channel plan is
selected in the list of files area. It allows the user to add a Diseqc program

Chapter 9: INSTALLATIONS MANAGEMENT 206 November 2023

 to the selected satellite channel plan from the list of diseqc programs
available for the current installation.
•Open File: This options appears if the file type selected is datalogger, data
capture or signal monitoring. In case of datalogger it opens the data
viewer. In case of data capture (if the capture was done in the Spectrum
Analyzer mode) shows the spectrum reference. In case of signal
monitoring it opens the signal monitoring viewer.

To get out from the Installation manager press any key to access
MEASUREMENT, SPECTRUM or TV mode.

9.4 New Installation

In the list of installations, when selecting the option Create New it runs the
installation wizard that helps to create a new installation.

1 During the process, the user has the option to edit the default name assigned
or import data from another installation.

2 The user can select the channel plans (terrestrial and satellite) that will be
used in that installation. At least one for each band has to be selected.

3 For satellite channel plans the user can select the Diseqc commands
associated to the installation and also the satellite band (Ku-Ka or C band)
and the frequencies of the LNB Oscillator.

4 During the creation process the softkeys functions are: Next (it goes to the
next step), Previous (it goes to the previous step) or Cancel (it cancels the
process).

5 When finish, the new installation created will be the current installation.

9.5 Edition Tools

In the list of installations, when pressing the Tools option it shows a menu
with some options to edit the installation files:

 Mark All: It selects all installations in the list of installations.

 Unmark All: It deselects all installations in the list of installations.
 Archive: It compresses (using the ZIP algorithm) the selected installations
to save more space. A zipped installation shows a box icon at the left
side in the list of installations. A zipped installation can be loaded as
anyone else, but the load time can be slightly higher because previously it
is unzipped automatically. Once the installation is unzipped the user must

November 2023 207 Chapter 9: INSTALLATIONS MANAGEMENT

 re-zip it if necessary. To transfer an installation file from the equipment to
a PC, it must have been previously zipped.
 Delete: It deletes the selected installations and all the files associated to
them. The DEFAULT installation cannot be deleted.
 Rename: It edits the name of the installation selected in the list of
installations. The installation by default DEFAULT cannot be renamed.
 Export to USB: It saves the installations files selected in the list of
installations to an USB stick connected to the instrument. The installation
file is exported in zip format.
 Import from USB: It imports installation files from a USB stick connected
to the equipment. It has to use the same folder structure that is generated
when exporting to USB (for more details refer to next section).
 Installed Antennas: It allows you to remove antenna files on the meter.

9.6 Importing Data from USB

The data import tool allows the user to import data files in a simple way from an
USB flash drive to the equipment.

Data available to be imported are:

 Installations.
 Channel Plans.
 Antennas.

► Operation

1 Copy the file to be imported on a flash drive and plug it into USB port. The
file must be in the proper format so the system can recognize it.

2 Press the Installation Management key .

3 Press the key "Tools".

4 Select the “Import from USB” option.

5 The Import Files window appears. Select the file and press the key:
"Import".

Chapter 9: INSTALLATIONS MANAGEMENT 208 November 2023

 Figure 135. Import Files window
6 If the file import is successful then a window shows a confirmation message.

November 2023 209 Chapter 9: INSTALLATIONS MANAGEMENT

10 WEBCONTROL

10.1 Introduction

The webControl function allows you to connect remotely to the meter in order to
visualize measurements and operate on it. The meter must be connected to a
data network. To connect to meter from a remote access device use just a
standard web browser.

WebControl tools are:

 Measurement and Spectrum: It shows spectrum and measurement from

the tuned channel.
 TV Parameters: It shows data, video and audio from the tuned channel.
 Console: It emulates and allows you to interact with the meter in first
person.
 Quality Signal Monitoring: It monitors a signal according to some
parameters selected by the user.
 Historical Monitoring: It shows data from monitoring and they can also be
exported.
 Installations Management: It manages installation files and creates
channel plans.
 Task Management: It allows the user to schedule some tasks.

There is also an option on demand:

 Mask Monitoring*: It monitors RF spectrum by comparing against a

reference spectrum.

Next section explains how to configure the meter to be able to connect remotely.
Following sections explain each work mode.

S
C
webControl introduction
A
N

*. Contact PROMAX if you want to buy this option.

Chapter 10: WEBCONTROL 210 November 2023

 10.2 Settings and Remote Access

► Meter Settings

1 The meter can be connected to a data network via an Ethernet cable or via
WiFi. To access the configuration parameters:
•Ethernet network: From the meter, access the preferences options by
pressing the "Installations" key for 1 second. Go to the "Network" tab
where you can find the configuration parameters to register in the
network.
•WiFi network: Connect the USB WiFi adapter and the WiFi configuration
window will appear or you can also access through the "WiFi configuration"
menu from the "Tools" button .

2 Select DHCP ON, if you connect the meter to a network with a router or
server with DHCP protocol enabled. Then the network will set automatically
the parameters in the meter. If not, follow the next steps to set the meter.

3 On "IP Address" box enter the meter IP. Use an IP in the same range used
by your PC in the local network (if you do not know these data see “find out
local network data” section). For instance, if the IP for your PC is 10.0.1.18,
the meter must have a free IP in the same range, like 10.0.1.50.

NOTE: Another option is to keep the default configuration in the meter and set
an IP in your PC in the same range as the meter. The default IP of the
meter is 10.8.8.188* so the PC should use a free IP in the same range,
for example 10.8.8.50.
*. For firmware versions prior to 26.8 the default IP is 10.0.6.198

4 In the "Mask" box, enter the mask value, which should be the same as the
one used by the local network (usually 255.255.255.0; if you do not know
these data see “find out local network data” section).

5 To connect the meter from an external network, fill in the “Gateway” with
the info obtained from the local network.

6 Press on "Save" and then "Exit" to save changes and exit.

7 Connect the meter to a data network with Internet access. You can use an
Ethernet cable connected to the IP CTRL port or in case of WiFi network,
connect the USB WiFi adapter, select the network and enter the password.

► Find out Local Area Network Data (LAN)

1 To obtain data from the Ethernet network where your meter is connected,
you should use a PC connected to this same network.

November 2023 211 Chapter 10: WEBCONTROL

 2 From the PC click on Start menu in Windows. On the Search box write CMD
and press Enter.

3 In opens a command line in a window. Write IPCONFIG and press enter.

4 It displays a window with some lines with info. On line "Local Network
Ethernet Adapter" see line "IPv4 Address". This is the local IP for your PC.
Write down this IP. Also write down "Subnet Mask" and "Default Gateway".
This data is needed to configure the meter by hand.

► Remote Access

1 From a remote access device (PC, mobile device) run a standard web
browser (Chrome recommended).

2 On the address bar write the address to remotely access the meter.

3 If the connection is successful, it should appear on screen the webControl

welcome screen (see figure). This screen shows the meter model and serial
number.

Figure 136.
4 Enter the password and press OK (password by default is Password).

Chapter 10: WEBCONTROL 212 November 2023

 5 To identify on the meter that it is connected to the webControl it shows this
icon on the top right corner.

NOTE: There are many ways to connect to the meter from an external network.
If you have follow these instructions and you fail to connect the
webControl, please contact PROMAX technical assistance and we will help
you ([email protected]).

► Password Recovery

If after changing the webControl password you forget it, click on “forgot
password?”. It opens a window with some instructions to reset the password.
Follow these steps:

1 Send an e-mail to the PROMAX technical assistance service

([email protected]) with the following information:
 Contact details: Full name, company name and address, phone number
and e-mail.
 Internal number shown on the window.
 Recovery code shown on the window.

2 Once this information is sent, it is checked and if everything is right, a

temporary password is sent back. Write this password on the box “temporary
password”. This password is for one time use.

3 If you have access to the main screen go to “Config” on the upper right
corner and click on “Change Password”.

4 A window will appear to change the password. Enter the temporary password
in the "Old password" box. Enter your new password in the "New password"
box and again in the "Repeat new password" box. Press OK.

November 2023 213 Chapter 10: WEBCONTROL

 10.3 Icon Table

At the top of the screen there is a bar notification where some icons show up:

Icon Description Icon Description

Installation Monitoring

Terrestrial Band WiFi Connection

Satellite Band USB connected

Battery level Notification

Battery charging Full memory warning

Emulating Hard drive detected / in use

Pending tasks GPS enabled

Cleaning database Warning

Audio recording Transport Stream recording

Audio streaming Transport Stream streaming

Chapter 10: WEBCONTROL 214 November 2023

Icon Description Icon Description

Error

10.4 Measurements and Spectrum

► Description

Measurements and Spectrum screen shows real time spectrum and all
measurements of the RF channel if it is tuned. It also allows modifying the
reference level, span, type of tuning and channel plan among others. To
communicate you need at least 200 kB/s of bandwidth.

To access this screen click on Measurement icon .

► Screen Description

Figure 137.
1 Selected function (Measurements and Spectrum).
2 Source of Signal.

November 2023 215 Chapter 10: WEBCONTROL

 3 Icon bar, selected installation and current date and hour*.
4 Access to settings:
•Change Password: It allows you to change your password.
•Reboot Equipment: It allows you to reset your meter after confirmation.
•About Equipment: It gives information about your meter: model name,
serial number, release version / webControl version.
•Logout: It exits your current session.
5 Signal settings. When clicking on a button it shows settings for the current
signal and also they can be changed.
•Terrestrial / Satellite settings (band; external power supply; power
voltage; LNB drain).
•Tuning type settings (tuning by channel/frequency; channel; channel
plan; frequency).
•Tuned signal parameters.
6 If shows if signal is locked/unlocked. If locked it shows its multiplex.
7 Selection parameters: Tuning type, channel/frequency selection and channel
plan.
8 Signal data: Power, C/N, MER, CBER, VBER, Offset, LM**.
9 Spectrum graph.
10 Spectrum settings parameters: reference level, center frequency, span and
analyzer (automatic reference level) / spectrum (reference level set by user)
mode.

10.5 TV Parameters

► Description

TV Parameters screen shows important metadata that identifies the network

(NID), (ONID), TS, Service, LCN, etc. and also a slide show of one service that
belongs to the selected multiplex. To communicate you need at least 200 kB/s
of bandwidth.

To access this screen click on TV icon .

*. In case you have the GPS option installed, it should appear your current geographic coordinates.
**. In case you have DAB Advanced or FM Advanced installed, it shows advanced measurements
related to these options.

Chapter 10: WEBCONTROL 216 November 2023

 ► Screen Description

Figure 138.
1 Selected function (TV Parameters).
2 Source of Signal.
3 Icon bar, selected installation and current date and hour*.
4 Access to settings:
•Change Password: It allows you to change your password.
•Reboot Equipment: It allows you to reset your meter after confirmation.
•About Equipment: It gives information about your meter: model name,
serial number, release version / webControl version.
•Logout: It exits your current session.
5 Signal settings. When clicking on a button it shows settings for the current
signal and also they can be changed.
•Terrestrial / Satellite settings (band; external power supply; power
voltage; LNB drain).
•Tuning type settings (tuning by channel/frequency; channel; channel
plan; frequency).
•Tuned signal parameters.
6 If shows if signal is locked/unlocked. If locked it shows its multiplex.
7 Selection parameters: Tuning type, channel/frequency selection and channel
plan.
8 This area allows you to select between several tabs:

*. In case you have the GPS option installed, it should appear your current geographic coordinates.

November 2023 217 Chapter 10: WEBCONTROL

  TV Monitor: It shows a slideshow of the selected service from the channel
locked. The symbol shows the service full screen. If it is a DAB or FM
signal, the audio is demodulated and can be listened to. If the DAB signal
contains images they are also shown.
 TS Record: It records the current service (service recording) or the
complete transport stream (TS recording). The file is recorded on the
meter itself or on a USB (check option "use USB"). To start recording, fill
in the “description” field and click on the red button. It shows available
time and space. To stop recording, press the red button again. Only one
TS can be played and analysed from the meter itself. If more than one TS
is recorded, a message will appear indicating that only the last one can be
played and analysed. The rest of TS should be downloaded to the PC to be
played or analysed.
 Audio Record: It allows you to save audio (in wav format) from the service
being played. The service could be FM, DAB or digital TV. Select a name
and press “Start Audio Record”. It will start to record and will show some
data about the service being recorded like total time, space available and
location. When finish press “Stop Audio Record”.
 TS Streaming: It allows you to stream the selected service. Enter the IP
address and port to stream and press “Start Streaming” (for more details
about Streaming refer to “Streaming V/A” on page 174). When finish
press “Stop Streaming”.
9 Service option shows the selected service and a list of available services in
the channel. Each tab (service, video, audio) shows general details for the
selected service and video and audio details.

10.6 Remote Console

► Description

Console screen allows you to interact remotely with the meter like you were in
front of it. To communicate you need at least 3 MB/s of bandwidth. When the
emulation is running no other webControl services are available.

To interact with the meter you can use the mouse pointer as a touch on screen
and also meter controllers (joystick, function keys and shortcut keys) to access
menus and options.

There are some limitations that we will try to solve in future versions. Currently
audio is not available.

To access this screen click on Console icon .

Chapter 10: WEBCONTROL 218 November 2023

 ► Screen Description

Figure 139.
1 Selected function (Console).
2 Icon bar, selected installation and current date and hour*.
3 Access to settings:
•Change Password: It allows you to change your password.
•Reboot Equipment: It allows you to reset your meter after confirmation.
•About Equipment: It gives information about your meter: model name,
serial number, release version / webControl version.
•Logout: It exits your current session.
4 Start / Stop console emulation button.
5 Joystick. Click left, right, up or down to simulate joystick movement. Click on
centre to simulate enter. You can use the joystick to move along the menus
and to select options. Also you can use your mouse pointer like a finger touch
on screen.
6 Direct Access keys to access Installation management and Settings. Press for
more than one second to access Preferences and Video / Audio settings.
7 Direct Access keys to access Measurement, Spectrum and TV mode.
8 Direct Access key to Screenshot (screenshot is saved on your remote device
and data on the meter).
9 Softkeys or Function keys.

*. In case you have the GPS option installed, then it also appears current geographic coordinates.

November 2023 219 Chapter 10: WEBCONTROL

 10.7 Signal Quality Monitoring

► Description

The Signal Quality Monitoring function allows users to select and monitor
channels from a channel plan by setting alarms on specific parameters.

The meter monitors certain signal quality parameters according to value ranges
established by the user. If values are outside these margins, the system will
notify the user.

When the monitoring has started, historical monitoring can be consulted, but the
rest of webControl services are disabled.

The memory space can store up to 30 days of data approximately. After that the
system removes the older data in order to have more room for new data. When
the system is deleting data it appears an indicative icon, even that, the
monitoring system is not affected and works as usual, but the user cannot
access data from records.

To access this screen, click on the Monitoring icon .

► Settings

1 In “Preferences”, check date, time and time zone where the meter is located
(for more details refer to “?Time & Date Options” on page 51) or synchronise
time with a NTP server (for more details refer to “?NTP Options” on page 55).

2 In "Preferences", label "Utilities", option "Moni. ddbb loc.” select where the
monitoring data will be stored: internal memory or hard disk (for more
details refer to “?Tools Options” on page 52).

3 You need a channel plan with special information for monitoring. To do that,
create a new channel plan from an existing one using the "Explore channel
plan" tool in the meter (“Explore Channel Plan” on page 135). If existing
channel plans are not enough you can create a new one from scratch from
the “Create channel plan” function in the Installations Management (see
next) or from a PC using the NetUpdate software (for more details refer to
“NetUpdate Connection” on page 249).

4 Check measurement units (for more details refer to “?Measurement Options”

on page 51).

Chapter 10: WEBCONTROL 220 November 2023

 ► Operation

1 In “Monitoring type” box select “Signal Quality Monitoring”.

2 In “Monitoring” dropdown menu, select an existing monitoring or create a

new one by clicking "New". You can also import a monitoring (in zip format)
by pressing “Import” (this monitoring previously must be created and
exported using the “Export” option).

3 If you create a new monitoring, a box will appear that allows you to select
the channel plan that you want to monitor. In case the system detects a
monitoring that was not finished, then it allows you to load it in order to finish
it.

4 Next, the "Name" box appears. Write a name to identify the monitoring (a
single word). In the "Description" box add additional information.

5 A list will appear with all channels in the channel plan. Alarms on each
channel are available to be set.

6 To set an alarm from a channel, click on the cross icon next to channel. It
drops down a list with all parameters available.

7 Each channel can be configured with this parameters:

 Auto: The system automatically tunes the channel and takes
measurements and reports an alarm when the user-defined condition is
met.
 Manual: The system tunes the channel and waits during a time defined by
user (in seconds). Then it takes measurements and reports an alarm
when the user-defined condition is met.
 Cycles: The system reports an alarm when the user-defined condition is
met during a number of consecutive cycles defined by user. If this box is
empty is equal to 1 cycle.

8 When the channel is deployed, the alarm configuration will appear:

 Status unlocked: This condition is always enabled and reports alarm when
the channel is unlocked.
 Parameter: Parameter to monitor.
 OVER / UNDER: It indicates the condition to met in relation to the user-
defined value.
 Pre-alarm: Press on the switch and enter the value so when the condition
is met it reports a pre-alarm. Value must be in decimal notation.
 Alarm: Press on the switch and enter the value so when the condition is
met it reports a pre-alarm. Value must be in decimal notation.

9 Configure each channel to be monitored.

November 2023 221 Chapter 10: WEBCONTROL

 10 When configuration is finished, press on “Save”.

11 Select one monitoring in the box “Monitoring”.

12 To start monitoring press on “Start Monitoring”. Monitoring will start. To

delete a monitoring press on “Delete” or to export press on “Export”.

13 The active monitoring screen shows the measurements obtained and alarms
and pre-alarms for the last cycle if there are any. Also it displays a bar graph
with the measurements of the selected parameter. Under the bar graph it
shows the monitoring channel, total monitoring time and cycle time. To
select the parameter in the graph, select "Select Parameter". If you click on
a channel, related information will appear.

14 Alarms are notified by sending e-mails to addresses from the e-mailing list.
In order for the meter to send e-mails, the mail service must be configured
in Preferences, SMTP tag (for more details refer to “?SMTP Options” on
page 55).

15 To stop press on “Stop Monitoring” or cancel remote control on the meter.

16 Data obtained can be requested on “Historical Monitoring” screen.

► Screen Description

Figure 140. Monitoring Edition / Creation

1 Selected function (Monitoring).
2 Monitoring selection. On Monitoring type select “Signal Quality Monitoring”.
On “Monitorings” select one existing monitoring (previously, user must create

Chapter 10: WEBCONTROL 222 November 2023

 a monitoring in order to show here). Below there is a text box to add a
description to the monitoring.
3 Alarms configuration. It allows to select the Auto or Manual mode and cycles.
If you click on the cross next to the channel, the available parameters* of the
channel will be displayed to set alarms. At the bottom there is the ”Save”
button to save all changes made.
4 When pressing on “Start Monitoring” it will start monitoring.
5 The “Delete” button deletes the selected monitoring, the “Export” button
exports the monitoring and the “New” button creates a new monitoring.
6 It shows a list of e-mails. When an alarm is triggered, a notification is send
to these e-mails. It allows you to add e-mails in the box “add a new email”.
To remove it press on the cross next to the e-mail. Parameters to set the e-
mail server are in the meter’s “Preferences” menu.

► Screen Description

Figure 141. Monitoring started

1 Parameter selected shown on graphic bar.
2 Start / Stop monitoring.
3 Graphic bar of selected parameter. At the bottom the channel being
measured. When pressing on a graphic bar channel it pops up a window with
measurements. If there are too many channels to show on screen drag and
drop to see the rest of them.

*. In case you have DAB Advanced or FM Advanced installed, it shows advanced measurements
related to these options.

November 2023 223 Chapter 10: WEBCONTROL

 4 Current monitoring data: Monitoring channel, monitoring total time and cycle
time.
5 Measurements and alarms window. Only shows alarms and measurements
from the last cycle. On screen only appears the main measurements. When
clicking on a channel it will show all measurements on that channel. Alarms
table shows date and time of alarm and description. The icon indicates
alarm. The icon indicates pre-alarm. Data is organized by type of signal
and can be organised from lowest to highest or viceversa by pressing on the
parameter at table heading.

10.8 Historical Monitoring

► Description

Historical Monitoring screen shows data obtained during monitoring. It stores all
data about alarms, pre-alarms and system messages like memory problems,
short-circuits, etc.

Historical monitoring can be consulted even if monitoring is working.

To access this screen, click on the Historical Monitoring icon .

► Operation

1 In “Monitoring type” box select “Signal Quality Monitoring”.

2 In the “Monitoring” box select the monitoring from which you want to obtain
data.

3 In the “Channels” box, select the channel from which you want to obtain
data. For all channels select “All”.

4 In the “Measurement” box select the parameter from which you want to
obtain data. For all parameters select “All”.

5 Select the start and end date and time for the monitoring data query. It must
be the local date and time for meter.

6 Check the box “Measurements” or “Alarms” if you want to see the

measurements, alarms or both.

7 Press "Done" and wait a few seconds to visualize data. Data for
measurements is shown in the left column and for alarms in the right
column.

Chapter 10: WEBCONTROL 224 November 2023

 8 To visualize data in graphic form press on label "Graph". This graph is
displayed only if one single channel and one type of measurement is
selected.

9 To export data to a CSV file, click on "Export to CSV".

► Screen Description

Figure 142.
1 Selected function (Historical Monitoring).
2 Selected installation and current date and hour*.
3 Access to settings:
•Change Password: It allows you to change your password.
•Reboot Equipment: It allows you to reset your meter after confirmation.
•About Equipment: It gives information about your meter: model name,
serial number, release version / webControl version.
•Logout: It exits your current session.
4 Boxes to select parameters for historical data query:
•Monitoring Type: Select “Signal Quality Monitoring”.
•Monitoring: Select monitoring to obtain data.
•Channel or all channels.
•Measurement type or all measurements.
•Date and time (from / to). The query can be up to 7 days. You must put
date and hour at the location where the meter is monitoring (not the date

*. In case you have the GPS option installed, then it also appears current geographic coordinates.

November 2023 225 Chapter 10: WEBCONTROL

 and time from where you are making the query, unless both were in the
same time zone).
5 Data table / graph (graphic bar is only displayed when one single channel and
one measurement type is selected). Click on the corresponding label to
switch between Table and Graph. Alarms table shows when the alarm or pre-
alarm was reported and when disappeared. If signal is unlocked some
measurements related to demodulation (MER, CBER...) will be empty.
Measurement data keep units used when monitoring.

10.9 Installations Management

► Description

Installations Management allows you to access the File Manager and the Create
Channel Plan tool.

To access this screen, click on the Installations Management icon .

10.9.1 File Manager

This function allows you to manage files inside an installation (channel plans,
screenshots, dataloggers, etc.).

S
C
File manager
A
N

► File Manager Operation

1 Press on tab “File Manager” to access the file manager. Wait for few seconds
to system to read all files from the meter.

2 All installations are shown on the left side of the window. Each folder is for
an installation. When clicking on a folder it deploys its content in a tree
structure. The area on the right side shows the content inside the selected
folder.

3 The padlock icon on an item means that it cannot be removed. If the padlock
is on a folder it also means that its content cannot be change (nor deleted or
added).

4 To make any action on an item use the tools bar or deploy the options menu
by pressing the right button of the mouse. Next are described the most
common options.

Chapter 10: WEBCONTROL 226 November 2023

 ► Tools Bar:

 Back: Back to the previous screen.

 Forward: Back to the posterior screen.

 Upload: It transfers a document from your PC to the meter. It shows

a window where you can drag files, paste URLs or images or select files or
folders from your PC.

 Open: It opens a folder or downloads the selected file.

 Download: It downloads a folder or file to your PC. When it is a folder

or multiple files, it downloads a zipped file in TGZ format.

 Delete: It deletes the folder or file selected.

► Options Menu (mouse right button):

 Open: It opens a folder or downloads the selected file.

 Download: It downloads a folder or file to your PC. When it is a folder

or multiple files, it downloads a zipped file in TGZ format.

 Preview: It shows file info.

 Upload files: It transfers a document from your PC to the meter. It

shows a window where you can drag files, paste URLs or images or select
files or folders from your PC.

 Delete: It deletes the folder or file selected.

 Edit Channel Plan: It allows editing a channel of the equipment. It

only works if a channel plan file (XML extension) is selected. The channel
plan files are located in the CH folder (for more details see the next
section).

 Create Report: It generates a report in PDF format from the folder

where the datalogger files are stored. To create a report, you must select
the datalogger folder. These folders are inside the DATALOG folder.

S
C
Report generator
A
N

November 2023 227 Chapter 10: WEBCONTROL

  Empty the folders: It removes all the content inside a forlder.

 Create archive: It creates a zip file from the files selected in TAR or
GZIP format.

 Extract files from archive: It unzips a zipped file in a new folder or in

the current folder.

 Select All: It selects all the files.

 Invert selection: It reverts the current selection.

 Get info: It shows some info about the selected file.

► File and Installations Management Screen

Figure 143. File Manager

1 Selected function (Installations Management).
2 Tabs to select the File Manager or the Channel Plan Creator.
3 Toolbar.
4 File navigation area.
5 Selected installation, current date and hour* and access to settings:
•Change Password: It allows you to change your password.

*. In case you have the GPS option installed, then it also appears current geographic coordinates.

Chapter 10: WEBCONTROL 228 November 2023

 •Reboot Equipment: It allows you to reset your meter after confirmation.
•About Equipment: It gives information about your meter: model name,
serial number, release version / webControl version.
•Logout: It exits your current session.

10.9.2 Channel Plan Creator

This functions allows you to create a channel plan from scratch.

S
C
Channel plan creator and editor
A
N

► Channel Plan Creator Operation

1 Press on the “Channel Plan” tab to access the channel plan creator. Press on
“Create Channel Plan” button.

2 In the box “Name” enter the channel plan name. In the box “Band” enter the
band (terrestrial or satellite). Next fill in the box “LNB” and “TV system”.
Parameters “Average Filter”, “Video Filter”, “Start Band Frequency” and
“Stop Band Frequency” are specially indicated to use it for LTE signals.

3 Press the “Add Channel” button and enter one by one each channel that
made the channel plan. Enter channel name, frequency and signal type for
each channel.

4 Edit each parameter by clicking on it. Remove a channel clicking on the red
cross.

5 Once finished press on “Download Channel Plan” to download it on your PC.

By default the channel plan file is downloaded inside the folder “Downloads”
in your PC. The file has XML format.

6 To use the new channel plan, upload it by means of the File Manager (see
previous section). Get into the CH folder in your installation and select the
folder TER, SAT or AUX according to terrestrial or satellite channel plan. The
channel plan will be available for you.

November 2023 229 Chapter 10: WEBCONTROL

 Figure 144. Channel Creation

10.9.3 Channel Plan Editor

This function allows you to edit channel plans.

► Channel Plan Editor Operation

1 Files with channel plans are inside the “CH” folder. “SAT” sub-folder contains
satellite channel plans, “TERR” sub-folder contains terrestrial channel plans
and “AUX” contains other channel plans. Select the file that contains the
channel plan to edit and press the right button on the mouse to select the
“Edit channel plan” option.

2 The channel plan definition parameters and all the channels that form it will
appear. From here you can edit any value by clicking on the box.

3 Channels can be modified by clicking on each parameter or deleted by

pressing the red cross.

4 Once the channel plan is finished, click on “Download Channel Plan” to

download it to the PC. By default the file with the channel plan is downloaded
in the PC "Download" folder. The file is in XML format.

5 To use the channel plan on the meter use the File Manager to upload the XML
file. It must be uploaded to the installation's CH folder and within the sub-
folder TER, SAT or AUX depending on whether it is terrestrial, satellite or

Chapter 10: WEBCONTROL 230 November 2023

 auxiliary channel plan. The channel plan should now be available for use on
the meter.

10.10 Task Management

► Description

The Task Management function allows you to configure a list of tasks and
schedule when the task starts, the number of repetitions and other parameters.
The meter can be turned off after configuring the tasks as it will automatically
turn on to run the scheduled task.

From the meter itself, tasks can also be scheduled using the “Task Planner” tool,
but the Task Management function from the webControl is more advanced and
has more options.

When using the Task Management function from the webControl, the meter's
Task Planner will be disabled. To use this tool again from the meter itself, all
pending tasks must be deleted in Task Planner from the webControl.

To access this screen, click on the Task Management icon .

► Operation

1 Press on “New Task”.

2 When creating a new task, fill in these fields:

•Task Type: Type of scheduled task. Options are:
-Signal Quality Monitoring.
-Mask Monitoring*.
-Datalogger (more details in “Datalogger” on page 125).
-TS Record (more details in “Transport Stream Recording” on page 162).
-Audio Record: It records the audio from the selected service.
-ETI Record**: It records the ETI service from a DAB channel (for more
details refer to “DAB ETI Recordings” on page 300).
-Capture (more details in “Screen and Data Capture (Export key)” on
page 134).
•Type Configuration: It shows setting parameters according to selected
task.
-Signal Quality Monitoring: Selection of Quality Monitoring.

*.This function is available only for meters with the “Mask Monitoring” option installed. Contact PROMAX for
more information.
**. This function is available only for equipment with the “DAB Advanced” option installed. Contact
PROMAX for more information.

November 2023 231 Chapter 10: WEBCONTROL

 -Mask Monitoring: Selection of Mask Monitoring.
-Datalogger: Selection of Datalogger.
-TS Record: Selection of channel and the complete transport stream or
only one service.
-ETI Record: Selection of channel and service.
-Audio Record: Selection of channel and service.
-Capture: Selection of data capture, screenshot or both.
•Time Configuration: Date, time start and time end. If there is no finish
date then check “Without expire date”.
•During: It allows you to select for how long run your task.
•Execute every: It allows you to select when to repeat your task.
•Repetition Type: It allows you to select time scale for repetition: hourly
(minutes / hours repetition); weekly (week / day repetition); monthly
(month / day repetition).

Figura 145. Task Settings Screen

3 Once the task has been set, press on “Done” to save it or “Remove” to
remove it.

4 If one task tries to start when another task is running, the task will be
cancelled on that repetition and will retry to run again on the next repetition
if there is one.

5 To edit or view your task, click on the task list. To delete it, click on the trash
can icon.

6 When the task reaches the end date, it is automatically remove from the task
list.

Chapter 10: WEBCONTROL 232 November 2023

 ► Task Management Screen Description

Figura 146. Task Management

1 Selected function (Task Management).
2 Button to set a new task.
3 Scheduled list task with info from each one: task type, repetition type, start
date, expiration date and last execution status.

November 2023 233 Chapter 10: WEBCONTROL

 10.11 Mask Monitoring*
*. This function is available only for meters with the “Mask Monitoring” option installed. Contact
PROMAX for more information.

► Description

The Mask Monitoring function allows the user to save a spectrum in a specific
frequency band and time. This spectrum will work as a reference or mask when
comparing to other spectrum.

According to the signal to be monitored, there are three types of detection:

 FM
 Minimum / Maximum
 Mask Deviation

The meter uses a spectrum captured by the user as a reference. A comparison

is made between the reference spectrum and the current one, and if it exceeds
the established margins, the system will notify the user.

The maximum number of records to store in the meter’s internal database is

500.000. How long it takes to reach this number of records depends on different
factors, especially the Time Period. Once this amount is exceeded, oldest records
are overwritten. Data can be exported from the monitoring history to a CSV file.

To access this screen, click on the Monitoring icon .

S
C
Spectrum monitoring (radio FM)
A
N

S
C
Spectrum monitoring (max/min)
A
N

S
C
Spectrum monitoring (mask deviation)
A
N

S
C
Spectrum monitoring (cross-polarization)
A
N

Chapter 10: WEBCONTROL 234 November 2023

 S
C
Spectrum monitoring (4G/5G interference)
A
N

► Settings

1 Check in "Preferences", date, time and time zone where the meter is located
(for more details refer to “?Time & Date Options” on page 51) or synchronise
time with a NTP server (for more details refer to “?NTP Options” on page 55).

2 In "Preferences", label "Tools", option "Moni. ddbb loc.” select where the
monitoring data will be stored: internal memory or hard disk (for more
details refer to “?Tools Options” on page 52).

3 Check measurement units (for more details refer to “?Measurement Options”

on page 51).

► Operation

1 In “Monitoring type” box select “Mask Monitoring”.

2 In “SP Monitorings” dropdown menu, select an existing monitoring or create

a new one by clicking "New". You can also import a monitoring (in zip format)
by pressing “Import” (this monitoring must be previously created and
exported using the “Export” option).

3 When creating a new mask monitoring, fill in these fields:

•Name: Name to identify your monitoring.
•Description: Monitoring description.
•Units: Measurement units (dBuV, ...).
•Sample Period (ms): It saves a spectrum each time period defined in this
field.
•Band: Select between satellite or terrestrial band.
•Num. Inputs: Select the input number to be monitored.
•Input: For each input fill in these fields:
-Name: Name to identify this input.
-Detection Type: Type of algorithm applied to detect differences between
spectrums. According to selected detection type, settings will be different.
Available detection types are:
-FM: For FM Carriers.
-Max/Min: To detect differences between maximum and minimum
values.
-Deviation: Deviation over spectrum outline.

4 Settings for FM detection type:

•Alarm Thresholds
-Min Threshold: Signals that does not exceed this value will indicate that a
station that had been previously detected has disappeared.

November 2023 235 Chapter 10: WEBCONTROL

 -Max Threshold: Signals exceeding this value will be considered as an
operating station.
-Reiteration: Number of consecutive times that the threshold condition
must be met to trigger the alarm.
•Spectrum
-Start Freq: Start frequency to monitor.
-End Freq: End frequency to monitor.
-Reference Level: It must be set to a proper level (according to the
antenna) to avoid saturation or not viewing the signal.
-Average Count: It allows the user to select the number of signal values to
be used as average to establish the signal value that is displayed on the
screen.
-Resolution Filter: Bandwidth resolution filter.
-Video Filter: It is the average of digital acquisitions of the signal. The
lower this value, the faster the signal will be displayed but less clearly and
vice versa.

5 Settings for Max/Min detection type:

•Alarm Thresholds
-Min Threshold: Minimum threshold below that it triggers the alarm. To
disable check the checkbox next to it.
-Max Threshold: Maximum threshold above that it triggers the alarm. To
disable check the checkbox next to it.
-Reiteration: Number of consecutive times that the threshold condition
must be met to trigger the alarm.
•Spectrum
-Start Freq: Start frequency to monitor.
-End Freq: End frequency to monitor.
-Reference Level: It must be set to a proper level (according to the
antenna) to avoid saturation or not viewing the signal.
-Average Count: It allows the user to select the number of signal values to
be used as average to establish the signal value that is displayed on the
screen.
-Freq. Analysis: It is the central frequency of the bandwidth being
monitored. The system calculates it automatically from the BW Analysis
parameter. The user can change this value.
-BW Analysis: Bandwidth where the analysis is performed. The system
calculates it automatically from the start and end frequencies. The user
can change this value. If the bandwidth defined by the user is less than
that calculated by the system, two black vertical lines will appear on the
graph to delimit it.
-Resolution Filter: Bandwidth resolution filter.
-Video Filter: It is the average of digital acquisitions of the signal. The
lower this value, the faster the signal will be displayed but less clearly and
vice versa.

6 Settings for Deviation detection type:

•Alarm Thresholds
-Min Threshold: It indicates how many dB below the reference mask
before trigger the alarm.

Chapter 10: WEBCONTROL 236 November 2023

 -Max Threshold: It indicates how many dB above the reference mask
before trigger the alarm.
-The other parameters are the same than Max/Min detection.

7 After setting the parameters, press “Acquire references” to acquire a

reference spectrum according to the settings.

8 After a few seconds the reference spectrum will appear. If the spectrum is
not right, you can modify any parameter and press “Acquire references”
again until you obtain a valid reference spectrum.

9 Once a proper reference spectrum has been obtained, save by pressing

“Save”.

10 Saved reference spectrum will appear on the box “Mask Monitorings”.

11 To start a mask monitoring, select a reference spectrum in “Mask

Monitorings”, select an input and press “Start Monitoring” to start.

12 Monitoring screen shows measurements and alarms from the last cycle.
When clicking on a channel it will show some additional info.

13 Alarms are notified by sending e-mails to addresses from the e-mailing list.
In order for the meter to send e-mails, the mail service must be configured
in Preferences, SMTP tag (for more details refer to “?SMTP Options” on
page 55).

14 To stop press on “Stop Monitoring” or cancel remote control.

15 All saved data it is available on the “Historical Monitoring” screen.

November 2023 237 Chapter 10: WEBCONTROL

 ► Screen Description (FM Detection type) (1/2)

Figure 147. Monitoring Creation / Edition

1 Selected function (Monitoring).
2 Monitoring selection. In “Monitoring Type” select Mask Monitoring. In
“Monitorings” box select a monitoring to start (it must be a monitoring
previously created in order to show here). Below there is a box with the
monitoring description.
3 Reference spectrum, thresholds (red horizontal lines) and detected stations
(black dots).
4 Start / Stop monitoring.
5 The “Delete” button deletes the selected monitoring and the button “New”
creates a new monitoring.
6 It shows a list of e-mails. When an alarm is triggered, a notification is send
to each one of these e-mails. It allows you to add e-mails in the box “add a
new email”. To remove it press on the cross next to the e-mail. Parameters
to set the e-mail server are in the equipment’s “Preferences” menu, “SMTP”
option.

Chapter 10: WEBCONTROL 238 November 2023

 ► Screen Description (FM detection type) (2/2)

Figure 148. Mask Monitoring Creation / Edition

1 Reference spectrum, thresholds (red horizontal lines) and detected stations
(black dots).
2 Settings parameters for reference spectrum.
3 Detected stations (for FM detection). For other type of detection it shows:
Thresholds (for Max/Min detection); Deviation (for Deviation detection).

November 2023 239 Chapter 10: WEBCONTROL

 ► Screen Description

Figure 149. Mask Monitoring in Operation (FM Detection)

1 View Mode selection.
2 Start / Stop monitoring.
3 Monitoring parameters: Selected input, monitoring name, time interval
between samples (ms) and time elapsed since monitoring start.
4 Spectrum at monitoring frequency band for the detection type selected (in
this case for FM detection). Horizontal red lines are the upper and lower
threshold.
5 Alarm window. It shows alarm data from the last cycle with a description and
date and hour when it was detected. Only shows active alarms. When the
condition that trigger the alarm no longer met, then this alarm disappears in
the next cycle, although it is stored in the database and can be consulted
through the historical monitoring function.

Chapter 10: WEBCONTROL 240 November 2023

 10.12 Mask Historical Monitoring*
*. This function is available only for equipment with “Mask Monitoring” option installed. Contact
PROMAX for more information.

► Description

Historical Monitoring screen shows data obtained during monitoring. It stores all
data about alarms and system messages like memory problems, short-circuits,
etc.

Historical monitoring can be consulted even if monitoring is working.

To access this screen, click on the Historical Monitoring icon .

► Operation

1 In “Monitoring type” box select “Mask Monitoring”.

2 In the “Mask Monitoring” box select the monitoring from which you want to
obtain data.

3 In the “Inputs” box select the input from which you want to obtain data.

4 Select the start and end date and time for the monitoring data query. It must
be the local date and time for equipment.

5 Press "Done" and wait a few seconds to visualize data. All alarms triggered
are shown on screen, with start and end date, channel and a description.
6 When clicking on start / end date on an alarm, it shows the spectrum graph
when the alarm was triggered. When pressing on previous or next arrows you
can see up to 50 graph spectrum previous and after to the alarm moment.

6 To export data to a CSV file, click on "Export to CSV".

November 2023 241 Chapter 10: WEBCONTROL

 ► Screen Description: Historical Mask Monitoring

Figure 150. Data table from Historical Mask Monitoring

1 Selected function (Historical Monitoring).

2 Boxes to select query parameters from the historical data:
•Monitoring Type: Select “Mask Monitoring”.
•Monitoring: Select monitoring.
•Input: Select input.
•From / to: Select date range.
•Done: Press to run query.
3 Data table / Data graph. Data table shows date start and data end for each
alarm. When clicking on any data and hour it shows the spectrum graph in
that time moment (see next figure). Measurement units are the same than
the units selected when creating a monitoring.

Chapter 10: WEBCONTROL 242 November 2023

 ► Historical Mask Monitoring by Detection Type

Figure 151. Spectrum Graph Monitoring (FM detection)

Figure 152. Spectrum Graph Monitoring (Max/Min detection)

November 2023 243 Chapter 10: WEBCONTROL

 Figure 153. Spectrum Graph Monitoring (Deviation Detection)

Chapter 10: WEBCONTROL 244 November 2023

11 CONNECTING TO EXTERNAL DEVICES

11.1 Introduction

The meter can interact with external devices, sharing information through its
interfaces. Connection types are:

 Input/output data via Ethernet port (IPCTRL).

 Input/output data via USB port.
 Video/Audio digital output via HDMI™ port.
 Video/Audio analogue input via V/A port.
 DiSEqC, SCD/EN50494 standard (also known as SatCR) and SCD2/
EN50607 standard (also known as JESS) interface via RF connector.
 CAM modules input via Common Interface slot.
 TS-ASI Input/Output via F connector.

Next is described each of these interfaces and their interaction with external
devices.

11.2 USB Port

Devices that can connect the meter via USB port are:

 USB flash drive.

 USB WiFi adapter (“dongle”).
 GPS signal receiver.

Both USB ports can be used for these devices.

11.2.1 USB Flash Drive

This connection allows the user to copy files (screenshots, channel plans,
dataloggers, DiSEqC commands and others) and export/import installations
from the equipment to the USB and vice versa.

► To copy some specific data from an installation

1 Connect the USB stick to the USB equipment port.

November 2023 245 Chapter 11: CONNECTING TO EXTERNAL DEVICES

 2 USB icon should appear on the top right corner of the equipment. This icon
indicates that an USB stick has been detected at the port.

3 Press the Installations key and check the installation to download some
of its data.

4 Press the key : Manage to access the data of the selected installation.

5 Press the key : Filter by type to select the type of list to view (list of all
the files, only screenshots, only channel plans, only dataloggers or only
DiSEqC commands).

6 Select the files from the list to be copied on the USB memory stick, by
pressing the joystick or by pressing : File and selecting “Mark All” (it
selects all files on the list displayed).

7 Once files are selected press : File and select the “Copy to USB” option.
This option is enabled only if it detects that there is an USB connected to the
equipment and if any file has been selected.

8 It shows a progress bar and a message informing that files are being copied
to the USB.

9 When finish you can remove the cable with the USB stick memory directly
from the equipment and connect it to a computer to view the files copied.

10 Default files are copied to the root directory of the USB memory.
Screenshots appear with PNG extension and data with XML extension.

► To export one or more complete installations

1 Connect the USB stick to the USB equipment port.

2 USB icon should appear on the top right corner of the equipment. This icon
indicates that an USB stick has been detected at the port.

3 Press the Installations key and check the installations to export.

4 Press the key : Tools and select Export to USB.

5 A progress bar and a message indicates that the files are being copied to the
USB. The files are copied to the root directory of the USB in ZIP format.

6 When finished, the cable can be extracted directly with the USB stick and
connect it to a computer to display the copied files.

7 Unzip the installation file to access the data.

Chapter 11: CONNECTING TO EXTERNAL DEVICES 246 November 2023

 ► To import one installation

1 Connect the USB stick to the USB equipment port.

2 USB icon should appear on the top right corner of the equipment. This icon
indicates that an USB stick has been detected at the port.

3 Press the Installations key .

4 Press de key : Tools and select Import from USB.

5 A dropdown menu shows the installations identified in the USB memory. An

installation can be imported if it has the same folder structure than when
exporting. Select the installation to import from those available.

6 The import process starts. If the name of the installation matches with an
existing one, it gives a warning before import.

11.2.2 USB WiFi adapter (“dongle”)

This connection is necessary for the use of the equipment as a WiFi meter (see
“WIFI MONITORING” on page 176 for more details) or to connect to a WiFi
access point and use the meter remotely with the webControl tool (see
“WEBCONTROL” on page 210).

11.2.3 GPS Signal Receiver

The GPS Signal Receiver is needed for the “Signal Coverage” tool. This tool takes
measurements linked to a geographic position determined by the GPS receiver.
Later on, all this data, measurements and GPS position can be downloaded to a
PC and exported to a file for later analysis (see “Signal Coverage” on page 115
for more details).

11.3 Ethernet Port

► Description

This connection allows communication between the meter and a device via an
Ethernet cable using the IP CTRL port.

You can communicate the meter in different ways:

 Through the NetUpdate software by PROMAX.

November 2023 247 Chapter 11: CONNECTING TO EXTERNAL DEVICES

  Through a web browser using the webControl tool by PROMAX.
 Through a software that allows to send remote control commands (such
as hyperterminal or PuTTY).
 Through SFTP protocol (using software such as Filezilla).

► Meter Settings

1 From the meter access Preferences by long press on "Installations" key .

2 Go to "Network" where you can find all parameters to login into a network.

3 Select DHCP ON, if you connect the meter to a network with a router or
server with DHCP protocol enabled. Then the network will set automatically
the parameters in the meter. If not, follow the next steps to set the meter.

4 On "IP Address" box enter the meter IP. Use an IP in the same range used
by the local network (if you do not know these data see “local network
data”). For instance, if the IP for your PC is 10.0.1.18, the meter should have
a free IP in the same range, like 10.0.1.50.

5 In the "Mask" box, enter the mask value, which should be the same as the
one used by the local network (usually 255.255.255.0).

6 To connect the meter from an external network, fill in the “Gateway” with
the info obtained from the local network.

7 Press on "Save" and then "Exit" to save changes and exit.

► Find out Local Network Data

1 To obtain data from the Ethernet network where your meter is connected,
you should use a PC connected to this same network.

2 From the PC click on Start menu in Windows. On the Search box write CMD
and press Enter.

3 In opens a command line in a window. Write IPCONFIG and press enter.

4 It displays a window with some lines with info. On line "Local Network
Ethernet Adapter" see line "IPv4 Address". This is the local IP for your PC.
Write down this IP. Also write down "Subnet Mask" and "Default Gateway".
This data is needed to configure the meter by hand.

Chapter 11: CONNECTING TO EXTERNAL DEVICES 248 November 2023

 11.3.1 NetUpdate Connection

► Description

The NetUpdate software is available for free on the download page at the
PROMAX website.

NetUpdate has the following functions:

 Update the firmware of the meter.

 Open/Receive/Save/Print data files captured with the Datalogger function.
 Transmit/Receive/Edit/Save channel plans.
 Create/Edit channel plans.

For more information about the NetUpdate program, see the user's manual,
which is available on the PROMAX website.

S
C
How to create channel plans using NetUpdate4
A
N

S
How to generate a measurement report with C
NetUpdate4 A
N

► Operation

1 Install the NetUpdate program on the PC. All permissions requested during
the installation must be approved for a correct operation of the program.

2 Switch off the meter. Use an Ethernet cable to connect the meter’s IPCTRL
port to a switch or to the PC’s ethernet port. Switch on the meter.

3 Open the NetUpdate program. In the "Select Port" box select "Ethernet"
option and press "Detect".

4 A window will appear where you must enter the same IP that you have set
in the meter (in our example it would be 10.0.1.18) and then press OK.

5 If connection is successful, a confirmation window will appear and you will

be able to see the meter data in the main NetUpdate window (for details

November 2023 249 Chapter 11: CONNECTING TO EXTERNAL DEVICES

 about NetUpdate program, download the manual from the PROMAX
website).

11.3.2 webControl Connection

The webControl function allows you to connect remotely to the meter in order to
visualize measurements and operate on it. The meter must be connected to a
data network. To connect to meter from a remote access device use just a
standard web browser.

WebControl tools are:

 Measurement and Spectrum: It shows spectrum and measurement from

the tuned channel.
 TV Parameters: It shows data, video and audio from the tuned channel.
 Console: It emulates and allows you to interact with the meter in first
person.
 Quality Signal Monitoring: It monitors a signal according to some
parameters selected by the user.
 Historical Monitoring: It shows data from monitoring and they can also be
exported.
 Installations Management: It manages installation files and creates
channel plans.
 Task Management: It allows the user to schedule some tasks.

For more information about webControl refer to chapter “WEBCONTROL” on

page 210.

11.3.3 Remote Control Command Connection

► Description

The design of this meter is based on a microprocessor which allows data to be

exchanged between the meter and a remote controller (usually a personal
computer). By this way, data can be obtained from the equipment and also
control it remotely.

This protocol is controlled by software using a virtual serial port over an Ethernet
port. Data and information are exchanged using messages consisting of ASCII
alphanumerical characters. This method ensures easy carrying between
different types of personal computers.

Chapter 11: CONNECTING TO EXTERNAL DEVICES 250 November 2023

 ► Operation

1 Install a remote communication program to send commands, such as PuTTY

or Hyperterminal.

2 Use an Ethernet cable to connect the meter’s IPCTRL port to the PC’s
ethernet port.

3 Run the communication remote program. It should appear a window to enter

the meter’s IP (in our example it would be 10.0.1.18).

4 The meter’s communication port is 2222. Enter this number in the box “port”
at the remote communication program.

5 Select connection type: Telnet and press OK.

6 It should appear a window with a command line where you can write and
send remote control commands (download “Remote Control Commands”
from PROMAX website for more details).

11.3.4 SFTP Protocol Connection

► Description

SFTP (SSH File Transfer Protocol) is a protocol to transfer and edit files which
uses SSH to provide security into the data stream.

► Operation

1 Install a program to connect via SFTP (like FileZilla) in your device.

2 Through an Ethernet cable connect the IPCTRL port from the meter to a
ethernet port.

3 Open the program for remote communication. Enter these connection

settings:
•User: Promax
•Password: Monitoring2019
•IP: Meter’s IP (IP by default is 10.8.8.188)
•Port: 22

4 The command console may show first connection attempts and finally
connection succeed.

November 2023 251 Chapter 11: CONNECTING TO EXTERNAL DEVICES

 5 Once is connected you can access several folders and download its files.

11.4 HDMI™ Interface

HDMI™ (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is a technology for transmitting

uncompressed digital data. HDMI™ technology supports, on a single cable, any
TV or PC video format, including standard, enhanced, and high-definition video;
up to 8 channels of digital audio.

This connection allows the equipment to interface with other High Definition
equipment. It can also be very useful to check proper operation of the client’s
TV while on a service call. Everything that can be seen on the meter’s screen is
available through the HDMI™ technology.

This connection allows you to switch between the image from the meter to an
auxiliary monitor by following these steps:

1 Connect the HDMI™ cable to the HDMI™ output connector, ensuring that the
plug is fully inserted.

2 Connect the opposite end to the auxiliary monitor where video and audio of
the equipment will be played.

11.5 Input Jack Connector

The V/A input connector allows connecting a video/audio analogue input signal.
This connection allows the user to view an image on the meter screen coming
from an external source by following these steps:

1 Connect the supplied jack 4V cable to the video/audio input connector,

ensuring that the plug is fully inserted.

2 Connect the opposite end (RCA connector) to the source of video/audio.

3 Switch on the meter and select terrestrial band and analogue signal.

4 Select TV mode and press key : Input.

5 From the menu, select “External”. A message shows that the external input
has been selected.

6 After a few seconds, the input image will be displayed on screen.

Chapter 11: CONNECTING TO EXTERNAL DEVICES 252 November 2023

 7 With the option : Aspect, you can select the aspect ratio of the image,
between 4:3 and 16:9.

NOTE: If the equipment is displaying an external analogue video, it will not

switch to internal video mode anymore when that external video is
disconnected or lost.

11.6 RF Connector

11.6.1 DiSEqC Commands

The RF connector allows controlling an antenna using DiSEqC commands.

DiSEqC (Digital Satellite Equipment Control) is a communication protocol
between the satellite receiver and the installation accessories of satellite
(switches, LNBs, etc.) proposed by Eutelsat, in order to standardize the diversity
of switching protocols (13 to 18 V, 22 kHz) and meet the needs of the
installations for the reception of digital TV.

1 Connect the RF cable to the RF connector for the input signal of the
equipment.

2 Press the Spectrum key to access the spectrum analyzer mode.

3 Press the Settings key and select the satellite band.

4 From the Settings menu, select the polarization (horizontal/vertical) and the
satellite band (high/low).

5 If necessary, enable the Supply output and select the supply voltage for the
LNB.

NOTE: When tuning by channel is selected, polarization, satellite band and

supply output cannot be changed, because these parameters are
determined by the channel plan.

6 Select the option DiSEqC mode.

7 Two new functions appear on the softkeys: Command and Software .

DiSEqC programs appear classified in categories or folders.

8 Select the command or program and press the joystick to send it to the
antenna. These commands or programs allow the user to control an antenna

November 2023 253 Chapter 11: CONNECTING TO EXTERNAL DEVICES

 (for more information about DiSEqC commands and programs download
document from PROMAX website).

S
C
How to align a dish via DiSEqC
A
N

11.6.2 SCD / EN50494 (SatCR) Commands

By means of function SCD/EN50494 (international standard, also known as

SatCR) it is possible to control the devices of a TV satellite installation that are
compatible with this standard, which allows to concentrate downlink frequencies
(slots) by an only cable. By this way each user using a slot can tune and decode
any signal present in the satellite.

1 Connect the RF cable to the RF connector for the input signal of the
equipment.

2 Press the Spectrum key to access the Spectrum analyzer mode.

3 Press the Settings key and select the satellite band.

4 Select the polarization (horizontal/vertical) and the satellite band (high/low).

5 If necessary, enable the Supply output and select the supply voltage for the
LNB.

NOTE: When tuning by channel is selected, polarization, satellite band and

supply output cannot be changed, because these parameters are
determined by the channel plan.

6 In the option SCD/EN50494, select ON to enable it. It appears the icon

at the top right corner.

7 Also in the SCD/EN50494 option, select Configuration to access SCD/

EN50494 parameters.

Chapter 11: CONNECTING TO EXTERNAL DEVICES 254 November 2023

 Figura 154.
The configuration window shows the options that user can modify: number of
slots, slot selected, device address, pilot signal activation (when activating the
SatCR device located in the headend, it emits a pilot signal with constant level
for each downlink frequency to identificate available channels), selected satellite
and frequency step. For each type of slot number unit there is a list of
independent frequencies to select. The user may have separate frequencies for
2, 4 or 8 slots units and these values are not lost when switching from one type
to another.

8 Once SCD/EN50494 is configured, the user can select the slot by the
"Tuning" key.

11.6.3 SCD2 / EN50607 (JESS) Commands

Through the SCD2/EN50607 (internation standard, also known as JESS)

function is possible to control the devices of a TV satellite installation that are
compatible with this standard. This technology has two main functionalities: one
for configuring headends, and another for configuring sockets. This technology
requires bidirectional DiSEqC capabilities.

Thanks to its bidirectional DiSEqC capabilities, the meter can automatically read
the configuration from any SCD2/EN50607 compatible unit connected to it. In
case that no compatible device is detected, the meter allows the user to make
a blind configuration of the unit without any confirmation other than spectrum
reference.

November 2023 255 Chapter 11: CONNECTING TO EXTERNAL DEVICES

 For information about JESS technology, developed by JULTEC, refer to its
website (http://jultec.de/).

1 Connect the RF cable to the RF connector for the input signal of the
equipment.

2 Press the Spectrum key to access the spectrum analyzer mode.

3 Press the Settings key and select the satellite band. From the Settings menu,
select the polarization (horizontal/vertical) and the satellite band (high/low).

4 If necessary, enable the Supply output and select the supply voltage for the
LNB.

NOTE: When tuning by channel is selected, polarization, satellite band and

supply output cannot be changed, because these parameters are
determined by the channel plan.

5 In the option SCD2/EN50607, select ON to enable it. It appears the JESS icon
at the top right corner of the screen.

6 Now the SCD2/EN50607 option shows a new menu. Select Configuration to

access the configuration parameters. The user can select the power, central
frequency, tone beacon and satellite for each band. The user can also select
the number of user bands and the available satellites through the option
"Configuration" on key .

Figura 155.
7 Also from option SCD2/EN50607, select Socket to access the configuration
of socket. The user can select the user bands that should be enabled for the
socket and to send them to configure the socket.

Chapter 11: CONNECTING TO EXTERNAL DEVICES 256 November 2023

 Figura 156.
8 Once it is configured, the user, through the key "Tuning" can select the
user band.

9 User frequency tuned is stored for each User band (UB) and it is restored
each time the multiswitch is being configured.

NOTE: When not detecting any SCD2 receiver, the function enters in a more
basic mode, allowing sending configuration commands even with nothing
connected. In that mode, the user can debug cable issues or even SCD2
units problems.

NOTE: For special devices that use non-standard commands, it has been added
a channel bandwidth for every user band.

11.7 Common Interface Slot

This connection enables the conditional access (decryption) for encoded digital
TV signals, in agreement with the DVB-CI (Common Interface)
recommendation.

This technology supports all those decryption systems for which a valid CAM
module exists, according to DVB-CI, with the corresponding subscriber card.

The equipment by means of Common Interface method offers the possibility of

supporting various conditional access systems, so that video and/or audio
broadcast by encrypted services (scrambled TV for subscribers) may be decoded

November 2023 257 Chapter 11: CONNECTING TO EXTERNAL DEVICES

 following the SimulCrypt model. It provides a standard connector to insert CAM
modules (Conditional Access Module), which allows a specific management for
each codification system.

SimulCrypt is a process that supports various parallel conditional access

systems, together with the encryption algorithms specified by DVB-CSA
(Common Scrambling Algorithm) to control access to pay-TV services. The
SimulCrypt broadcasts Transport Stream contains keys for various conditional
accesses, thereby allowing reception by more than one type of decoder.

NOTE: The insertion of a CAM module or a SMART-CARD in a wrong position

might produce the instrument malfunction and could generate damages
to the equipment.

► Operation

1 Insert the subscriber Smart-Card* in the CAM** module.

Figura 157.
2 Insert the CAM module in the Common Interface slot of the equipment. The
CAM module connector is located on the equipment rear panel. Place the
instrument on a stable surface and insert the module so the printed arrow
appears on the visible upper face, pressing until the extractor mechanism
button becomes visible.

3 If the equipment detects the CAM module it shows a confirmation message.

4 Press the Settings key .

5 Select the Common Interface option.

6 By means of this option the user can navigate through the CAM module
menu. Each time an option is selected, the waiting icon appears, until the
module allows accessing the next menu or option.

*. Smart-Card not included.

**. CAM module not included.

Chapter 11: CONNECTING TO EXTERNAL DEVICES 258 November 2023

 7 To extract an inserted CAM module, press the button from extractor
mechanism and remove the module. If the equipment detects the CAM
module extraction it shows a confirmation message.

11.8 TS-ASI Port

It is an asynchronous serial interface. It is the serial standard used for MPEG-2

TS, in multimedia equipment interconnection:

 Synchronous 270 Mbps data flow (up to 218 Mbps payload).

 Differential signal over coax interface.
 It allows intermediate node test in broadcast and distribution
infrastructures.

11.8.1 TS-ASI Input

The TS-ASI option is a key feature. You can monitor and analyze streams coming
from satellite receivers, transport stream players, multiplexers, etc... It
automatically detects whether the stream is composed of 188 or 204 bytes.

► Operation

1 Press the Settings key to access the settings.

2 Select the Decoder TS Input option. It shows up a menu to select the

transport stream coming into the equipment between the RF Demodulators,
IPTV and the ASI Input.

3 The RF Demodulators option (this option is available only if RF is selected as

a Signal Source) extracts the TS from the RF signal by means of the internal
RF demodulator. The RF signal can come from digital terrestrial, satellite or
cable.

4 The IPTV option (this option is available only if IPTV is selected as a Signal
Source) extracts the TS from the IPTV signal.

5 The ASI Input option gets the TS directly through the ASI-TS input
connector.

November 2023 259 Chapter 11: CONNECTING TO EXTERNAL DEVICES

 11.8.2 TS-ASI Output

It can transmit in packet mode or burst mode. User can use the transport stream
received by the equipment to feed the signal to other devices as well through
the TS-ASI output.

► Operation

1 Press the Settings key to access the settings.

2 Select the ASI Output option. It allows the user to select the signal source
for the TS-ASI packets going out through the ASI Output. User can select
among Off, IPTV, RF demodulators and ASI Input. By this way, the transport
stream can feed another device.

3 The Off disables the ASI Output. If the RF Demodulators option (this option
is available only if RF is selected as a Signal Source) is selected, the signal
through ASI Output is the TS extracted from the RF signal by means of the
internal RF demodulator. The RF signal can come from digital terrestrial,
satellite or cable. If the IPTV option is selected (This option is available only
if IPTV is selected as a Signal Source), the signal through ASI Output is the
TS extracted from the IPTV signal. The ASI Input option enables the TS-ASI
packets coming from ASI input connector go out through the ASI output
connector.

Chapter 11: CONNECTING TO EXTERNAL DEVICES 260 November 2023

12 SPECIFICATIONS RANGER Neo 2 / 3 / 4*

12.1 General

► Inputs and Outputs

Parameter Value Additional Data

RF Input
Input Connector F male 75 Ω
Maximum Signal 130 dBμV
Maximum Input Voltage 50 V rms DC a 100 Hz; powered by the AL-103
power charger
30 V rms DC a 100 Hz; not powered by the AL-
103 power charger
140 dBμV Protected up to 30 seconds

Analogue Video Input

Input Connector Multipole Jack Zin=75 Ω
Sensibility 1 Vpp 75 Ω; positive video

Analogue Audio Input

Input Connector Multipole Jack Zin=10k; same V/A input multipole
jack

Digital Video / Audio Output

Output Connector HDMI™ 1080p Resolution

USB Interface 2.0

Connector USB type A
Features Mass Storage Host Can read and write on a pendrive USB
CDC
USB CDC CDC: Communication device class
Communication Software NetUpdate Functions: Installation management
and firmware update.

IP Interface (control IP)

Connector RJ45 Labeled IP CTRL
Type Ethernet 10 / 100 Mbps Ethernet connection is designed to
work through a switch. We do not
guarantee direct connection through a
cable.
Communication Software webControl Functions: Measurement and
spectrum, TV parameters, remote
console, monitoring, historical
monitoring and installation
management.
Netupdate Functions: Installation management
and firmware update.

*.These specifications are for models RANGER Neo 2, 3 and 4. When a specification is for a specific model it is explained
between brackets.

November 2023 261 Chapter 12: SPECIFICATIONS RANGER Neo 2 / 3 / 4

Parameter Value Additional Data
IP by default 10.8.8.188 10.0.6.198 for firmware versions prior
to 26.8

WiFi Interface
Type Wireless standard 802.11 abgn Dongle-Wifi connected to USB port
Dongle must be validated by PROMAX

Monitor Display
Monitor 7” TFT touch panel Transmissive colour dot matrix type
Aspect Ratio 16:9
Format 800 x 480 dots (R,G,B)(W) x (H)
Brightness 300 cd/m2

External Unit Power (through the RF input connector)

Terrestrial Supply External
5V Up to 500 mA
12 V Up to 500 mA
24 V Up to 250 mA
Satellite Supply External Up to 500 mA
5V Up to 500 mA
13 V Up to 500 mA
15 V Up to 500 mA
18 V Up to 500 mA
22 kHz Signal Voltage 0.65 V ± 0.25 V Selectable in Satellite band
22 kHz Signal Frequency 22 kHz ± 4 kHz Selectable in Satellite band
DiSEqC Generator DiSEqC 2.2 (DiSEqC 1.2 commands DiSEqC is a trademark of EUTELSAT
implemented)
SATCR / SCD (EN50494) Available DiSEqC 1.2
dCSS / SCD2 (EN50607) Available Compatible with LNB SKY UK
According DiSEqC 2.x

►Channel Plans

Parameter Value Additional Data

CCIR Available
OIRT Available
STDL Available
FCC Available
EIA Available

►Mechanical Features

Parameter Value Additional Data

Dimensions 290x185x95 mm (W) x (H) x (D)
Weight 2.2 kg Without installed options
Size 5,096 cm3

Chapter 12: SPECIFICATIONS RANGER Neo 2 / 3 / 4 262 November 2023

►Power Supply

Parameter Value Additional Data

Internal Battery 7.2 V; 13 Ah Li-Ion Intelligent battery
Battery Operation Time > 5 hours in continuous mode No EXTERNAL supply active
3h (for RANGER Neo 4) Under these
conditions: DVB-T2, 4K, brightness
TFT 80%, TV mode and decoding TV
image
Recharging time 3 hours up to 80% With meter off
External Voltage 12 ± 2 V DC 2 A (minimum 1 A)
Using only PROMAX supplied
accessories
Consumption 40 W
Auto Power Off Programmable After the selected amount of minutes
without operating on any control
(disabled by user)

►Operating Environmental Conditions

Parameter Value Additional Data

Altitude Up to 2000 m
Temperature Range From 5 °C to 45 °C Automatic disconnection by excess of
temperature
Max. Relative Humidity 80% Up to 31°C; decreasing lineally up to
50% at 40 °C.

NOTE: Equipment specifications are set in these environmental operating conditions. Operation outside
these specifications is also possible. Please check with us if you have specific requirements.

►Included Accessories

Parameter Value Additional Data

1x 0 MT0170 Antenna Dual WiFi
1x 0 MF0213 USB WiFi adapter
1x 0MF0214 USB cable
1x 0 CO6861 Aero SMA/f-BNC/m adapter
1x ___ (for RANGER Neo 3 and GPS receiver
RANGER Neo 4)
1x CC-046 Jack 4V/RCA cable
1x AA-103 Car lighter charger
1x AL-103 External DC charger
1x AD-055 F/f-BNC/f adapter
1x AD-056 F/f-DIN/f adapter
1x AD-057 F/f-F/f adapter
1x CA-005 Mains cord
1x CB-084 Rechargeable Li+ battery 7,2 V 13 Ah Built-in
1x DC-300 Transport belt
1x DC-302 Carrying bag
1x DC-230 Transport suitcase

November 2023 263 Chapter 12: SPECIFICATIONS RANGER Neo 2 / 3 / 4

Parameter Value Additional Data
1x DG0237 (for RANGER Neo 2) Quick Reference Guide
1x DG0234 (for RANGER Neo 3) Quick Reference Guide
1x DG0322 (for RANGER Neo 4) Quick Reference Guide
1x MN-001 Monopod

NOTE: It is recommended to keep all the packing material in order to return the equipment, if necessary,
to the Technical Service.

Chapter 12: SPECIFICATIONS RANGER Neo 2 / 3 / 4 264 November 2023

 12.2 Measurement Mode

► DVB-T

Parameter Value Additional Data

Modulation COFDM
Margin of power Measurement 35 dBμV - 115 dBμV 786 MHz, 8k, GI=1/4
64 QAM, CR=2/3
Sensitivity (QEF): 29 dBμV
Measurement Power, CBER, VBER, MER, C/N and VBER measurement can go down to
Link Margin <1E-10; CBER measurement can go
down to <1E-7
Displayed Data Numeric and level bar
Carriers 2k, 8k
Guard Interval 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, 1/32
Code Rate 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8
Constellation QPSK, 16-QAM, 64-QAM
Bandwidth 6, 7 and 8 MHz
Spectral inversion ON, OFF Auto
Hierarchy Indicates hierarchy mode
Cell ID Detected from transmitter station
TPS signalling Time slicing, symbol interleaver and
MPE-FEC
Tuning Range 45 - 1000 MHz

► DVB-T2

Parameter Value Additional Data

Profiles T2-Base, T2-Lite
Modulation COFDM
Margin of Power Measurement 35 dBμV - 115 dBμV 786 MHz, 32k, GI=1/32
256 QAM Rotated, CR=3/5
Sensitivity (QEF): 30 dBμV
Measurement Power, CBER, C/N, LBER, MER, Link LBER measurement under 1E-10
Margin, BCH ESR, LDP Iterations and
wrong packets
Displayed Data Numeric and level bar
Carriers 1k, 2k, 4k, 8k, 8k+ EXT, 16k, 16k+
EXT, 32k, 32k+ EXT
Guard Interval 1/4, 19/256, 1/8, 19/128, 1/16, 1/32,
1/128
Bandwidth 5, 6, 7 and 8 MHz
Spectral Inversion ON, OFF Auto
Pilot Pattern PP1 - PP8
PLP Code Rate 1/2, 3/5, 2/3, 3/4, 4/5, 5/6
PLP Constellation QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM, 256QAM
PLP Constellation Rotation ON, OFF Auto
PLP ID 0 - 256
Cell ID Detected from transmitter station
Network ID Detected from transmitter station
T2 System ID Detected from transmitter station
Tuning Range 45 – 1000 MHz

November 2023 265 Chapter 12: SPECIFICATIONS RANGER Neo 2 / 3 / 4

► ISDB-T

Parameter Value Additional Data

Modulation COFDM
Margin of power Measurement 35 dBμV - 115 dBμV
Measurement Power, CBER, VBER, MER, C/N and
Link Margin
Displayed Data Numeric and level bar
Mode 1 (2k), 2 (4k), 3 (8k)
Guard Interval 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, 1/32
Code Rate 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8
Constellation QPSK, 16-QAM, 64-QAM
Bandwidth 6, 7 and 8 MHz
Spectral inversion ON, OFF Auto
Layer A, B, C
Segments 1...13

► DVB-C

Parameter Value Additional Data

Modulation QAM
Margin of Power Measurement 45 - 115 dBμV 786 MHz
16 QAM Sensitivity (QEF): 30 dBμV
32 QAM Sensitivity (QEF): 33 dBμV
64 QAM Sensitivity (QEF): 36 dBμV
128 QAM Sensitivity (QEF): 39 dBμV
256 QAM Sensitivity (QEF): 42 dBμV
Measurements Power, BER, MER, C/N and Link Margin
Displayed Data Numeric and level bar
Demodulation 16/32/64/128/256 QAM
Symbol Rate 1000 - 7100 kbauds
Roll-off (α) factor of Nyquist filter 0.15
Spectral Inversion ON, OFF Auto
Tuning Range 45 – 1000 MHz

► DVB-C2

Parameter Value Additional Data

Modulation QAM
Margin of Power Measurement 45 - 115 dBμV 786 MHz, 32k, GI=1/128
1024 QAM Rotated, CR=9/10
Sensitivity (QEF): 48 dBμV
Measurements Power, CBER, MER, C/N, LBER, BCH
ESR, LDP Iterations and wrong
packets
Displayed Data Numeric and level bar
Carriers 4k
Guard Interval 1/64, 1/128
Bandwidth 6, 8 MHz
Spectral Inversion ON, OFF Auto
Pilot Pattern PP1 - PP8
Code Rate PLP 2/3, 3/4, 4/5, 5/6, 8/9, 9/10

Chapter 12: SPECIFICATIONS RANGER Neo 2 / 3 / 4 266 November 2023

Parameter Value Additional Data
PLP Constellation 64 QAM, 256 QAM, 1k QAM, 4K QAM
Dslice PLP 0 - 256 Auto
PLP ID 0 - 256
Cell ID Detected from transmitter station
Network ID Detected from transmitter station
C2 System ID Detected from transmitter station
Tuning Range 45 – 1000 MHz

► J83 Annex B

Parameter Value Additional Data

Modulation COFDM
Margin of Power Measurement 35 dBμV - 115 dBμV
Measurement Power, BER, MER, C/N and Link Margin
Displayed Data Numeric and level bar
Bandwidth 5, 6, 7 and 8 MHz
Spectral Inversion ON, OFF Auto
Demodulation 64/256 QAM
Symbol Rate 5057/5361 kbauds
Roll-off factor (α) for Nyquist 0.18 / 0.12
filter

► Analogue TV

Parameter Value Additional Data

Colour System PAL, SECAM and NTSC
Standard Supported M, N, B, G, I, D, K and L
Sensibility 40 dBμV for a correct synchronism

► FM/RDS

Parameter Value Additional Data

Tuning range 45 - 1000 MHz
Tuning step size 10 kHz
Sensitivity 5 dBμV 150 MHz (S+N/N = 40 dB)
Selectivity (mono) ± 200 kHz 25 dB

► DVB-S

Parameter Value Additional Data

Modulation QPSK
Margin of Power Measurement 35 dBμV - 115 dBμV 2150 MHz, 27500 kSps, CR=2/3
Sensitivity (QEF): 29 dBμV
18 dBµV a 2.15 GHz / 2 MSs;
30 dBµV a 2.15 GHz / 27 MSs;
33 dBµV a 2.15 GHz / 45 MSs
Measurements Power, CBER, MER, C/N and Link
Margin
Displayed Data Numeric and level bar

November 2023 267 Chapter 12: SPECIFICATIONS RANGER Neo 2 / 3 / 4

Parameter Value Additional Data
Symbol Rate 1 - 45 Mbauds
Roll-off (α) factor of Nyquist filter 0.35 Auto
Code rate 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8
Spectral Inversion ON, OFF
Tuning Range 250 – 2350 MHz From 2150 to 2350 MHz does not
meet sensitivity specifications

► DVB-S2

Parameter Value Additional Data

Modulation QPSK, 8PSK, 16APSK, 32APSK Compatible with CCM, ACM and VCM
modes
Margin of Power Measurement 35 dBμV - 115 dBμV 2150 MHz, 27500 kSps, CR=2/3
Roll-off: 0,20
QPSK Sensitivity (QEF): 26 dBμV
8PSK Sensitivity (QEF): 30 dBμV
8PSK:
24 dBμV a 2.15 GHz / 2 MSs;
34 dBμV a 2.15 GHz / 27 MSs
Measurements Power, CBER, LBER, MER, C/N, BCH
ESR, Wrong Packets and Link Margin
Displayed Data Numeric and level bar
Symbol Rate 2 - 45 MSps QPSK, 8PSK, 16APSK, 32APSK
Roll-off (α) factor of Nyquist filter 0.20, 0.25 and 0.35
Code rate (8PSK) 1/2, 3/5, 2/3, 3/4, 4/5, 5/6, 8/9, 9/10
Code rate (QPSK) 3/5, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 8/9, 9/10
Code rate (16APSK) 2/3, 3/4, 4/5, 5/6, 8/9, 9/10
Code rate (32APSK) 3/4, 4/5, 5/6, 8/9, 9/10
Spectral Inversion ON, OFF Auto
Pilots Indicator
TS clock Available Warning message when the TS clock
is too high
Tuning Range 250 – 2350 MHz From 2150 to 2350 MHz does not
meet sensitivity specifications

► DSS

Parameter Value Additional Data

Modulation QPSK
Margin of Power Measurement 35 dBμV - 115 dBμV
Measurements Power, CBER, VBER, MER, C/N and
Noise Margin
Displayed Data Numeric and level bar
Symbol Rate 20 Mbauds or variable Auto detected
Roll-off (α) factor of Nyquist filter 0.2
Code rate 1/2, 2/3, 6/7 and AUTO
Spectral Inversion ON, OFF Auto
Tuning Range 250 - 2350 MHz From 2150 to 2350 MHz does not
meet sensitivity specifications

Chapter 12: SPECIFICATIONS RANGER Neo 2 / 3 / 4 268 November 2023

 12.3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode

► Digital Signal

Parameter Value Additional Data

General Parameters
Markers 1 It displays frequency, level indication,
level difference, frequency difference
Reference Level 60 dBμV - 135 dBμV Adjustable in steps of 5 dB
Spectrum Range Span, dynamic range and reference
level are variable by means of arrow
cursors

Terrestrial
Tuning range 5 - 1000 MHz Continuous tuning from 5 to 1000
MHz
Tuning mode Channel or frequency Channel plan configurable; tune step
50 kHz
Tuning Accuracy ± 1163 Hz
Tuning Resolution 10 kHz
Resolution Bandwidth (RBW) 2, 10, 20, 30, 40, 100, 200, 1000 kHz
Measurement Range 20 dBμV - 130 dBμV 3.16 μV a 3.16 V
Span (min-max) 200 kHz - 40 MHz for RBW = 2 kHz
1 MHz - 250 MHz for RBW = 10 kHz
2 MHz - 450 MHz for RBW = 20 / 30 / 40 kHz
10 MHz - 995 MHz for RBW = 100 / 200 / 1000 kHz
Digital channels measures Channel power, C/N, MER, BER, LM According to modulation type

Satellite
Tuning range 250 - 2500 MHz
Tuning mode Intermediate frequency or downlink Channel plan configurable; tune step
50 kHz
Tuning accuracy ± 2.6 kHz
Tuning Resolution 10 kHz
Resolution Bandwidth (RBW) 10, 20, 30, 40, 100, 200, 1000 kHz
Measurement range 31 - 130 dBμV 35.5 μV - 3.16 V
Span (min-max) 1 MHz - 250 MHz for RBW = 10 kHz
2 MHz - 450 MHz for RBW = 20 / 30 / 40 kHz
10 MHz - 2250 MHz for RBW = 100 / 200 / 1000 kHz
Digital Channel Measurements Channel Power, C/N, MER, BER, LM According to modulation type

► Analogue Signal

Parameter Value Additional Data

General Parameter
Attenuation scale Auto-range
Numerical indication Absolute value according to selected
units
Graphical indication Analogue bar on screen

November 2023 269 Chapter 12: SPECIFICATIONS RANGER Neo 2 / 3 / 4

Parameter Value Additional Data
Audible indicator Pitch sound Tone with pitch proportional to signal
strength

Terrestrial
Tuning Range 5 - 1000 MHz
Tuning Mode Manual
Tuning Resolution 10 kHz
Measurement Range 15 dBμV - 130 dBμV 3.16 μV - 3.16 V
Analogue channels measures Level, C/N, V/A
Accuracy ±1,5 dB 20 dBμV - 130 dBμV @ 990 MHz
10 μV - 3.16 V
23 °C ± 5 °C
Out of range indication <, >

Satellite
Tuning Range 250 - 2500 MHz
Tuning Mode Intermediate frequency or downlink Channel plan configurable
Tuning Resolution 10 kHz
Measurement Range 15 dBμV (250 – 1800 MHz) 31.6 μV - 3.16 V
20 dBμV (1800 – 2300 MHz)
24 dBμV (2300 – 2500 MHz)
Analogue channels measurements Level, C/N According to modulation
Accuracy ±1,5 dB 20 dBμV - 130 dBμV @ 2490 MHz
10 μV - 3.16 V
23 °C ± 5 °C
Out of range indication <, >

12.4 TV Mode

► Video

Parameter Value Additional Data

Codecs MPEG-1
MPEG-2 MP@HL (Main profile high level)
MPEG-4 AVC H.264 High Profile Level 4.1; maximum
bitrate 40 Mbps
H.265 L4.1 Maximum bitrate according to
specifications b HEVC High Profile 4.1
H.265 L5.1 Main 10 only for RANGER Neo 4
Maximum Image Size 1920x1080x60p; 1280x720x60p/50p
3840x2160x60p only for RANGER Neo 4
Minimum Image Size 352x240x30p; 352x288x25p
Bitrate 40 Mbps
Aspect Ratio 16/9; 4/3
SI/PSI Data Service list and main PIDs
HD Video Resolution 1080, 720 and 576 Progressive or interlaced
HDMI™ Output Resolution 1080p

Chapter 12: SPECIFICATIONS RANGER Neo 2 / 3 / 4 270 November 2023

► Audio

Parameter Value Additional Data

Codecs MPEG-1
MPEG-2
HE-AAC
Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital +
Demodulation According to the TV standard
De-emphasis 50 μs 75 μs (NTSC)
Sound subcarrier Digital frequency synthesis according
to the TV standard

► Transport Stream

Parameter Value Additional Data

Communication Protocol MPEG-2
Packets 188 or 204 bytes Automatic detection
Video Info Type, bitrate, format, aspect ratio,
frequency, profile, PID
Service Info Network, provider, NID, ONID,
scrambled/free, TSID, SID, LCN
Audio Info Type, bitrate, format, frequency,
mono/stereo, language, PID
Max. Recording Bitrate Up to 66 Mbit/s Between 44 and 66 Mbit/s the TS
recorded cannot be played or
analyzed
Memory for Recording 1 GB

12.5 WiFi Analyzer Mode 2.4 GHz

Parameter Value Additional Data

Band 2.40 GHz
Resolution Filter 100 kHz
Reference Level Available
RSSI Available (dBm) Depending on WiFi dongle
SNR Available (dB)
Maximum Power +15 dBm Measured over spectrum
Average Power +15 dBm Measured over spectrum
Bandwidth Access Point Bandwidth
Access Point Number Access Point number in the same BW

12.6 IPTV Mode

Parameter Value Additional Data

IP 224.0.0.0 - 239.255.255.255
Ports 1024 - 65535
Maximum Bitrate 80 Mbit/s

November 2023 271 Chapter 12: SPECIFICATIONS RANGER Neo 2 / 3 / 4

Parameter Value Additional Data
IPER (ITU Y.1540) Available Population of interest: all Ethernet
frames received on the interface;
recommended value according to
quality of service:
class 0 - 4: < 1.0E-4
class 5: sin unspecified
class 6 - 7: <1.0E-6
MDI (RFC445) Available Population of interest: specified
multicast stream; recommended
value < 0.005 pkt/s
Mean IPTD, IPDV (ITU Y.1540) Available Population of interest: PING packets
with 16 bytes of data. Packet Transfer
Delays are based in the halved round-
trip time of PING packets
Autodetection of crossover cables Available
M3U files compatibility Available

12.7 Tools

► Constellation

Parameter Value Additional Data

Type of Signal DVB-T, DVB-T2, DVB-C, DVB-C2, DSS,
DVB-S, DVB-S2, ISDB-T
Displayed Data I-Q Graph

► Echoes

Parameter Value Additional Data

Type of Signal DVB-T, DVB-T2, DVB-C2, ISDB-T
Measurement range Depends on the standard, carrier and
guard interval
Delay 0.1 - 224 us Typical configuration (DVB-T 8K, GI =
1/4)
Distance 0.3 - 67,2 km Typical configuration (DVB-T 8K, GI =
1/4)
Power Range 0 dBc - -30 dBc Typical configuration (DVB-T 8K, GI =
1/4)
Time scale 1/3 Symbol Period

►LTE Ingress Test

Parameter Value Additional Data

Type of signal DVB-T, DVB-T2, DVB-C, DVB-C2,
ISDB-T
Displayed Data LTE band plus quality parameters for a
selected TV channel

Chapter 12: SPECIFICATIONS RANGER Neo 2 / 3 / 4 272 November 2023

► Attenuación Test

Parameter Value Additional Data

Test Frequencies 3 selectable pilots

► Datalogger

Parameter Value Additional Data

Stored Data Signal type, modulation parameters, If GPS is connected to USB port, the
all measures available for the equipment stamps GPS coordinates in
detected signal type, and time stamp, each measurement made.
PSI info for each measured channel For DVB-T2 signals it saves
information from all PLPs.
In case of Satellite signal it also saves
polarization.
LBER equal o less than 1E-7.
Timestamp Date and time at each measured
channel

► Transport Stream Analyzer

Parameter Value Additional Data

PSI Tables PAT Program Association Table
PMT Program Map Table
NIT Network Information Table
CAT Conditional Access Table
SI Tables NIT Network Information Table
BAT Bouquet Association Table
SDT Service Description Table
EIT Event Information Table
TDT Time and Date Table
TOT Time and Date Table
Bitrate Maximum 80 Mbit/s
Alarms According to ETSI standard TR101 Sections 3.3, 3.9 and 3.10 (no
290 v1.2.1 measurements done)
T2MI Analyzer (for RANGER Neo TBD
3 and RANGER Neo 4)

► Shoulders Attenuation

Parameter Value Additional Data

TBD TBD TBD

► Network Delay (for RANGER Neo 3 and RANGER Neo 4)

Parameter Value Additional Data

1PPS Interface BNC female for High Impedance min. 2 V; max. 5 V
Transport Stream Interface BNC female for ASI
RJ45 for IP
Transport Stream Format DVB-T: TS with MIP packets
DVB-T2: T2-MI
Resolution 0.1 ms

November 2023 273 Chapter 12: SPECIFICATIONS RANGER Neo 2 / 3 / 4

Parameter Value Additional Data
DVB-T Measurements Network Delay
Network Delay Margin
DVB-T2 Measurements Network Delay Margin

12.8 Options

► Fibre Optics

Parameter Value Additional Data

Descriptive Code (for RANGER OP-002-PS It includes WiFi 5G, 2.6 GHz LTE and
Neo 2) RF 6 GHz
Descriptive Code (for RANGER OP-003-PS It includes WiFi 5G, 2.6 GHz LTE and
Neo 3) RF 6 GHz
Descriptive Code (for RANGER OP-004-PS It includes WiFi 5G, 2.6 GHz LTE and
Neo 4) RF 6 GHz
Selective Optical Power Meter
Optical Measure bands 1310 nm ± 50 nm; 1490 nm ± 10
nm; 1550 nm ± 15 nm
Connector FC/APC
Measurement Dynamic Range - 49.9 dBm - +10 dBm Accuracy ± 0,5 dB
Isolation between bands > 45 dB

Optical to RF Converter
Dynamic range of conversion -5 dBm - +10 dBm
RF Attenuation ON = 15 dB; OFF = 0 dB
RF band converted (Optical Cable 65 MHz - 1000 MHz
and DTT links)
RF band converted (Optical IF- 950 MHz - 5450 MHz for universal optical LNB
Satellite Installations)
RF Output 65 MHz - 2150 MHz

6 GHz RF Auxiliary Input

Connector SMA
Frequency Bands Sub-Band 1: 2150 MHz - 3000 MHz
Sub-Band 2: 3400 MHz - 4400 MHz
Sub-Band 3: 4400 MHz - 6000 MHz
Dynamic Range 45 -105 dBμV ATT OFF
60 - 120 dBμV ATT ON
Span (min-max) 1 MHz - 250 MHz for RBW = 10 kHz
2 MHz - 450 MHz for RBW = 20 / 30 / 40 kHz
10 MHz - 1600 MHz for RBW = 100 / 200 / 1000 kHz (the
maximum span might be smaller
depending on the sub-band selected
by the user. This value corresponds to
the sub-band 3)
Conversion Gain 7 dB
-8 dB
Flatness ±5 dB
Spurious < 45 dBμV (-65 dBm); typical value
Inter-modulation Products <15 dB typical value

Chapter 12: SPECIFICATIONS RANGER Neo 2 / 3 / 4 274 November 2023

Parameter Value Additional Data
Maximum Input Signal RF: 120 dBμV; DC: 50 V

► WiFi 5G Analyzer + LTE 2.6 GHz

Parameter Value Additional Data

Descriptive Code (for RANGER OP-002-WL It includes an RF 6 GHz aux. input
Neo 2)
Descriptive Code (for RANGER OP-003-WL It includes an RF 6 GHz aux. input
Neo 3)
Descriptive Code (for RANGER OP-004-WL It includes an RF 6 GHz aux. input
Neo 4)
G
TBD TBD TBD

► DAB / DAB+ Advanced

Parameter Value Additional Data

Descriptive Code (for RANGER OP-002-DAB2
Neo 2)
Descriptive Code (for RANGER OP-003-DAB2
Neo 3)
Descriptive Code (for RANGER OP-004-DAB2
Neo 4)

Modulation COFDM
Combined Antenna Input for Band III
DAB Sensitivity up to 22 dBμV Typical Value
Decoding Audio Service up to 384 kbit/s
Transmission Mode I
Margin of Power Measurement 35 dBμV - 115 dBμV At 239,2 MHz with EEP-3A protection
ratio. Sensitivity (just before
synchronization is lost): 14 dBμV
Measurement Power, C/N, MER, CBER, MSC CBER, All CBER measurement can go down
FIC CBER, FIB Ratio to <1E-8.
MER measurement exceeds 40 dB.
Spectral Inversion ON/OFF Auto
TII Detect up to 8 different TII signatures TII signatures can be detected if SNR
is higher than 0 dB
Constellation Available
MER by carrier Available
Echoes Available Up to 9 echoes;
it is able to detect echoes up to 35 dB
if the channel has a good SNR
Save IQ raw samples into file Available
Save ETI into file Available

► FM Advanced

Parameter Value Additional Data

Descriptive Code (for RANGER OP-002-FM
Neo 2)

November 2023 275 Chapter 12: SPECIFICATIONS RANGER Neo 2 / 3 / 4

Parameter Value Additional Data
Descriptive Code (for RANGER OP-003-FM
Neo 3)
Descriptive Code (for RANGER OP-004-FM
Neo 4)

Frequency Deviation 240 kHz Max peak theoretical value

Frequency Deviation 100 kHz Signal modulated with a 1 kHz tone
Modulation Power from -20 to -14.4 dBr
Stereo Pilot Detection Yes Detected if its frequency deviation is
higher than 500 Hz
Sensibility of a FM mono signal 25 dBuV Min power to detect the signal

Available Measurements
Frequency deviation of whole Available
band pass filtered MPX
Frequency deviation caused by Available
L+R (or mono) component of MPX
Frequency deviation caused by L- Available
R (or stereo) component of MPX
Frequency deviation caused only Available Once decoded
by L channel
Frequency deviation caused only Available Once decoded
by R channel
Frequency deviation caused only Available 19 kHz tone
by stereo pilot component of MPX
Frequency deviation caused only Available
by RDS
Histogram 50 ms (according to Available. It measures the maximal Histograms classify frequency
recommendation ITU-R SM.1268-
value of frequency deviation in 50 ms deviation from 0 Hz to 150 kHz in
2)
and then accumulate them into the binds of 200 Hz
histogram
Histogram All Values (according Available. It accumulates all values of Histograms classify frequency
to recommendation ITU-R frequency deviation into the deviation from 0 Hz to 150 kHz in
SM.1268-4) histogram binds of 200 Hz

► High Frequency

Parameter Value Additional Data

Descriptive Code (for RANGER OP-002-AF
Neo 2)
Descriptive Code (for RANGER OP-003-AF
Neo 3)
Descriptive Code (for RANGER OP-004-AF
Neo 4)
Terrestrial Band
Marker Accuracy ±1 kHz Temperature: 5 - 45ºC
Marker Accuracy (using a 10 ±250 Hz External reference must have an
external reference) accuracy equal or less than ±125 Hz

Chapter 12: SPECIFICATIONS RANGER Neo 2 / 3 / 4 276 November 2023

13 MAINTENANCE

13.1 Instructions for Returning by Mail

Instruments returned for repair or calibration, either within or out of the

warranty period, should be sent with the following information: Name of the
Company, name of the contact person, address, telephone number, receipt (in
the case of coverage under warranty) and a description of the problem or the
service required.

13.2 Considerations about the Screen

This paragraph offers key considerations regarding the use of the colour screen,
taken from the specifications of the manufacturer.

In the TFT display, the user may find pixels that do not light up or pixels that are
permanently lit. This should not be regarded as a defect in the TFT. In
accordance with the manufacturer quality standard, 9 pixels with these
characteristics are considered admissible.

Pixels which are not detected when the distance from the surface of the TFT
screen to the human eye is greater than 35 cm, with a viewing angle of 90°
between the eye and the screen should not be considered manufacturing defects
either.

It is advisable a viewing angle of 15° in the 6.00 o’clock direction in order to

obtain the optimum visualization of the screen.

13.3 Cleaning Recommendations

The equipment consists of a plastic case and a TFT screen. Each element has its
specific cleaning treatment.

►Cleaning the Screen

The TFT screen surface is VERY DELICATE. It has to be cleaned with a soft fabric
cloth (cotton or silk), always making the same move from left to right and from
top to bottom, without putting pressure on the screen.

The TFT screen has to be dry-cleaned or with a product specifically designed for
TFT screens, by slightly dampening the cloth. NEVER use tap or mineral water,
alcohol or conventional cleaning products, because they contain components
that can damage the screen.

Turn off the equipment to locate dirt on the screen. After cleaning, wait a few
seconds before turning on.

November 2023 277 Chapter 13: MAINTENANCE

 ►Cleaning the Plastic Case

The equipment has to be disconnected before cleaning the case.

The case must be cleaned with a solution of neutral soap and water, using a soft
cloth dampened with this solution.

Before use, the equipment has to be completely dry.

Never clean with abrasive soaps, chlorinated solvents or aromatic hydrocarbons.

These products may degrade the case.

Chapter 13: MAINTENANCE 278 November 2023

i OPTICAL OPTION

i.1 Description

This annex contains operating instructions for the next option:

 OP-00x-PS.

This option expands the meter with these functions:

 Selective Optical Power Meter

 Selective Optical to RF Converter
 RF 6 GHz Input
 WiFi 5 GHz
 LTE 2,6 GHz

The evolution of the telecommunications market, more and more demanding in

quality standards, speed, services and so on and also economical and
competitiveness factors has changed the trend in telecommunications
installations, and increasingly, fibre-optics is being imposed on traditional ADSL
twisted-pair copper lines.

For this reason and in anticipation of an increase of fibre-optics installations, this

option has been developed. It is applicable to the field strength meter and allows
adapting it in order to work with fibre-optics networks.

The selective meter option allows measurements on optical fibre networks,

which are necessary to certify an installation according to the parameters set by
local policies.

The optical to RF selective converter has a photosensor for each wavelength,

which obtains the RF signal carried by each one. With this module, user can
measure terrestrial or cable (up to 1 GHz) networks or optical LNB for satellite
antennas (up to 5.45 GHz), so that the installer does not need any additional
equipment to measure this type of installations.

The 6 GHz auxiliary RF input option can be used among other applications to
directly connect optical LNBs with 5.4 GHz output.

The 5 GHz WiFi option extends the WiFi Analyzer to the second frequency range
used for WiFi.

November 2023 279 Chapter i: OPTICAL OPTION

 The 2.6 GHz LTE option expands the spectrum analyzer to the band 7 of LTE.
Band 7 is defined by an uplink band between 2.5 and 2.57 GHz and a downlink
band between 2.62 and 2.69 GHz. Band 7 of LTE is one of the most used globally
since it allows to transmit with greater speed but at a shorter distance and is
more exposed to suffer interference.

This expansion module is available for any unit (both for new equipment or to
upgrade equipment owned).

S
C
Optical fiber
A
N

i.2 Selective Optical Power Meter

i.2.1 Description

The selective meter consists, in first place, of a selective triple filter for 1310,
1490 and 1550 nm signals. The filter separates each wavelength and each one
leads to an independent circuit with a photosensor, which obtains the RF signal
that it carries. Next, a circuit measures the optical signal power received by the
photosensor. The RF signal obtained for each wavelength goes to a band switch.

The band switch receives a signal and converts it to a frequency within the RF
band (65 — 2150 MHz). In the case of a terrestrial/cable signal the signal is not
converted since that signal is within the RF range.

After the conversion, the RF signal output is connected to the analyzer input
connector and the measurement is performed in the usual way to an RF signal.
In the conversion, bear in mind that for every unit of optical attenuation
(one dB), occurs two dBs of power loss in RF. As an example, every 3 dB of
optical attenuation for each splitter are equivalent to 6 dB of power loss for RF.

i.2.2 Optical Fibre Test

► Description

The optical function of this module allows the user to certify a telecommunication
installation by calibrating the signals at the installation and then measuring them
in each of the user access points.

The optical module can measure simultaneously and in a selective way the three
wavelengths used in optical fibre (1310, 1490 and 1550 nm). It has a selective
receiver with a filter for each band that makes a real and very stable

Chapter i: OPTICAL OPTION 280 November 2023

 measurement of each wavelength. With this feature, user will be able to certify
any installation according to the telecommunications infrastructure policies.

► Operation

To access the Fibre Optical Test tool:

1 Connect the optical input signal to the optical input of the equipment.

2 Press the Tools key .

3 Select the Fibre Optic Test option.

4 It appears the screen to perform the Fibre Optic Test on the signal.

Figure 158.

November 2023 281 Chapter i: OPTICAL OPTION

 ► Screen Description

Figure 159.
1 Status message depending on the level of attenuation.
2 Power level of signal.
3 Wavelength of signal (nm).
4 Power level of reference signal, which is used to calibrate and calculate the
attenuation level (dBm).
5 Power level of test signal at the user's access point (dBm).
6 Attenuation level (dB); Attenuation = Current - Reference.
7 Advanced key to access these options: Threshold attenuation and Max.
attenuation (see Max. dashed line).
8 Exit button to exit the screen.
9 Set Reference key to calibrate the reference signal.

Chapter i: OPTICAL OPTION 282 November 2023

 ► Menu Options

On the bottom of the screen there are three menus accessible via function keys.

 It exits the tool.

 When pressing this key it uses the current values of power as a

reference values.

 It accesses the Advanced menu.

In the Advanced menu there are two parameters to configure the fibre optical
test. They are:

 Threshold Attenuation: It defines the maximum difference that can exist

between the reference signal with the highest power level and the
reference signal with the lowest power level. Any signal out of this range
will be deleted and not used as a reference signal during the measurement
process.
 Max. Attenuation: It defines the attenuation level used by the field meter
to display the status message on screen. If the attenuation level is below
this value the status message will be "PASS" and if it is above this value
the status message will be "FAIL".

i.2.3 Practical Example: Certifying a F.O. Installation

Next there is a step by step example to certify a telecommunication installation

of optical fibre by using the optical module.

To make the required certification it is necessary:

 Field Strength Meter with optical module.

 A signal generator of the three wavelengths used in fibre optical
installations in order to calibrate and measure (PROLITE-105).
 A pigtail with a FC to SC adapter.

► Stage 1. Capturing reference measurements

1 Connect the SC pigtail end connector to the PROLITE-105 output connector.

2 Connect the FC end of the pigtail to the optical input of the meter (see figure
below).

November 2023 283 Chapter i: OPTICAL OPTION

 3 Turn on the PROLITE-105 and the meter.

4 Press key to access the Tools menu.

5 Select the Fibre Optic Test option and press the joystick.

6 In the PROLITE-105, press once the SEQ key to select the

SIMULTANEOUS mode. This mode simultaneously sends three wavelengths
signals.

7 In the meter, press the key Set Reference. All current values are
captured, which will be used as reference values.

8 Now, user can proceed to Stage 2 in order to measure the attenuation at

each user's access point.

Figure 160.

► Stage 2. Attenuation Test Measurement

1 Connect the PROLITE-105 in a source node of the transmission optical net-

work, for example in a free strip of the main telecommunications cabinet of
the building.

2 Keep the PROLITE-105 in simultaneous mode for generating signals, so it

SIMULTANEOUSLY generates all three wavelengths (1310 nm, 1490 nm and
1550 nm).

Chapter i: OPTICAL OPTION 284 November 2023

 3 Connect the field strength meter to a receiving node of the optical network
that is going to be measured, such as for example in a UAP (User Access
Point).

4 Using the field strength meter, check measurements on the Fibre Optic Test
screen.

Figure 161.

November 2023 285 Chapter i: OPTICAL OPTION

 i.3 Selective Optical to RF Converter

► Description

The selective optical to RF converter has a filter that separates each wavelength
and directs it to an independent circuit with a photosensor, which obtains the RF
signal that carries. The RF signal obtained for each wavelength passes to a band
switch.

The band switch receives a signal and converts it to a frequency within the RF
band (65 — 2150 MHz). In the case of a terrestrial / cable signal the signal is
not converted since that signal is within the RF range. After the conversion, the
RF signal output is connected to the analyzer input connector and the
measurement is performed in the usual way to an RF signal. In the conversion,
bear in mind that for every unit of optical attenuation (one dB), occurs two dBs
of power loss in RF. As an example, every 3 dB of optical attenuation for each
splitter are equivalent to 6 dB of power loss for RF.

► Connection

Figure 162.
1 Pigtail adapter (supplied with the module) releasing input optical signal to FC-
APC input port.

Chapter i: OPTICAL OPTION 286 November 2023

 ► Settings

After the connection is made, the user can use the equipment for measurement
of optical signals as if they were RF signals. Steps to measure a signal are as
follows:

1 Press the Settings , key and in “Signal source” select “Fiber optic”.

2 From Settings, select the corresponding band, whether terrestrial (for optical
link) or satellite (for optical LNB). In the case of a satellite optical signal and
frequency tuning, user has to select the signal type, characterized by the
band (low/high) and the type of polarization (vertical/horizontal). In the case
of a satellite optical signal and channel tuning, the parameters are defined
by the channel (refer to the Settings menu section for more details).

3 Select the Optical module option and press the joystick.

4 It appears a window to enable the optical module and to configure additional

parameters.

5 Select Enable.

6 At the top right area of the screen appears the OPT icon meaning there is
external power.

7 It appears a window with some setting parameters.

Figure 163.
In this window appears the level power for each wavelength and also the user
can set two parameters:

 Wavelength: Wavelength selection at the RF output by the user among

the three wavelength available: 1310, 1490 and 1550 nm.
 Attenuator: It can be enabled (ON) or disabled (OFF). When the
attenuator is ON is 15 dB RF attenuation. When the attenuator is OFF is 0
dB RF attenuation. The attenuator must be adapted to the installation
according to the RF power (modulation index).

November 2023 287 Chapter i: OPTICAL OPTION

 i.4 6 GHz Auxiliary RF Input

► Description

The 6 GHz auxiliary RF input option can be used among other applications to
directly connect optical LNBs with 5.4 GHz output. The RF input works for three
bands:

 Band I From 2150 MHz to 3000 MHz

 Band II From 3400 MHz to 4400 MHz
 Band III From 4400 MHz to 6000 MHz

► Connection

Figure 164.
1 SMA Connector (RF aux. input signal).

► Settings

Follow these steps to set:

Chapter i: OPTICAL OPTION 288 November 2023

 Figure 165. Auxiliary Input Signal Selection

Figure 166. Band Selection

November 2023 289 Chapter i: OPTICAL OPTION

 ► Configuration

Figure 167.
1 Signal Power for RF Auxiliary Input
2 Signal Frequency for RF Auxiliary Input
3 Signal Frequency Input
4 Optical LNB Power Level
5 Auxiliary RF Input Enabled
6 Central Frequency

i.5 WiFi 5 GHz

► Description

The 5 GHz WiFi option extends the WiFi Analyzer to the second frequency range
used for WiFi.

► Operation

1 Connect the USB WiFi adapter (supplied) to one of the two USB ports on the
device. The "Wi-Fi Configuration" window pops up and it performs a Wi-Fi
scan showing all networks detected. The WiFi icon will appear at the top of

Chapter i: OPTICAL OPTION 290 November 2023

 the screen. Press F1 to exit because it is not necessary to log in a WiFi
network to use this tool.

2 Connect the RF omni-directional antenna (supplied) to the RF input. This

antenna detects WiFi band spectrum.

3 Press "Settings" key to access Settings menu. In "Signal Source" select

"WiFi".

4 Press "Settings" key again, access "Band" option and select a band from
available WiFi bands.

5 Press the “Tuning” key and on “Channel Plan” select the WIFI 5 GHz. In
case it is not available, go to “Installations management” , press :
Manage and press : Installation. Press “Add Channel Plan” and select the
WiFi 5GHz channel plan.

6 To start monitoring, first select tuning mode wether to tune by access point
(AP) or channel (CH) using the F1 "Tuning" menu (enabled tuning mode is
shown on joytstick icon)

7 For more details about WiFi Monitoring refer to “WIFI MONITORING” on

page 176.

i.6 LTE 2.6 GHz

► Description

The 2.6 GHz LTE option expands the spectrum analyzer to the band 7 of LTE.
Band 7 is defined by an uplink band between 2.5 and 2.57 GHz and a downlink
band between 2.62 and 2.69 GHz.

Band 7 of LTE is one of the most used globally since it allows to transmit with
greater speed but at a shorter distance and is more exposed to suffer
interference.

► Description

Follow the steps explained in the section “LTE signals” on page 86.

November 2023 291 Chapter i: OPTICAL OPTION

ii DAB/DAB+ OPTION

ii.1 Description

This annex contains operating instructions for the next option:

 OP-00x-DAB2: Measurement of DAB and DAB+ digital radio.

This option allows the user to detect, measure, analyze and visualise digital radio
DAB and DAB+.

The DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) is a digital radio standard, designed for
both home and portable receivers to broadcast terrestrial and satellite audio and
also data. It works with Band III and L-Band frequencies.

The DAB+ is an evolution of DAB using the AAC + audio codec. It also includes
Reed-Solomon error correction, which makes it more robust. DAB receivers are
not compatible with DAB+ receivers.

ETI (Ensemble Transport Interface) is the output stream for a DAB/DAB+

multiplexer. The ETI is divided in several layers with information about the radio
signal. It is similar to the transport stream obtained when multiplexing a TV
signal.

The DAB+ option has some exclusive tools such as the ETI record and the IQ
signal from RF record. It is also able to decode and show images (slideshow) that
some broadcasters sent to complement audio services.

Also some standard tools such as Echoes, Constellation and MER by carrier are
also available on DAB/DAB+.

Icons or identify when a service is DAB or DAB+.

Icon identifies when a DAB/DAB+ service contains slideshow.

S
C
DAB / DAB + measurements
A
N

Chapter ii: DAB/DAB+ OPTION 292 November 2023

 S
C
Advanced DAB
A
N

ii.2 Operation

1 Connect the RF input signal to the equipment.

2 Select RF source signal and terrestrial band in Settings .

3 Lock the DAB/DAB+ signal.

4 To enable auto-detection for DAB/DAB+, access "Preferences" pressing the

key for one second and in the StealthID tab select the DAB option.

5 For more details refer to “RF SIGNAL TUNING” on page 56.

ii.3 Operation Modes

The information that appears on screens for each mode (Measurement mode,
Spectrum mode and TV mode) is described below. To change the mode, press
the corresponding mode key. To change the screen in the same mode, press the
same mode key consecutively.

ii.3.1 Measurement Mode

► Specific Measurements for DAB/DAB+

•MSC CBER: CBER for MSC (Main System Channel). It is part of ETI
containing audio and images.
•FIC CBER: CBER for FIC (Fast Information Channel). It is part of ETI
containing information about the configuration of the ETI itself, such as
number and type of services.
•CBER: Bit error ratio for DAB/DAB+ channel (it includes all the ETI
content).
•FIB Ratio: FIC quality ratio. It is calculated from wrong packets detected
by CRC. 100% is the top quality level.
 Joystick Functions:
•Joystick up/down: Change of main measurement on screen (only for
Measurement 1/3).
•Joystick right/left: Change of channel/frequency.

November 2023 293 Chapter ii: DAB/DAB+ OPTION

  Function Keys:
•F1 Tuning: Tuning options.
•F2 DAB: DAB detected parameters.
•F3 Tools: Tools enabled for DAB.
 Status Bar: It shows if the ETI is locked or unlocked. If it is locked then it
shows the TII (Transmitter Identification Information) that is received with
more power. It also shows the transmitter main identifier (M) and sub-
identifier (S).

► Measurement Mode Screens

Figure 168. Measurement 1/3

Chapter ii: DAB/DAB+ OPTION 294 November 2023

 Figure 169. Measurement 2/3

Figure 170. Measurement 3/3.

ii.3.2 Spectrum Analyzer Mode

 Joystick Functions:
•Joystick up/down: Change of reference level.
•Joystick right/left (according to joystick mode):
-SP: Change of SPAN.
-FR or CH: Change of channel/frequency.

November 2023 295 Chapter ii: DAB/DAB+ OPTION

  Function Keys:
•F1 Tuning: Tuning options.
•F2 DAB: DAB detected parameters.
•F3 Tools: Tools enabled for DAB.
•F4 Advanced: Spectrum Analyzer advanced options.
 Status Bar: It shows if the ETI is locked or unlocked. If it is locked then it
shows the TII (Transmitter Identification Information) that is received with
more power. It also shows the transmitter main identifier (M) and sub-
identifier (S).

► Spectrum Analyzer Mode Screen

Figure 171. Spectrum 1/3

Chapter ii: DAB/DAB+ OPTION 296 November 2023

 Figure 172. Spectrum 2/3

Figure 173. Spectrum 3/3

November 2023 297 Chapter ii: DAB/DAB+ OPTION

 ii.3.3 DAB Mode

► Info extracted from DAB (DAB 3/3)

-Ensemble
-Country ID
-Service
-Extended Country Code (ECC)
-Content
-Programme Type (PTY)
-Component
-Category
-SubChannel ID
-Format
-Protection Level
-Bitrate
-Audio
-Language
-Radiotext
 Joystick Functions:
•Joystick up/down: Change of service.
•Joystick right/left: Change of channel/frequency.
 Function Keys:
•F1 Tuning: Tuning options.
•F2 DAB: DAB detected parameters.
•F3 Tools: Tools enabled for DAB.
•F4 Advanced: Spectrum Analyzer advanced options.
 Status Bar: It shows if the ETI is locked or unlocked. If it is locked then it
shows the TII (Transmitter Identification Information) that is received with
more power. It also shows the transmitter main identifier (M) and sub-
identifier (S).

Chapter ii: DAB/DAB+ OPTION 298 November 2023

 ► DAB Mode Screens

Figure 174. DAB 1/3

Figure 175. DAB 2/3

November 2023 299 Chapter ii: DAB/DAB+ OPTION

 Figure 176. DAB 1/3

ii.4 Tools

Pressing on the key you access the Tools menu. Tools that are not compatible
with DAB/DAB+ are disabled.

DAB ADVANCED option has some exclusive tools for these signals:

 DAB ETI Recordings.

 DAB IQ Recordings.
 DAB TII.

Also Echoes, MER by Carrier and Constellation tools are also available for DAB/
DAB+.

All the other tools are explained in “Tools” chapter (“TOOLS” on page 88).

ii.4.1 DAB ETI Recordings

The tool DAB ETI Recordings records an ETI (ensemble transport interface). The
ETI contains all services inside the channel. Record can be played afterwards.

Chapter ii: DAB/DAB+ OPTION 300 November 2023

 ► Screen Description

Figure 177.
1 Selected installation; date and time.
2 Images send by the service (slideshow). The DAB/DAB+ service can transmit
still images to complement audio service.
3 Control keys:

 : Record.

 : Rewind.

 : Stop.

 : Forward.

 : Play.
4 Function keys.
5 From left to right: USB (when connected); selected band; battery level.
6 Location where the service is being recorded: internal memory or USB.
7 Information window about recorded files. It shows name, size and creation
date. It only shows files in the selected location (internal memory or USB).
8 Information window about the recording file. It shows file duration, maximum
bitrate, source and available space.
 Joystick Functions:
•Joystick up/down/Enter: File selection.
•Joystick right/left/Enter: Control keys.

November 2023 301 Chapter ii: DAB/DAB+ OPTION

  Function Keys:
•F1 Exit: It quits the tool.
•F2 Erase File: It removes the selected file.
•F3 Export to USB: It exports the selected file to a USB pendrive.
•F4 Advanced: It allows to select a channel service.

ii.4.2 DAB IQ Recordings

The DAB IQ Recordings tool saves the DAB/DAB+ RF signal in I/Q coordinates.
This record can be downloaded on a pendrive and played using a signal analyser
software. To record the DAB IQ is not necessary to lock a signal.

► Screen Description

Figure 178.
1 Selected installation; date and time.
2 (Not in use.
3 Control keys:

 : Record.

 : Stop.
4 Softkeys.
5 From left to right: USB (when connected); selected band; battery level.
6 Location where the service is being recorded: internal memory or USB.
7 Information window about recorded files. It shows name, size and creation
date. It only shows files in the selected location (internal memory or USB).

Chapter ii: DAB/DAB+ OPTION 302 November 2023

 8 Information window about the recording file. It shows file duration, maximum
bitrate, source and available space.
 Joystick Functions:
•Joystick up/down/Enter: File selection.
•Joystick right/left/Enter: Control keys.
 Function keys:
•F1 Exit: It quits the tool.
•F4 Advanced: It exports the file to a USB.

ii.4.3 DAB TII

The DAB TII tool shows information that identifies transmitters (TII) from the
ETI locked. The graph on screen shows PRS and null symbols.

► Screen Description

Figure 179.
1 Selected installation; date and time.
2 ETI locked data: frequency, power, C/N and span.
3 Transmitters data. Transmitters are ordered from highest to lowest power. It
also allows you to select one of the transmitters by clicking on it. Data shown
are as follows:
 Main identifier (Main) and sub-identifier (Sub) of the transmitter.
 Power of transmitter in relation to most powerful transmitter.
 Transmitter Identification label (see next).
4 Softkeys.
5 From left to right: USB (when connected); selected band; battery level.

November 2023 303 Chapter ii: DAB/DAB+ OPTION

 6 PRS symbol spectrum (green) and null (yellow). Using the Advanced menu
you can display each one separately. It also allows you to select the display
of the null symbol with or without transmitter information.
7 It shows if the TSI is locked or unlocked. If it is locked, it shows the
transmitter identification information (TII) that is being received with more
power. It also shows the main identifier (M) and the sub-identifier (S) of the
transmitter.
 Joystick Functions:
•Joystick right/left/Enter: Navigation among transmitters.
•Joystick Enter: Transmitter selection.

 Advanced Menu :
•Tii Labels:
-Import from USB: It allows you to import data from a USB flash drive.
Data imported must be a file in XML format with the description labels of
transmitters.
-Export to USB: It allows you to export data to a USB flash drive. Data
exported is a XML file with all the description labels of transmitters.
•Show:
-All: It shows the PRS and null symbols.
-PRS symbol: It shows only the PRS symbol.
-Null symbol: It shows only the null symbol.
•Null symbol:
-With TII: With transmitters info.
-Without TII: Without transmitters info.

ii.4.4 Constellation

The constellation diagram is a graphic representation of the digital symbols

received over a period of time. It shows in different colours the density of hits
and includes features to zoom, move and delete the display on screen.

Chapter ii: DAB/DAB+ OPTION 304 November 2023

 ► Constellation Screen

Figure 180.
 Joystick Functions:
•Joystick left/right: Frequency/Channel change (depending on the tuning
mode).

 Advanced Menu :
•Grid type:
-Full Grid:The grid where the constellation is displayed is a complete grid.
-Cross Grid: The grid where the constellation is displayed is made of
crosses.
•Persistence: It allows the user to set the level of persistence, which is the
lapse of time the signal stays on the screen before disappearing. Available
options according to the persistence level are: low, medium, high or
permanent.
•Zoom: It allows the user to select a quarter (I, II, III or IV) where apply
the zoom in. To come back to normal view select All.
•Start Carrier/Stop Carrier: This option allows selecting the range of
carriers to be displayed between the first and last.
•Clear: This option clears all symbols in the whole constellation window

For more details refer to “Constellation” on page 89.

ii.4.5 Echoes

The Echoes function shows the response in time of a DAB channel and therefore
it can detect echoes that can occur due to the simultaneous reception of the
same signal from several transmitters with different delays and amplitudes.

November 2023 305 Chapter ii: DAB/DAB+ OPTION

 ► Echoes Screen

Figure 181.
 Joystick Functions:
•Joystick left/right (Channel/Frequency mode): It changes the channel/
frequency (according to the tuning type selected).
•Joystick left/right (Echoes active mode): It changes Echo.
•Joystick up/down (Echoes active mode): It changes zoom.

Remember to press the joystick to switch between the Echoes (EC) mode and
the Channel/Frequency (CH/FR) mode.

 Advanced Menu:
•Zoom: The ZOOM option changes the zoom on the echoes windows.
Zooms are 1x, 2x, 4x and 8x.

For more details refer to “Echoes” on page 95.

ii.4.6 MER by Carrier

The MER by Carrier function analyses continuously the measure of the MER value
for each one of the carriers forming the selected channel and they are displayed
in a graphic on screen.

Chapter ii: DAB/DAB+ OPTION 306 November 2023

 ► MER by Carrier Screen

Figure 182.
 Joystick functions:
•Joystick left/Right: Frequency/Channel change (depending on the tuning
mode).

For more details refer to “MER by Carrier” on page 97.

ii.4.7 Datalogger

The Datalogger function stores automatically measurements in a file set by the

user (name, channel plan). User can store for each datalogger measurements
taken at different test points of the selected installation. Measurements are
made for all channels in the active channel plan, both analogue and digital. Each
installation has its own datalogger files.

Specific mesurements for DAB/DAB+ (MSC CBER; FIC CBER; CBER; FIB Ratio)
are also saved.

For more details refer to “Datalogger” on page 125.

ii.4.8 Signal Monitoring

The Signal Monitoring tool allows monitoring one locked signal or a channel plan
(several channels) by measuring its power and other parameters over time. All

November 2023 307 Chapter ii: DAB/DAB+ OPTION

 this data can be visualized in the meter or downloaded to a PC and exported to
a file for later analysis

Specific mesurements for DAB/DAB+ (MSC CBER; FIC CBER; CBER; FIB Ratio)
are also saved.

For more details refer to “Signal Monitoring” on page 107.

ii.4.9 Signal Coverage

The Signal Coverage function allows the user to check signal for a tuned signal
or a channel plan (several channels) by measuring power and other parameters
over time.

The position where all these measurements are taken is determined by a GPS
receiver. When the equipment locks a GPS signal, it automatically sets date and
time using the GPS signal. As long as the GPS is locked, date and time is updated
every hour.

All this data, measurements and GPS position can be visualized on the meter or
downloaded to a PC and exported to a file for later analysis

Specific measurements for DAB/DAB+ (MSC CBER; FIC CBER; CBER; FIB Ratio)
are also saved.

For more details refer to “Signal Coverage” on page 115

Chapter ii: DAB/DAB+ OPTION 308 November 2023

iii ADVANCED FM OPTION

This annex contains operating instructions for the next option:

 OP-00x-FM: Measurement of FM with advanced features.

This option adds advanced features and tools to the FM measurement and
demodulation.

Some of this new measurements are signal level for demodulated multiplex and
deviations for several sub-carriers that form the multiplex. The new tools shows
the FM multiplex spectrum and the FM deviation histogram.

S
C
Advanced FM
A
N

iii.1 Operation

1 Connect the RF input signal to the equipment.

2 Select RF source signal and terrestrial band in Settings .

3 Select the tuning mode (by frequency or by channel). To tune by channel

select previously a channel plan that contains FM channels.

4 To detect automatically the signal to demodulate press F2 and enable the

StealthID function otherwise select the FM signal type.

5 Select a FM channel or frequency and wait to lock the signal to measure.

6 Press the measurement key to access the Measurement Mode.

NOTE: To enable auto-detection for FM, access "Preferences" pressing the key
for one second and in the StealthID tab check the FM option.

To create a FM channel plan from scratch use the “Discover FM Stations”

tool (for more details refer to “Discover FM Stations” on page 138).

November 2023 309 Chapter iii: ADVANCED FM OPTION

 iii.2 Measurement Mode

► Measurement Mode Screen

Figure 183. Measurement 1/3

► Advanced Measurements for FM

•L+R Dev: Frequency deviation caused only by L+R (or mono) component
of MPX.
•L-R Dev: Frequency deviation caused only by L-R (or stereo) component
of MPX.
•MPX: FM Multiplex level (dBr = dB relative to reference level).
•Offset: Frequency offset between the transmitter and the received tuned
frequency.
•L Dev: Frequency deviation caused only by L channel (once decoded).
•R Dev: Frequency deviation caused only by R channel (once decoded).
•RDS Dev: Frequency deviation caused only by RDS subcarrier.
•Pilot Dev: Frequency deviation caused only by stereo pilot (19 kHz tone)
component of MPX.
•MPX Dev: Deviation of whole band pass filtered MPX.
 Joystick functions:
•Joystick up/down: Change of main measurement on screen.
•Joystick left/right: Change of channel/frequency.
 Function Keys:
•F1 Tuning: Tuning options.
•F2 FM: FM demodulation parameters.
•F3 Tools: Tools available for FM.

Chapter iii: ADVANCED FM OPTION 310 November 2023

  Status Bar: It shows if the FM is locked or unlocked. If it is locked then it
shows the PI (Programme Identification) and the PS (Programme Service)

► Measurement Mode Screen 4/4

Figura 184. Measurement 4/4

► Advanced measurement for FM

Graph bars show dynamically levels for each component of the FM signal:

•L LVL: Left channel level.

•R LVL: Right channel level.
•L+R LVL: L+R component level (left + right), also known as mono, for
MPX.
•L-R LVL: L-R component level (left + right), also known as stereo, for
MPX.

The maximum level reached appears as a vertical red line and the minimum level
as a vertical blue line. The selected parameter appears with a yellow
background. Numerical values for level, maximum and minimum are below the
bars.

The other measurements have been already explained on screen Measurement

1/4.

 Joystick functions:
•Up/down: Change of selected parameter.
 Function keys:

November 2023 311 Chapter iii: ADVANCED FM OPTION

 •F1 Tune: Tune options.
•F2 FM: FM signal parameters.
•F3 Tools: Tools enabled for FM.
•F4 Advanced (Reset Bars): It resets bar graph measurements.
 Status bar: It shows if the FM signal is locked or unlocked. If it is locked it
will show the PI (Program Identification) and the PS (Service Program).

iii.3 Tools

Press the key to access the Tools menu. Tools not compatible with FM signals
are disabled.

The Advanced FM option has some exclusive tools for FM:

 FM MPX Spectrum.
 FM Histogram.

All the other tools are explained in “Tools” chapter (“TOOLS” on page 88).

iii.3.1 FM MPX Spectrum

The FM MPX Spectrum tool shows the FM multiplex spectrum in a frequency span
of 100 kHz. It shows all the subcarriers that form the FM multiplex. It gives a
general view of the FM multiplex and can help to detect problems.

► Screen Description

Figure 185.

Chapter iii: ADVANCED FM OPTION 312 November 2023

 1 L+R subcarrier.
2 Stereo Pilot.
3 L-R subcarrier.
4 RDS subcarrier.

► Measurements

•Level: FM signal level.

•MPX: FM Multiplex level (dBr = dB relative to reference level).
•Dev: Deviation for the multiplex (with all the subcarriers).
 Function Keys:
•F1 Tuning: Tuning options.
•F2 FM: FM demodulation parameters.

iii.3.2 FM Histogram

The FM Histogram shows a graph with the distribution of MPX FM deviation

measurements.

► Screen Description

Figure 186.
1 MPX Measurements.
•Level: FM signal level.
•MPX: FM Multiplex level (dBr = dB relative to reference level).
•Dev: Frequency deviation of whole band pass filtered MPX.
•Hold: Period of time taking samples.

November 2023 313 Chapter iii: ADVANCED FM OPTION

 2 Measurements:
•Frequency: It is the selected threshold for MPX FM deviation.
•Samples: Percentage of MPX FM deviation samples that are equal to the
selected threshold (yellow graph).
•Accumulated: Percentage of MPX FM deviation samples that are equal o
higher than the selected threshold (green graph).
3 Selected threshold for the MPX FM deviation (tipically 75 kHz). Move right-
left to change threshold.
4 .Green graph: Percentage of accumulated samples values for MPX FM
deviation (measured according to the selected standard).
5 Yellow graph: Percentage of MPX FM deviation values (measured according
to the selected standard).
 Joystick Functions:
•Joystick right/left: Move cursor to select threshold for MPX FM deviation.
 Function keys:
•F1 Tuning: Tuning options.
•F2 FM: FM demodulation parameters.
•F3 Tools: Tools available for FM.
•F4 Advanced: Advanced Menu.

 Advanced Menu :
•Samples Hold:
-All: It takes samples continuously.
-Time: It takes samples for a period of time.
•Time: Select the period of time to take samples.
•Standard:
-All samples: Histogram calculated according to the ITU-R SM 1268-4
standard. It accumulates all values of frequency deviation into the
histogram.
-Max 50 ms: Histogram calculated according to the ITU-R SM 1268-2
standard. It measures the maxim value of frequency deviation in 50 ms
and then accumulate them into the histogram.
•Reset: It clears and re-starts the histogram.

iii.3.3 Datalogger

The Datalogger function stores automatically measurements in a file set by the

user (name, channel plan). User can store for each datalogger measurements
taken at different test points of the selected installation. Measurements are
made for all channels in the active channel plan, both analogue and digital. Each
installation has its own datalogger files.

Specific measurements for FM (FM Level, Multiplex FM Level and deviation) are
also stored.

Chapter iii: ADVANCED FM OPTION 314 November 2023

 For more details refer to “Datalogger” on page 125.

iii.3.4 Signal Monitoring

The Signal Monitoring tool allows monitoring one locked signal or a channel plan
(several channels) by measuring its power and other parameters over time. All
this data can be downloaded to a PC and exported to a file for later analysis

Specific measurements for FM (FM Level, Multiplex FM Level and deviation) are
also stored.

For more details refer to “Signal Monitoring” on page 107.

iii.3.5 Signal Coverage

The Signal Coverage function allows the user to check signal for a tuned signal
or a channel plan (several channels) by measuring power and other parameters
over time.

The position where all these measurements are taken is determined by a GPS
receiver. When the equipment locks a GPS signal, it automatically sets date and
time using the GPS signal. As long as the GPS is locked, date and time is updated
every hour.

All this data, measurements and GPS position can be downloaded to a PC and
exported to a file for later analysis.

Specific measurements for FM (FM Level, Multiplex FM Level and deviation) are
also stored.

For more details refer to “Signal Coverage” on page 115.

iii.4 webControl

The webControl function allows you to connect remotely to the meter in order to
visualize measurements and operate on it. The meter must be connected to a
data network. To connect to meter from a remote access device use just a
standard web browser.

WebControl tools are:

November 2023 315 Chapter iii: ADVANCED FM OPTION

  Measurement and Spectrum: It shows spectrum and measurement from
the tuned channel.
 TV Parameters: It shows data, video and audio from the tuned channel.
 Console: It emulates and allows you to interact with the meter in first
person.
 Quality Signal Monitoring: It monitors a signal according to some
parameters selected by the user.
 Historical Monitoring: It shows data from monitoring and they can also be
exported.
 Installations Management: It manages installation files and creates
channel plans.
 Task Management: It allows the user to schedule some tasks.

Specific measurement for advanced FM like different types of signal level (L, R,
L+R, L-R), level and deviation for multiplex FM and others are shown on the
measurement screen.

Figure 187. Measurement and Spectrum for Advanced FM

Parameters for Advanced FM like audio level and deviation can also be
monitored.

Chapter iii: ADVANCED FM OPTION 316 November 2023

 Figure 188. Monitoring advanced FM parameters

For more details refer to “WEBCONTROL” on page 210.

November 2023 317 Chapter iii: ADVANCED FM OPTION

iv HIGH FREQUENCY OPTION

This annex contains operating instructions for the next option:

 OP-00x-AF: High Frequency measurement.

This option increases accuracy when measuring frequency.

iv.1 Operation

1 Connect the RF input signal to the equipment.

2 Press the Settings key to access the Settings Menu and in “Signal Source”
select “RF".

3 From Settings menu access the “Band” option and select “Terrestrial” to
work on terrestrial band or “Satellite” to work on satellite band.

4 Press the Spectrum key to get into the SPECTRUM ANALYZER mode. If
you press this key repeatedly you could see different views of a signal.

5 Press the key to enter the “Tuning” mode and in “Tune by” option select
“By frequency”. Then, on option “Frequency” enter your frequency or move
left/right along the frequency band.

6 If you have a reference signal of 10 MHz, you should connect it to the 1PPS*
input.

7 When connecting the external reference signal it should appear on screen

this message “Tuning external reference”. If it is successfully tuned, it will
appear on screen the “Ext Ref” icon on the top right corner.

8 Press the key to access the Advanced menu and on “Marker” option select
ON.

9 The marker is displayed on screen as an arrowhead, showing on a window

some information about the frequency and power level where it points. You
can move the marker left/right when the marker is in MK mode (to do so,
press the joystick until the MK icon appears).

10 The frequency on the marker’s window has an accuracy of ±1 kHz (3

decimals). When using an external reference signal of 10 MHz, accuracy
reaches ±250 Hz (6 decimals).

*. For the RANGER NEO 2 it is labeled as EXT REF.

Chapter iv: HIGH FREQUENCY OPTION 318 November 2023

 ► Screen Description

Figure 189.
1 Icon when external reference is tuned.
2 Joystick in Marker mode (MK).
3 Marker window:
•Freq: Frequency where the marker is pointing (MHz).
•Level: Power level at the frequency where the marker is pointing.
•F: Frequency difference between marker and cursor.
•L: Power level difference between marker and cursor.
4 Marker.

 Joystick functions:
•Joystick up/down: It changes reference level.
•Joystick left/right (press to change mode):
-MK: Move marker.
-SP: Change SPAN.
-FR or CH: Move cursor to change frequency or channel.

November 2023 319 Chapter iv: HIGH FREQUENCY OPTION

v RACK OPTION

v.1 Introduction

This annex describes special features for the rack version of RANGER Neo.
equipment.

Each portable model has its counterpart in 4U rack format.

v.2 Package Content

Check that your package contains the following elements:

 RANGER Neo RACK Analyzer.

 Mains cord.

 GPS* receiver.
 Dual WiFi Antenna.
 USB WiFi Adapter.
 Aero SMA-H/BNC-M adapter.
 “F” adapters:
•“F”/f - BNC/f adapter.
•“F”/f - DIN/f adapter.
•“F”/f - “F”/f adapter.
 4V/RCA Jack Cable.
 USB (A) - USB (A) cable.
 Quick Start Guide.

NOTE: Keep the original packaging, since it is specially designed to protect the
equipment. You may need it in the future to send the analyzer to be
calibrated.

v.3 Power

The RANGER Neo RACK is powered to the mains via the mains cord. Ensure
that your mains voltage is compatible.

*. only available for RANGER Neo 3 and RANGER Neo 4.

Chapter v: RACK OPTION 320 November 2023

 ►Switching On:

1 Press the ON/OFF switch at the back of the equipment.

2 The boot screen appears and also a progress bar that indicates the system
is loading. At the top left corner it shows the equipment model and release.

3 After the system loads, it shows the last status used (mode and screen).

►Switching Off:

1 Press the ON/OFF switch at the back of the equipment.

v.4 Equipment Details

Figure 190. Front View

November 2023 321 Chapter v: RACK OPTION

 Figure 191. Side View

Figure 192. Back View

Chapter v: RACK OPTION 322 November 2023

 v.5 Specifications

►Power Supply

Parameter Value Additional Data

External Voltage 110 - 230 V AC
Consumption 40 W

►Mechanical Features

Parameter Value Additional Data

Dimensions 482 x 177,6 x 238,7 mm (W) x (H) x (D)
Rack Units 4U

►Included Accessories

Parameter Value Additional Data

1x 0 MT0170 Antenna Dual WiFi
1x 0 MF0213 USB WiFi adapter
1x 0MF0214 USB cable
1x 0 CO6861 Aero SMA-H/BNC-M adapter
1x ___ (for RANGER Neo 3 and GPS receiver
RANGER Neo 4)
1x CC-046 Jack 4V/RCA cable
1x AL-103 External DC charger
1x AD-055 "F"/f-BNC/f adapter
1x AD-056 "F"/f-"DIN"/f adapter
1x AD-057 "F"/f-"F"/f adapter
1x CA-005 Mains cord
1x DG0234 Quick Reference Guide

NOTE: All other specifications are equal to the portable model and can be consulted on the Specifications
chapter (“SPECIFICATIONS RANGER Neo 2 / 3 / 4” on page 261).

November 2023 323 Chapter v: RACK OPTION

vi ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

vi.1 Additional Documents

On the PROMAX website you can find additional information to go deeper in

some aspects related to the field strength meter.

Name Description Link

PROMAX Download Documentation related to PROMAX equipment http://www.promaxelectronics.com/ing/
Area downloads/user-manuals
Signals Description Brief definition of all signals and parameters http://www.promaxelectronics.com/ing/
detected by the meter downloads/user-manuals/ranger-neo-3/
high-class-field-strength-meter-and-
spectrum-analyzer
How to Point a Dish Explanation about how to use the meter to install http://www.promaxelectronics.com/ing/
Antenna and point a satellite dish downloads/user-manuals/ranger-neo-3/
high-class-field-strength-meter-and-
spectrum-analyzer
DiSEqC Commands Description of DiSEqC commands for remote http://www.promaxelectronics.com/ing/
control of antennas downloads/user-manuals/ranger-neo-3/
high-class-field-strength-meter-and-
spectrum-analyzer
Remote Control Description of remote commands for remote http://www.promaxelectronics.com/ing/
Commands control of the meter downloads/user-manuals/ranger-neo-3/
high-class-field-strength-meter-and-
spectrum-analyzer
NetUpdate Manual Instructions manual about the NetUpdate http://www.promaxelectronics.com/ing/
software to update firmware and manage data downloads/user-manuals/ranger-neo-3/
from the meter high-class-field-strength-meter-and-
spectrum-analyzer
Coverage.xsl Excel stylesheet to apply to the signal monitoring https://www.promax.es/downloads/
or signal coverage file software/HDRanger/signal-coverage-
support.zip

vi.2 Social Networks

Name Link
Twitter @PROMAX_news
Linkedin https://www.linkedin.com/company/1493234/
Facebook https://www.facebook.com/promaxelectronics/
YouTube https://www.youtube.com/user/PROMAXElectronics

Chapter vi: ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 324 November 2023

vii MULTIMEDIA CONTENT

The following table shows all the links to video tutorials included in this manual:

Chapter Title Link QR Code

1. Introduction Introducing the RANGER Neo https://youtu.be/UBGLAf-oDP4

2. Setting Up Inputs and outputs https://youtu.be/K41-LxUgOY8

2. Setting Up Front panel https://youtu.be/1rDrBoBAdYI

2. Setting Up Touch screen https://youtu.be/ogGtTOX66sA

2. Setting Up Navigating through the menus https://youtu.be/Zm_QT-_qtY4

2. Setting Up Spectrum footprint https://youtu.be/FDdDTDVqN5E

2. Setting Up How to point a rotor driven https://youtu.be/

antenna bAZuNhJ5aL8?t=826

3. Settings and Settings menu https://youtu.be/LACzovzAn4E

Preferences

3. Settings and Preferences menu https://youtu.be/M0aEnmF3sVM

Preferences

4. RF Signal Tuning Manual input of frequencies https://youtu.be/81l5ezO4cgg

4. RF Signal Tuning Measuring and decoding DVB-S2 https://youtu.be/xuv9ESed_Ak

multi-stream

4. RF Signal Tuning Spectrum analyser 1/3 https://youtu.be/cpGIYJBTOvs

4. RF Signal Tuning Spectrum analyser 2/3 https://youtu.be/rk4c_pM8PME

4. RF Signal Tuning Spectrum analyser 3/3 https://youtu.be/BNep4ID55Zo

4. RF Signal Tuning Measurement mode https://youtu.be/aQcHadfcEkQ

4. RF Signal Tuning TV mode https://youtu.be/wqsYEtgXhmM

November 2023 325 Chapter vii: MULTIMEDIA CONTENT

Chapter Title Link QR Code
4. RF Signal Tuning How to locate satellite beacon https://youtu.be/POqhXWxfsYw
carriers

4. RF Signal Tuning Decoding a real 4K signal in DVB- https://youtu.be/XZnhX0JWvbw

T2

4. RF Signal Tuning LTE signal measurement (mobile https://youtu.be/ApNOxR9dpTg

telephony)

5. Tools Constellation https://youtu.be/jKsILCNc10k

5. Tools LTE ingress test https://youtu.be/DytxQUAIIms

5. Tools Echoes analyser https://youtu.be/f2SKJJ3B6KI

5. Tools MER by carrier https://youtu.be/J1lTkl5uNlo

5. Tools MEROGRAM https://youtu.be/orGLVeYzDO4

5. Tools Spectrogram https://youtu.be/eQpUUN3OtUM

5. Tools Attenuation test https://youtu.be/h7Y5SuZ5nWM

5. Tools Signal monitoring https://youtu.be/yRM4JrblZCI

5. Tools Signal coverage 1/2 (GPS) https://youtu.be/-Xh7s7sDujM

5. Tools Signal coverage 2/2 (KML https://youtu.be/-IMMFZcEd8g

generator)

5. Tools Datalogger https://youtu.be/16ZCBDoClu0

5. Tools Explore channel plan https://youtu.be/mNCLy7zlnOI

5. Tools Discover FM stations https://youtu.be/ZgnpXvnj1wY

5. Tools Field strength https://youtu.be/Av16CAiUynw

5. Tools Task planner https://youtu.be/u2wVhioZikE

Chapter vii: MULTIMEDIA CONTENT 326 November 2023

Chapter Title Link QR Code
5. Tools Transport Stream analyzer https://youtu.be/9YP5Q8FHOWw

5. Tools Transport Stream recording https://youtu.be/l1iiqVhogJU

5. Tools Shoulder attenuation https://youtu.be/GhdA3oaZagE

5. Tools Service recording https://youtu.be/NYYRn3G-QMo

6. WiFi Monitoring WiFi measurement https://youtu.be/75cJlm880_k

7. IPTV IPTV analyzer https://youtu.be/VP1XgAxHM5c

8. OTT OTT operation and analysis https://youtu.be/O4TdvJswPbI

9. Installations Installations management https://youtu.be/TUuHJBX0BQI

Management

9. Installations Sending files by e-mail https://youtu.be/aIzvhn1xWe0

Management

10. webControl webControl introduction https://youtu.be/YV1MicKpSN0

10. webControl File manager https://youtu.be/RAhiw04P2h8

10. webControl Report generator https://youtu.be/_EFG1LmwqCQ

10. webControl Channel plan creator and editor https://youtu.be/0Zg1dg7xZXg

10. webControl Spectrum monitoring (FM radio) https://youtu.be/T6bLB7sFatQ

10. webControl Spectrum monitoring (max/min) https://youtu.be/CACecSJNGQU

10. webControl Spectrum monitoring (mask https://youtu.be/HrcznPZHAXg

deviation)

10. webControl Spectrum monitoring (cross- https://youtu.be/t-AeoXFfUrE

polarization)

10. webControl Spectrum monitoring (4G/5G https://youtu.be/7d3Ar1qDpmQ

interference)

November 2023 327 Chapter vii: MULTIMEDIA CONTENT

Chapter Title Link QR Code
11. Connecting to How to align a dish via DiSEqC https://youtu.be/i5O-e5qOsDA
external devices

11. Connecting to How to create channel plans https://youtu.be/YwbpfRNGJYI

external devices using NetUpdate4

11. Connecting to How to generate a measurement https://youtu.be/fQP8n-59pHc

external devices report with Update4

Annex i Optical fiber https://youtu.be/7OiEijjRZ64

Annex ii DAB / DAB+ measurements https://youtu.be/pUDkiOHvrVM

Annex ii Advanced DAB https://youtu.be/kBv_3ToWdQs

Annex iii Advanced FM https://youtu.be/23I6dyyYbh8

Chapter vii: MULTIMEDIA CONTENT 328 November 2023

November 2023 329 Chapter vii: MULTIMEDIA CONTENT
viii PREVIOUS VERSIONS OF USER’S MANUAL

Manual Version Web Publication Date Firmware Version

F.8.0 June 2022 30.7
F7.0 October 2021 29.9
F6.1 May 2021 29.8
F6.0 March 2021 29.5
F5.1 September 2020 28.5
F5.0 September 2019 28.0
F4.0 May 2019 27.2
F3.0 March 2018 26.3
F2.0 January 2018 25.0

WHAT’S NEW on manual F8.0

•New: Option “Start zoom” (“?Advanced Menu in Spectrum Analyzer Mode” on

page 65).
•Improvement: Specifications and functions for standard ISDB-T and J83B (“?
ISDB-T” on page 266) (“? J83 Annex B” on page 267).
•Improvement: The query for the monitoring database in webControl can take up
to 7 days (“Historical Monitoring” on page 224).
•Update: Several changes in managing monitoring DDBB (“Signal Quality
Monitoring” on page 220).
•Update: DAB is now only available as an option (“DAB/DAB+ OPTION” on
page 292).
•Improvement: SCAN view optimized (“Scan” on page 172).
•Others: Other minor updates and improvements.

WHAT’S NEW on manual F7.0

•Improvement: Video-tutorials inserted along the manual (“MULTIMEDIA

CONTENT” on page 325).
•Update: New screen 4/4 in Advanced FM (“? Measurement Mode Screen 4/4” on
page 311).
•Update: Measurement and monitoring for FM Advanced in webControl
(“webControl” on page 315).
•Improvement: Added a step by step to tune a RF signal terrestrial or satellite
(“Practical examples” on page 40).

Annex viii: PREVIOUS VERSIONS OF USER’S MANUAL 330 November 2023

 •Improvement: For FM signal, parameters PS and PI from RDS are saved on file
XML for Signal Monitoring (“Data Viewer” on page 112).
•Improvement: New option when creating a datalogger that allows you to skip
channels (“Datalogger” on page 125).
•Update: The data viewer from the datalogger now shows BER instead of C/N
(“?Screen Description (Data Viewer)” on page 131).
•New: It allows you to send files from the equipment via e-mail (“? Menu Options”
on page 205).
•New: Watchdog option (“?Tools Options” on page 52).
•New: Notification icons on the top bar of the webControl (“Icon Table” on
page 214).
•New: It allows you to play and record audio from TV parameters in webControl
(“TV Parameters” on page 216).
•New: It allows you to stream from TV parameters in webControl (“TV
Parameters” on page 216).
•Improvement: webControl can store up to 30 days of data in quality monitoring
(“Signal Quality Monitoring” on page 220).
•New: webControl allows you to export and import monitoring (“Signal Quality
Monitoring” on page 220).
•Improvement: webControl allows you to reload an unfinished monitoring (“Signal
Quality Monitoring” on page 220).
•New: Task Management from webControl can schedule tasks to save audio and
ETI (“Task Management” on page 231).
•New: Communication via SFTP (“SFTP Protocol Connection” on page 251).

WHAT’S NEW on manual F6.1

•Update: New detection types on Mask Monitoring (“Mask Monitoring” on

page 234).

WHAT’S NEW on manual F6.0

•New tool: Task Management from webControl (“Task Management” on

page 231).
•New tool (optional): Mask Monitoring from webControl (“Mask Monitoring” on
page 234).
•Update: Monitoring total time counter and cycle time counter on the quality
signal monitoring from webControl (“? Screen Description” on page 223).
•Update: On TV Parameters from webControl if DAB contains images they are also
shown (“? Screen Description” on page 217).
•Update: Polarization for satellite band it is also saved in datalogger (“?
Datalogger” on page 273).
•New option (optional): High Frequency (“HIGH FREQUENCY OPTION” on
page 318).
•Update: New options on webControl (About Equipment; current installation
folder; GPS coordinates) (“? Screen Description” on page 215).

November 2023 331 Annex viii: PREVIOUS VERSIONS OF USER’S MANUAL

 •Update: FM Advanced measurement and DAB advanced measurement are shown
on webControl (for meters with this option installed) (“? Screen Description” on
page 215).
•Update: FM Advanced measurement and DAB Advanced measurement are saved
in datalogger (for meters with these options) (“Datalogger” on page 125).
•Update: FM Advanced measurement and DAB Advanced measurement are
shown in signal monitoring and signal coverage (for meters with these options)
(“Signal Monitoring” on page 107).
•New option: Power off from menu (“Switching On/Off” on page 16).
•Update: Power and MPX deviation from FM Advanced option can be selected as a
main measurement (for meters with this option installed).
•New preference: Time setting by means of NTP protocol (“?NTP Options” on
page 55).
•Update: On Installation Manager, when selecting a channel plan it shows its
version (“Installation Management” on page 204).
•Update: Previous to start a Signal Coverage or Drive Test, it shows the reference
level to be used during measurement (“Signal Coverage” on page 115)
•Update: On Discover FM Stations, each channel is named after its service name
(“Menu Options” on page 140).
•Others: Other minor updates and improvements.

WHAT’S NEW on manual F5.1

•New option: Advanced FM (“ADVANCED FM OPTION” on page 309).

WHAT’S NEW on manual F5.0

•New tool: Channel plan edition from webControl (“Channel Plan Editor” on
page 230).
•New tool: PDF report creation from webControl (“? Options Menu (mouse right
button):” on page 227).
•Update: New parameters available when creating a channel plan from
webControl (“Channel Plan Creator” on page 229).
•Update: In webControl, the TV Parameters screen allows listening to FM or DAB
audio (“TV Parameters” on page 216).
•New option: It allows rebooting the meter from webControl (“Measurements and
Spectrum” on page 215).
•New preference: Using a hard drive for webcontrol monitoring (“?Tools Options”
on page 52).
•New tool (Advanced DAB option): DAB TII with info about transmitters and PRS
and null symbols (“DAB TII” on page 303).
•Update (Advanced DAB option): New fields in DAB 3/3 (“DAB Mode” on
page 298).
•Update (Advanced DAB option): More data in the status bar (“Measurement
Mode” on page 293).
•Update: Ethernet communication specs (“? Inputs and Outputs” on page 261).
•Update: DAB specs (“? DAB / DAB+ Advanced” on page 275).

Annex viii: PREVIOUS VERSIONS OF USER’S MANUAL 332 November 2023

 •Update: Available SID identifier in hexadecimal format (“?Appearance Options”
on page 50).

WHAT’S NEW on manual F4.0

•New tool: File Manager from webControl (“File Manager” on page 226).
•New tool: Channel Plan Creator from webControl (“Channel Plan Creator” on
page 229).
•New tool: Service Recording / TS from webControl (“TV Parameters” on
page 216).
•New tool: Password Recovery from webControl (“? Password Recovery” on
page 213).
•Update: New icon when the meter is connected to the webControl (“Settings and
Remote Access” on page 211).
•New setting: 22 kHz Tone Position (“?Measurement Options” on page 51).
•New preference: SMTP e-mail server settings (“?SMTP Options” on page 55).
•New option: Advanced DAB (“DAB/DAB+ OPTION” on page 292).
•Update: Date and time are updated when locking a GPS signal (“Signal
Coverage” on page 115).
•New option: Schedule for signal monitoring and coverage (“Settings” on
page 111).
•Update: DAB/DAB+ screens (“DAB/DAB+ OPTION” on page 292).
•Update: Datalogger shows profile and PLP number for DVB-T2 channels
(“Datalogger” on page 125).
•Update: The Task Planner can run and stop alarm monitoring (“Task Planner” on
page 146).
•Update: The IP by default for the meter to connect via Ethernet using webControl
or Netupdate is 10.8.8.188 (for previous firmware versions it was 10.0.6.198)
(“Settings and Remote Access” on page 211).
•Update: System messages are saved as alarms on the webControl monitoring
tool (“Historical Monitoring” on page 224).
•Update: TV 3/3 screen and IPTV 3/3 screen show more service features (“? TV +
SERVICE DATA (TV 3/3)” on page 79).
•Update: Transport Stream Recording (“Transport Stream Recording” on
page 162).
•Update: Transport Stream Specifications (“? Transport Stream” on page 271).
•Update: Compatible with standard DCII.
•Update: Last spectrum settings recovered after switching on (“?Advanced Menu
in Spectrum Analyzer Mode” on page 65).
•Update: Improvement of Optical option annex (“OPTICAL OPTION” on
page 279).
•Update: New section “LTE Signals” (“LTE signals” on page 86).
•Update: New annex for RACK models (“RACK OPTION” on page 320).
•Update: Code Rate DVB-S2 Specifications (“? DVB-S2” on page 268).
•Update: Boot screen option removed (on Preferences/Appearance).

November 2023 333 Annex viii: PREVIOUS VERSIONS OF USER’S MANUAL

 WHAT’S NEW on manual F3.0

•Updated: Change of name Webserver for webControl.

•New tool: webControl Monitoring (“Signal Quality Monitoring” on page 220).
•New tool: webControl Historical Monitoring (“Historical Monitoring” on page 224).
•Updated: Mouse as a touch on screen on webControl console.
•New Signal Source: CCTV (“? Signal Source” on page 44).
•New preference: Offset for power/level (“?Measurement Options” on page 51).
•New setting: Touch panel calibration (“?Appearance Options” on page 50).
•New preference: SNMP protocol settings (“?SNMP Options” on page 54).
•Updated: It allows disable LNB when short-circuit (“?LNB Drain (available for
terrestrial and satellite band)” on page 46).
•Updated: Notification when problem during TS recording.
•Updated: It allows recording a TS file bigger than a 1 GB.
•Updated: Frequency marker displays values until Hz.
•Updated: In Signal Monitoring/Coverage user can start even if signal is unlocked.
•Updated: In Signal Monitoring/Coverage shows the file name on screen.
•Updated: In Signal Monitoring/Coverage by channel plan the “span time” setting
has been removed.
•Others: Other minor updates and improvements.

WHAT’S NEW on manual F2.1

•Updated: SPAN values (“Spectrum Analyzer Mode” on page 269).

WHAT’S NEW on manual version F2.0

•Improvement: RANGER Neo 4 model included.

•Improvement: Joystick section (“Joystick” on page 35).
•New option: Stealth-ID ON/OFF (“?Stealth-ID” on page 62).
•Improvement: Specific chapter for TOOLS (“TOOLS” on page 88).
•New option: Signal Monitoring for Channel plan (“Signal Monitoring” on
page 107).
•New setting: GPS Alarm setting (“Signal Coverage” on page 115).
•New tool: Service Recording (“Service Recording” on page 168).
•New tool: Tilt (“Tilt” on page 170).
•New tool: Scan (“Scan” on page 172).
•New tool: Streaming V/A (“Streaming V/A” on page 174).
•Improvement: WiFi chapter (“WIFI MONITORING” on page 176).
•Improvement: IPTV chapter (“IPTV ” on page 184).
•New chapter: OTT signal (“OTT ” on page 199).
•New chapter: webControl tool (“WEBCONTROL” on page 210).
•Improvement: Ethernet Port (“Ethernet Port” on page 247).
•Specifications unified for all models (“SPECIFICATIONS RANGER Neo 2 / 3 / 4”
on page 261).
•Improvement: Additional Information Annex (“ADDITIONAL INFORMATION” on
page 324).
•Improvement: Index by keywords (“INDEX” on page 335).

Annex viii: PREVIOUS VERSIONS OF USER’S MANUAL 334 November 2023

November 2023 335 Annex viii: PREVIOUS VERSIONS OF USER’S MANUAL
ix INDEX

1PPS 166
4K 86

Analogue Signal 67
Antenna adding 206
Antenna remove 208
ASI Output 44
Aspect Ratio 67
Attenuation test 104
Audio 67
Audio Signal 65
Audio Tone 65
Audio tone 65
Average 65

Band selection 44
battery 3
Battery Time 50
battery, charge 4
Battery, time charge 5
Beacon signal 83
Bitrate Analyzer 154
Brightness 47, 50

CAM, module 257

CCTV 44
Center Frequency 52, 59
Center Tuned Frequency 59
Centre Frequency 76
Channel Plan 58
Channel Plan Adding 206
Color System 51
Colour System 48
Common Interface 257
Constellation 89
Cursor 75

Dashed BW 67
Database Services 52
Datalogger 125
Datalogger PSI 52
Detector Type 66
Discovered URLs 67
DiSEqC 46
DiSEqC Commands 253

20 November 2023 335 Chapter ix:

DiSEqC program, add 206
Downlink 60
DVB-CI 257

Echoes 95
Edit Parameters 37
e-mail, settings 55
Equipment Information 50
Ethernet Port 247
Explore channel plan 135
Export Button 52
External devices, connection 245
External Power Supply 45

Fiber optics 279

Field Strength 141
FM Advanced 309
FM RADIO 81
FM Stations, discover 138

Generic Signal 83
Google Earth 3D map 124
GPS Signal Receiver 247

HDMI Port 252

High Frequency option 318

Icons 17
Importing data from USB 208
Information, additional 324
Input Impedance 52
Input Jack Connector 252
Installation creation 207
Installation data export 245
Installation edition 207
Installation export from USB 208
Installation export to USB 208
Installation import 247
Installation, complete export 246
Installation, export specific data 245
Installations 38
Installations management 203
Interarrival Packet Time 188
IP Ethernet Frame Viewer 194
IP Network Log viewer 194
IPTV General Settings and Preferences 196
IPTV Operation 184
IPTV parameters 53

Chapter ix: 336 20 November 2023

IPTV Tools 192
IRG data descriptor 67
IRG Descriptor 85

JESS, commands 255

Joystick 35

Keyboard Shorcuts 38
Keyboard, virtual 39

Language 50
LNB Drain 46
LNB High Oscillator 47
LNB Low Oscillator 47
LTE Filter F. Max 52
LTE Filter F. Min 52
LTE Ingress Test 92
LTE, medición de señales 86

Marker 65, 76
Marker Trace 66
Max. Hold 66
Measurement Mode Screens 69
Menu Tree 18
MER by carrier 97
MEROGRAM 99
Min. Hold 66
Minimal FM Level 52
Minimal Satellital Power 52
Minimal Terrestrial Level 52
Minimal Terrestrial Power 51
Mode keys 39

Netupdate connection 249

Netupdate, conexión 250
Network Delay Margin 65, 165
Network Options 54
NTP Options 55
NTSC 48

Offset 52
Optical option 279
Optical Units 51
OTT description 199

Packet Rate Over Time 188

PAL 48
Persistence of Spectrum 66

20 November 2023 337 Chapter ix:

PING/TRACE 192
Polarization 46
Position Tone 51
Power Off 50, 65
Preferences 38
PSI Tables 153

RACK, features 320

RDS Data 82
Reference key 38
Reference Level 51, 59, 75
Reference of Spectrum 67
Remote Control Command 250
Reset 17
Resolution Bandwidth 66
RF tuning 56
RF, Signal Parameters 61

Sat Band High Low 47

SatCR commands 254
Satellite Band 51
Satellite Identification 83
Satellite Units 51
Scan 172
SCD/EN50494 46
SCD/EN50494, commands 254
SCD2 / EN50607, commands 255
SCD2/EN50607 46
Screen and Data Capture 134
Screen cleaning 277
Screenshot 38
Screenshot, viewer 206
SECAM 48
Security Options 53
Service Recording 168
Service Selection 63
Settings 38
Settings Menu 43
SFTP, conexión 251
Shoulders Attenuation 167
SI Tables 153
Signal Coverage 115, 308
Signal Monitoring 107
Skin 50
SMTP, settings 55
SNMP, Options 54
Social Networks 324
Span 59, 75

Chapter ix: 338 20 November 2023

Specifications, RANGER Neo 261
Spectrogram 102
Spectrum Line 65
Streaming V/A 174
Streaming V/A Options 54
Supply voltages 45
Switching Off by hardware 16
Switching Off by software 16
Switching Off, Automatic 16
Switching On 16

T2MI 159
Task Planner 146
TER. Downlink
51
Terrestrial Units 51
TFT Screen 50
Tilt 170
Time & Date 51
Time settings 55
Tone Level 65
Tools 63
Touch Screen 26
Touchscreen Calibration 51
Transport Stream Alarms 156
Transport Stream Analyzer 150
Transport Stream Recording 162
TS Data 67
TS-ASI Port 259
Tuned Audio Information 80
Tuned service information 79
Tuning by Channel 58
tuning by frequency 58
TV / Radio Mode Screens 77

USB Flash Drive 245

USB WiFi adapter (“dongle”) 247
USB, how to copy files 206

Values Format 51
Vertical Range 66
Video / Audio analogue input 252
Video & Audio Settings 47
View all services 60
Volume 47

WebControl Historical Monitoring 224, 241

WebControl Measurements and Spectrum 215

20 November 2023 339 Chapter ix:

WebControl Remote Console 218
WebControl Settings 211
WebControl TV Parameters 216
Webcontrol, channel plan 220
Webcontrol, Mask Monitoring 234
Webcontrol, password 212
Webcontrol, Password Recovery 213
Webcontrol, Remote Access 212
Webcontrol, service / TS Record 218
Webcontrol, Task Management 231
WiFi Access Points 181
WiFi Operation 176
WiFi Site Survey 181
WiFi Spectrum 178

Chapter ix: 340 20 November 2023

PROMAX TEST & MEASUREMENT, S.L.U.
Francesc Moragas, 71
08907 L’Hospitalet de Llobregat (Barcelona)
Spain

Phone: 93 184 77 00 - International: (+34) 93 184 77 02

e-mail: [email protected]

www.promaxelectronics.com